SONY XDCAM PDW-850 Professional Disc Camcorder Operation Manual
Below you will find brief information for Professional Disc Camcorder XDCAM PDW-850. The Professional Disc Camcorder XDCAM PDW-850 is a professional camcorder that supports various system frequencies (1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97P, 1080/50i, 1080/25P, 1080/23.98P, 720/59.94P, and 720/50p), offering the flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording. It also supports recording and playback of SD signals (both NTSC and PAL), allowing a stepwise transition from SD to HD systems. The unit supports a variety of HD formats, including formats with 720 lines of resolution.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER PDW-850 OPERATION MANUAL [English] 1st Edition Table of Contents Before Using the Unit .................................................................................. 8 Chapter 1 : Overview Features ........................................................................................................ 9 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls...................................... Power supply................................................................................... Accessory attachments .................................................................... Operating and connectors section ................................................... HDVF-20A viewfinder (optional)................................................... Status display on the viewfinder screen .......................................... 11 11 12 13 26 27 Chapter 2 : Preparations Preparing a Power Supply ........................................................................ 33 Using a battery pack........................................................................ 33 Using AC power.............................................................................. 34 Attaching the Viewfinder .......................................................................... Attaching the HDVF-20A/200/C35W/C30WR .............................. Adjusting the viewfinder position................................................... Moving the viewfinder shoe up....................................................... Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket ........................ Detaching the eyepiece ................................................................... Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen ..................................... 34 34 35 35 36 37 37 Setting the Area of Use .............................................................................. 38 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ........................................... 39 Mounting the Lens ..................................................................................... 41 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length .......................................................... 42 Preparing the Audio Input System .......................................................... Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector....................... Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors ................. Attaching a UHF portable tuner (for a UHF wireless microphone system) ...................................................................................... Connecting line input audio equipment .......................................... 43 43 43 45 46 Tripod Mounting ....................................................................................... 47 Connecting a Video Light ......................................................................... 48 2 Table of Contents Using the Shoulder Strap .......................................................................... 49 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ....................................................... 50 Connecting the Remote Control Unit ...................................................... 50 Chapter 3 : Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the Recording Format .................................................................. Setting the system frequency .......................................................... Setting the video recording format.................................................. Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc ..... 53 53 54 54 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance ............................. 55 Adjusting the black balance ............................................................ 55 Adjusting the white balance ............................................................ 57 Setting the Electronic Shutter................................................................... 60 Shutter modes.................................................................................. 60 Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed ................................. 61 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment ............ 64 Adjusting the Audio Level ........................................................................ Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors............................................. Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector ........ Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 ............................................. 66 66 67 67 Setting Time Data ...................................................................................... Setting the timecode........................................................................ Setting the user bits ......................................................................... Synchronizing the timecode............................................................ 69 69 69 70 Chapter 4 : Shooting Handling Discs ........................................................................................... Discs used for recording and playback ........................................... Notes on handling ........................................................................... Write-protecting discs ..................................................................... Loading and unloading a disc ......................................................... Formatting a disc............................................................................. Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage function).................................................................................... 73 73 73 73 74 75 Basic Procedure for Shooting ................................................................... Playing back the recorded clip ........................................................ Deleting the recorded clip ............................................................... Using the Freeze Mix function........................................................ 77 79 80 80 75 Table of Contents 3 Using the Focus Assist function...................................................... 81 Advanced Operations for Shooting .......................................................... 82 Recording essence marks ................................................................ 82 Setting clip flags with switches....................................................... 82 Setting the thumbnail image at recording time ............................... 83 Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored picture data (Picture Cache function) ........................................................... 83 Time-lapse video (Interval Rec function) ....................................... 84 Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion ............................................. 88 Exchanging discs while recording (Disc Exchange Cache function).................................................................................... 89 Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function ......................... 90 Retaking the most recent clip.......................................................... 91 Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically ............................. 91 Assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists ...................... 94 Using planning metadata................................................................. 96 Recording video from external devices........................................... 98 Using the Live Logging function .................................................... 99 Recording proxy data .................................................................... 100 Obtaining GPS location information............................................. 103 Chapter 5 : Operations in GUI Screens 4 Overview ................................................................................................... Switching between GUI screens ................................................... Information and controls in thumbnail screens............................. Displaying menus.......................................................................... GUI screen operations................................................................... 105 105 107 110 114 Thumbnail Operations ............................................................................ Selecting thumbnails ..................................................................... Searching with thumbnails............................................................ Playing the scene you have found................................................. Selecting clips by type (Filter Clips function) .............................. Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails ...................... Changing clip index pictures......................................................... Checking clip properties ............................................................... Setting clip flags............................................................................ Locking (write-protecting) clips ................................................... Deleting clips ................................................................................ 115 115 116 118 119 120 120 121 124 124 125 Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) ......................................................... What is scene selection?................................................................ Creating and editing clip lists........................................................ Managing clip lists ........................................................................ 126 126 127 132 Table of Contents Disc Operations ........................................................................................ Checking disc properties ............................................................... Using planning metadata............................................................... Checking user-defined essence marks .......................................... Formatting discs ............................................................................ Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser................... 133 133 134 136 136 137 Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) .............................................. Preparations for clip transfers ....................................................... Uploading clips ............................................................................. Downloading clips ........................................................................ Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices ........................ 140 141 141 145 145 Shortcut List............................................................................................. 147 Chapter 6 : Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu Organization.................................................................................. 148 TOP menu and top-level menus.................................................... 149 Menu List.................................................................................................. OPERATION menu ...................................................................... PAINT menu ................................................................................. MAINTENANCE menu................................................................ FILE menu .................................................................................... DIAGNOSIS menu ....................................................................... 151 151 162 170 187 191 Menu Operations ..................................................................................... Displaying menus.......................................................................... Basic menu operations .................................................................. Using the USER menu (example menu operation) ....................... Editing the USER menu ................................................................ Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings................ 193 193 193 196 197 200 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor............................................................................................... Selecting the display items............................................................ Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages.................... Setting the marker display............................................................. Setting the viewfinder ................................................................... Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars.................... Setting the shot ID......................................................................... Displaying the status confirmation screens................................... 201 201 203 203 204 205 205 206 Adjustments and Settings from Menus.................................................. Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions..................... Selecting the output signals........................................................... Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches .................................... Setting power saving functions ..................................................... 208 208 208 209 212 Table of Contents 5 Setting up a wireless LAN ............................................................ Setting the color temperature manually ........................................ Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting ................ Selecting the lens file .................................................................... Setting the UMID data .................................................................. 213 216 217 217 218 Chapter 7 : Saving and Loading User Setting Data Saving and Recalling User Files ............................................................. Saving user menu data on a USB flash drive................................ Loading saved data from a USB flash drive ................................. Returning the user file settings to the standard settings................ 220 220 222 222 Saving and Loading Scene Files ............................................................. Saving a scene file......................................................................... Loading scene files........................................................................ Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings.............. 223 223 225 226 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash Drive ................................................................................................... 226 Chapter 8 : File Operations Overview ................................................................................................... 228 Directory structure ........................................................................ 228 File operation restrictions.............................................................. 229 FTP File Operations ................................................................................ 233 Making FTP connections .............................................................. 234 Command list ................................................................................ 235 Recording Continuous Timecode via FTP Connection........................ 239 Chapter 9 : Maintenance Testing the Camcorder before Shooting................................................ Preparations for testing ................................................................. Testing the camera ........................................................................ Testing the VDR ........................................................................... 240 240 240 242 Maintenance ............................................................................................. 244 Cleaning the viewfinder ................................................................ 244 Note about the battery terminal..................................................... 245 Operation Warnings ................................................................................ 246 6 Table of Contents Appendix Important Notes on Operation ............................................................... 255 Specifications............................................................................................ General .......................................................................................... Lens ............................................................................................... Input/output ................................................................................... Audio performance........................................................................ Camera section .............................................................................. Viewfinder and related equipment ................................................ Other equipment............................................................................ Optical disc drive section .............................................................. Supplied accessories...................................................................... Additional equipment.................................................................... 257 257 258 258 259 259 260 260 260 261 261 Chart of Optional Components and Accessories .................................. 263 List of Supported USB Keyboards ......................................................... 264 Recommended USB Flash Drives (As of April 2014) ........................... 267 Trademarks and Licenses ....................................................................... MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License ..................................... MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License...................................... About IJG (Independent JPEG Group) ......................................... Character display software “iType” .............................................. About libupnp................................................................................ About OpenSSL ............................................................................ 267 267 268 268 268 268 269 About GPS................................................................................................ 272 Index.......................................................................................................... 273 Table of Contents 7 Before Using the Unit After purchasing this unit, before operating, it is necessary to set the region of use. (Unless this setting is made, the unit will not operate.) For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of Use” (page 38). Note Before attaching/removing optional components or accessories to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off. 8 Before Using the Unit 1 Overview Features Chapter 1 Overview Chapter A multi-format conversion function enables upand down-conversion between SD and HD, and cross-conversion between 1080 and 720. Squeeze or edge cropping can be selected as the aspect pattern in up- and down-conversion between SD and HD. Note 2/ 3-inch full-HD “PowerHAD FX” CCDs • IT (Interline Transfer) 2/3-inch progressive image sensors with 2.2 million pixels, for full HD resolution (1920 × 1080) • “PowerHAD FX” CCDs, featuring a signal processing ASIC with 16-bit A/D converters These new image sensor technologies enable the capture of very high-quality images, with F11 (59.94i) and F12 (50i) sensitivity and an SN ratio of 62 dB. 1) 1) With noise suppression on (off value is 58 dB) Noise suppression uses proprietary Sony signal processing technology to suppress noise in highfrequency regions. Mechanisms for high reliability A new duct cooling system prevents overheating inside the unit and on its surfaces, for greater reliability in high-temperature environments. Reliability is also enhanced by the drip-proof design. Recording can continue even when the unit is subjected to jarring shocks, because data is stored in shockproof memory before being recorded to the media. Reliable recording is ensured by a recording verification function, similar to the confidence playback function of tape recorders, qualifying the unit for use in demanding broadcast applications. Multi-format support The unit supports various system frequencies (1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97P, 1080/50i, 1080/25P, 1080/23.98P, 720/59.94P, and 720/50p), offering the flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording. It also supports recording and playback of SD signals (both NTSC and PAL), allowing a stepwise transition from SD to HD systems. It is not possible to combine material recorded in different frame frequency groups on single disc (see page 54). Recording of more than 90 minutes of high-quality video and audio data • Signals captured by the full-HD (1920 × 1080) image sensors are recorded in MPEG HD422 format 1) for consistently high image quality. 2) • The unit supports recording of four audio channels 3) sampled at 24 bits for high quality. • Dual-layer Professional discs can record about 95 minutes of high-quality video and audio data. The generous recording times and the highquality of the recorded video and audio allow this unit to meet the most stringent requirements of production teams in a wide range of genres, from news gathering through digital cinema and program production. The unit supports a variety of HD formats, including formats with 720 lines of resolution. 1) The MPEG-2 422P@HL codec performs 4:2:2 sampling and records at a video bit rate of 50 Mbps. 2) Image compression uses the MPEG-2 Long GOP system. 3) The PDW-HD1500 supports recording of up to eight channels in MPEG HD422 format. Format compatibility with earlier models The unit is capable of recording in the MPEG-2 MP@HL 35/25 Mbps formats used by earlier XDCAM HD devices. These formats offer longer recording times than the MPEG-2 422P@HL 50 Mbps format. It is also capable of recording and playback in the MPEG IMX 50/40/30 Mbps and DVCAM 25 Mbps formats. Features 9 Rich selection of interfaces Chapter 1 Overview • HDSDI and SDSDI output connectors: Allow free combination of HDSDI and SDSDI signals. Timecode and other text data can be superimposed on signals from one of the two interfaces. • Composite signal output connector • Selectable video input connectors: The unit is designed to support recording in every type of environment, including reporting by pool coverage teams. HD SDI/SD SDI or composite signals can be selected. SD signals can be upconverted and recorded as HD signals. • Gen-lock input connector: Enables synchronized operation of multiple units, with synchronization possible to either VBS or HDY signals. • Audio input connectors: Supports AES/EBU signal input, in addition to microphone input, +48 V microphone input, and line input. • Timecode input and output connectors • Network connector: Enable transfer of MXFformat files. • USB connector: Enables use of a Windows USB keyboard or mouse. You can also connect a USB flash drive to record proxy data or load planning metadata, or connect the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor or CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor to connect to a wireless LAN network. Features for improved performance under various shooting conditions Picture Cache function The unit can utilize its internal memory to continuously record the current video input, allowing recording to commence a certain time (2 to 30 seconds) in advance of the time when the recording button is pressed, and allowing discs to be exchanged seamlessly without interrupting the recording. Two optical filters The unit is equipped with separate CC filters and ND filters. Noise suppression circuits New noise suppression circuits offer improved performance under difficult evening or nighttime shooting conditions. 10 Features Slow shutter function A maximum of 16 frames can be accumulated using the slow shutter function. In low light levels this allows clear and noiseless video to be shot, and provides a fantasy video effect with ghost images. Time lapse function (interval recording) Using this function slow-moving subjects can be shot with the movement compressed in time. This is convenient for many applications, such as monitoring plant growth, or the progress of a construction site. Slow & quick motion function 1) This function allows the shooting frame rate to be different from the playback frame rate, for the same effect as overcranking or undercranking a film camera. Unlike low-speed or high-speed playback of normally shot video, this provides a smooth slow-motion effect, or action speeded up beyond actual speed. (Due to be supported from package version 2.30) 1) This function is available when the recording format is MPEG HD422, 50 Mbps, and the resolution/system frequency is 1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P. Freeze Mix function This allows a still image from previously captured video to be aligned with the current video output from the camera. Thus you can adjust the camera position to get exactly the same framing for new shots. For example, this function makes it easy to frame summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in exactly the same way. Digital extender function This magnifies the center section of the video. It utilizes electronic processing, which prevents the decrease in sensitivity (F-drop) that occurs when the lens extender function is used. Focus assist function A focus assist indicator is displayed in the viewfinder to aid in focusing. This function is useful when trying to focus using only the image in the viewfinder. Assignable switches Frequently used function can be assigned to switches for quick and convenient operation. Hyper gamma This enables a wide dynamic range without using the Knee function, by smoothly compressing the high-luminance range. The digital wireless microphone system offers high-quality, superior resistance to noise, and simultaneous multi-channel operation. Installation of the DWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver 1) enables simultaneous reception of two channels. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Power supply Chapter 1 Overview Supports digital wireless microphone system 1) These products are not available in countries where they are prohibited by radio frequency regulations. 3.5-inch high-resolution LCD monitor The high-resolution 3.5-inch QHD color LCD monitor displays audio meters, menus, disc and battery capacity indications, and thumbnails of clips stored on disc. Inherits unique features of XDCAM series The unit inherits the workflow features of the XDCAM series, including thumbnail display and metadata management, and improves them by introducing an improved man-machine interface. Metadata includes new user-settable clip flags (OK/NG/KEEP) in addition to the existing Rec Start essence marks. The new metadata types enable more efficient workflows when clips recorded on this unit are edited on nonlinear editing systems. Software downloads When the unit is used with a PC connection, download device drivers, plug-ins, and application software, where applicable, from the Sony Professional products web site. Sony Professional products and solutions site homepage: U.S.A. http://pro.sony.com Canada http://www.sonybiz.ca Latin America http://sonypro-latin.com Europe, Middle East and Africa http://www.pro.sony.eu Japan http://www.sonybsc.com Asia Pacific http://pro.sony-asia.com Korea http://bp.sony.co.kr China http://pro.sony.com.cn 1 2 3 4 5 a LIGHT switch Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector (see page 13) is turned on and off. AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light is in the on position, the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording. MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off manually, using its own switch. Notes • When this switch is set to AUTO, at the beginning of the recording, the picture is recorded even though the lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on. If the beginning of the recording is important, you should set this switch to MANUAL. • To ensure proper operation of the video light, Sony recommends the use of the BP-L80S Battery Pack with the camcorder. b POWER switch Turns the main power supply on and off. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 11 Chapter 1 Overview c DC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male) To operate the camcorder from an AC power supply, connect an optional DC power cord to this terminal and then connect the cord to the DC output terminal of the BC-L70, BC-L160, or another battery charger. Accessory attachments 1 23 4567 d DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector (4-pin, female) Supplies power for a CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor or WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner (not supplied) (maximum 1.0 A). Do not connect any equipment other than the wireless adaptor or UHF synthesized diversity tuner. e Battery attachment shoe 8 9 0 qa qs qd qf qgqh qj qk Attach a BP-L80S/FL75 Battery Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an AC-DN2B/ DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder on AC power supply. ql For details about how to attach the battery or AC adaptor, see “Preparing a Power Supply” (page 33). For information about attaching a synthesized tuner, see “Attaching a UHF portable tuner (for a UHF wireless microphone system)” (page 45). Note For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs: BP-L80S and BP-FL75. a Shoulder strap fitting Attach the supplied shoulder strap (see page 49). b Accessory fitting shoe Attach an optional accessory such as a video light (see page 48). c Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-toback direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and the LOCK knob. d Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position of the viewfinder (see page 35). e Viewfinder fitting shoe Attach an optional viewfinder. 12 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls p Lens mount (special bayonet mount) Connect an optional viewfinder. Attach the lens. Consult a Sony representative for information about available viewfinders. Consult a Sony representative for information about available lenses. g Lens mount securing rubber q Lens locking lever After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections. This fixes the lens mount, preventing it from coming loose. After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position. After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from becoming detached. h Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob (LOCK knob) Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back position of the viewfinder (see page 35). i Fitting for microphone holder Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see page 43). j Shoulder pad Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the position in the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the position for maximum convenience when operating the unit on your shoulder. For details of the adjustment, see “Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position” (page 50). k LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female) A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected (see page 48). Chapter 1 Overview f VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin) r Lens mount cap Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever. When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for protection from dust. s CA (camera adaptor) connector (50pin) Remove the connector cover, and connect the 50pin connector of the optional CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor. (Due to be supported from package version 2.30) Refer to the Operation Manual of the CA-FB70/TX70 for more information about how to mount it. Operating and connectors section Front l Lens cable clamp Clamp a lens cable. m MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female) Connect a stereo microphone to this connector. The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector. 3 n LENS connector (12-pin) Connect a lens cable to this connector. Note When connecting the lens cable to this connector, power off this unit first. 4 1 2 5 6 7 o Tripod mount When using the unit on a tripod, attach the tripod adaptor (optional). Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 13 Chapter 1 Overview a REC START (recording start) button d MENU knob Press to start recording. Press it again to stop recording. The effect is the same as that of the REC button on the lens. Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu. b SHUTTER selector Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Flick to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting within the range previously set with the menu. When this switch is operated, the new setting appears on the setting change/adjustment progress message display area for about three seconds. For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode settings, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 60). c FILTER selector Switches between optical filters built into this unit. When this selector is used with the menu item for filter selection display set to ON (see page 203), the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds. The unit is equipped with two switchable filters. You can switch between four electrical CC filters and four ND filters. FILTER selector (outer knob) setting A B C D CC filter Cross filter a) 3200K 4300K 6300K e EARPHONE jack (monaural, minijack) You can monitor the E-E 1) sound during recording and playback sound during playback. When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone. You can use this with the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit at the same time. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker. 1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals. f AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/ black balance adjustment) switch Activates the automatic white/black balance adjustment functions. WHT: Adjusts the white balance automatically. If the WHITE BAL switch (see page 16) is set to A or B, the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory. If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the automatic white balance adjustment function does not operate. BLK: Adjusts the black set and black balance automatically. g MIC (microphone) LEVEL control a) A type of special effect filter. A cross of light appears in the highlight section. Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4. FILTER selector (inner knob) setting 1 2 For details, see “Adjusting the Audio Level” (page 66). ND filter CLEAR 1/ 4 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/4) 3 1/ 16 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/16) 4 1/ 64 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/64) 14 For details about how to use the MENU knob, see “Menu Operations” (page 193). Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 1 2 3 4 5 Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard. However, if the MIN ALARM VOL item on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to SET, the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the minimum position. Chapter 1 Overview c ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment) knob Right side (near the front) ALARM Minimum d MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment) knob 6 78 9 0 qa Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard. qs MENU STATUS ON/ SEL Maximum OFF CANCEL/PRST ON ESCAPE OFF e MONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches qd By means of combinations of the two switches, you can select audio that you want to hear through the built-in speaker or optional earphones. a ASSIGN (assignable) 1/2 switches Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2 You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu. Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu). Position of up-side switch CH-1/CH-3 MIX Channel 1 audio Channels 1 and 2 mixed CH-2/CH-4 audio (stereo) a) Channel 2 audio For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209). b ASSIGN (assignable) 5 switch You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu. Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu). For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209). Audio output Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4 Position of up-side switch CH-1/CH-3 MIX Audio output Channel 3 audio Channels 3 and 4 mixed CH-2/CH-4 audio (stereo) a) Channel 4 audio a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit, you can hear the audio in stereo. (On the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, HEADPHONE OUT must be set to STEREO.) Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 15 Chapter 1 Overview f VDR SAVE/STBY (VDR save/standby) switch i WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch Switches the status of the power supply to the VDR while recording is stopped (STOP) or paused (REC PAUSE). SAVE: The disc stops rotating and some functions are disabled. Power consumption is lower than when the camcorder is in STBY mode. Battery life is extended. STBY: Recording to the disc starts immediately when the REC START button is pressed. Controls adjustment of the white balance. PRST: Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value (the factory default setting: 3200K). Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance. A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B. Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 14) on the WHT side, to automatically adjust the white balance, and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B. However, the white balance does not function while ATW 1) is operating, even if the AUTO W/B BAL switch is set to the WHT position. B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and WHITE SWITCH <B> is set to ATW on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu, ATW is activated. When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the setting change/adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds. Note An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start of recording when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to SAVE. g GAIN selector Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected in the menu. (The factory settings are L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.) When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the setting change/adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds. For details, see “Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions” (page 208). h OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast control) switch Switches the video signal, which is output to the video disc drive (referred to as “VDR”), viewfinder, and video monitor from the camera section, between the following two. BARS: Outputs the color bar signal. CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera. When this is selected, you can switch DCC 1) on and off. 1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases. • Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day • Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window • Any high contrast scene 16 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions. j STATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display on/page selection/display off) switch To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen. The window consists of four pages, which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward. Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds. OFF: To clear the page immediately after display, push this switch down to the OFF position. You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu. For details, see “Displaying the status confirmation screens” (page 206). k MENU ON/OFF switch Right side (near the rear) g h i j EJECT F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD m NX M Z PREV STOP NEXT . x > k l m l CANCEL/PRST (preset)/ESCAPE switch To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. CANCEL/PRST: Flicking this switch up to this position displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial values, depending on the menu operating condition. Flicking this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings or resets the settings to their initial values. ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has a hierarchical structure, is opened. Each time the switch is flicked to this position, the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy. Chapter 1 Overview To use this switch, open the cover. This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF. ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. a b c d e f n o DISP SEL HOLD EXPAND p q r RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER TC U-BIT m Cover a Built-in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound during recording, and playback sound during playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings. If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack, the speaker output is suppressed automatically. For details about alarms, see “Operation Warnings” (page 246). b LCD monitor Displays camera video, VDR-related warnings, remaining battery capacity, remaining disc capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on. For details, see “Status display on the LCD monitor” (page 19). Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 17 Chapter 1 Overview c WARNING indicator k PREV button Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs in the VDR section. For details about the meaning of the states of the WARNING indicator, see “Operation Warnings” (page 246). This jumps to the first frame of the current clip. During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes. If you press this together with the F REV button, the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded clip on the disc. d ACCESS indicator l STOP button This lights when data is written to or read from the disc. Press this button to stop disc playback. e Protection cover of the audio control section This jumps to the first frame of the next clip. During the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes. If you press this together with the F FWD button, the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded clip on the disc. Open to access the audio control section (see page 22). f Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section Open to access the GUI screen operations section (see page 22). g EJECT button and indicator Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc. The indicator flashes while the disc is being ejected. h F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction. The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the reverse direction. i PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator Press this button to view play back video images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor. The indicator lights during playback. Press this button again during playback to pause, outputting a still image. At this time the indicator flashes. To play back at approximately four times normal playback speed, press the F REV button or F FWD button during playback. At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F FWD indicator light. j F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the forward direction. The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the forward direction. 18 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls m NEXT button n DISP SEL (display selection) /EXPAND (expand function) button With each press of this button, the display in the LCD monitor changes as follows. Display indication Video with superimposed information (CHAR) Video without superimposed information (MONI) Status display (STATUS) Meaning The LCD monitor displays the same text information as the viewfinder. The video only appears. Counter indications, warnings, audio levels, and similar information appear. No video image appears. If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is displayed, the duration of the selected clip is divided into 12, and the first frame of each of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail display (expand function). Each time you press this button, the division is repeated (to a maximum of three times, with 1,728 divisions). Hold down the SHIFT button and press this button to step back through the division process. For details of the expand function, see page 116. o HOLD (display hold)/CHAPTER (chapter function) button Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the counter display section. (The timecode generator continues running.) Pressing this button again releases the hold. You can use this button, for example, to determine the exact time of a particular shot. For details of the counter display, see page 20. For details of the chapter function, see page 117 p RESET/RETURN button Resets the value shown in the time counter display. According to the settings of the PRESET/ REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 22) and the FRUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 22), this button resets the display as follows. Settings of switches DISPLAY switch: COUNTER DISPLAY switch: TC PRESET/REGEN/ CLOCK switch: PRESET F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET DISPLAY switch: U-BIT PRESET/REGEN/ CLOCK switch: PRESET F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET To reset Counter to 0:00:00:00 Timecode to 00:00:00:00 For details, see “Status display on the LCD monitor” (page 19). r BRIGHT (brightness) button Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight. Each press of the button selects the next setting in the order shown in the following table. Setting LCD monitor backlight H High (select this to view the LCD monitor outdoors in the daytime) M Brightness between H and L L Low (select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outdoors at night) OFF Off (the display is also off) Status display on the LCD monitor The following display appears on the LCD monitor display which is set to STATUS with the DISP SEL/EXPAND button. 1 2 User bits a) data to 00 00 00 00 a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the disc, those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number, shooting place, etc. For details, see “Setting Time Data” (page 69). This button returns to the previous screen when pressed during thumbnail display. For details, see “GUI screen operations” (page 114). Chapter 1 Overview If you press this button when the clip thumbnail screen is displayed, those frames on which shot marks are recorded appear in a list (chapter function). Press the button once more to return to the normal thumbnail display. By displaying thumbnails with shot marks attached in place of index frames, you can check the contents of clips more easily and more quickly. This is also useful for cueing up long clips. COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/ playback time (hours, minutes, seconds, frames). TC: Display timecode. U-BIT: Display user bit data. 6 7 3 H D422 50 1080 PB 59.9i NDF 5 OVER 0 24bit EXT-LK HOLD 01 .. 23 .. 45 .. 15 H 8 9 4 MIN SEC 10 20 FRM WARNING:HUMID 30 40 DISC E BATT E B F 1 ST 2 dB PEAK 3 4 0 LCD monitor a Resolution Indicates the resolution of HD output video. Indication 1080 720 Resolution (horizontal × vertical) 1080 lines (1920 × 1080) 720 lines (1280 × 720) q DISPLAY switch This cycles the data displayed in the counter display through the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 19 b Video format Indication Chapter 1 Overview Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded. Indication Format HD422 50 MPEG HD422 HD420 HQ/SP/ MPEG HD420 LP 16bit Quantization bit rate/sampling frequency 16 bits/48 kHz Bit rate 50 Mbps 35/25/18 Mbps e Audio level indicators a) Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 4. IMX 50/40/30 MPEG IMX 50/40/30 Mbps f Status display DVCAM DVCAM 25 Mbps PB: Appears during playback. NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is selected. EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC IN (timecode input) connector. HOLD: Appears when the internal timecode generator is stopped. a) LP is playback only. c System frequency Indicates the system frequency of video being currently played back or recorded. If NTSC AREA is selected 1) Indication 59.9i 59.9P 29.9P 23.9P Field or frame rate 59.94 fields per second 59.94 frames per second 29.97 frames per second 23.98 frames per second Scan mode Interlace Progressive Progressive Progressive g Time counter display Switches displays of time counter, timecode, and user bits, depending on the position of the DISPLAY switch. When the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed to hold the timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the format shown below. When the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is displayed in the normal format. If PAL AREA is selected 1) Indication 50i 50P 25P Field or frame rate 50 fields per second 50 frames per second 25 frames per second Scan mode Interlace Progressive h Warning indicator area Progressive Displays warnings when trouble with recording or moisture condensation occurs. 1) Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu (see page 159). Note There may be no indication displayed when this unit cannot identify the system frequency, for example, when playing back a disc recorded with other equipment. d Audio format Indicates the format of audio being currently played back or recorded. Indication 24bit 20 Lights when the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed. Quantization bit rate/sampling frequency 24 bits/48 kHz Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls For details, see “Operation Warnings” (page 246). Also, when it is possible to set clip names by using planning metadata (see page 96), displays as clip information the title contained in the planning metadata that has been loaded into this unit. (The display format follows the setting of Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area in the Disc Menu.) The following characters can be displayed. • Digits: 0 to 9 • Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z • The following symbols: !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), *, +, , (comma), -, . (period), /, : (colon), ; (semicolon), <, =, >, ?, @, [, ], ^, _, {, |, }, ~ • Space i Remaining disc capacity indicator Chapter 1 Overview Indication DISC E [x x x x x x x] B DISC E [x x x x x x x] B DISC E [x x x x x x x] B DISC E [x x x x x x x] B DISC E [x x x x x x x] B DISC E [x x x x x x x] B DISC E [x x x x x x x] B DISC E [x x x x x x x] B (flashing) DISC E [x x x x x x x] B (flashing) Remaining recording time More than 30 minutes 25 to 30 minutes 20 to 25 minutes 15 to 20 minutes 10 to 15 minutes 5 to 10 minutes 2 to 5 minutes 0 to 2 minutes 0 minutes j Remaining battery capacity indicator Indication Battery voltage BP-L90A/L60S/L80S BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] F 15.5 V or more 15.1 to 15.5 V 14.6 to 15.1 V 13.8 to 14.6 V 12.9 to 13.8 V 12.0 to 12.9 V 10.8 to 12.0 V 10.8 V or less a) You can change the threshold voltages on the BATTERY 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu (see page 172). Indication BATT E [x x x x x x x] F BATT E [x x x x x x x] BATT E [x x x x x x x] BATT E [x x x x x x x] BATT E [x x x x x x x] BATT E [x x x x x x x] BATT E [x x x x x x x] BATT E [x x x x x x x] BATT E [x x x x x x x] Other batteries a) 17.0 V or more 16.0 to 17.0 V 15.0 to 16.0 V 14.0 to 15.0 V 13.0 to 14.0 V 12.0 to 13.0 V 11.0 to 12.0 V 11.0 V or less Note For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs: BP-L80S and BP-FL75. Battery voltage BP-GL95/GL65/IL75/M100, Anton Bauer Battery System 80 to 100% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% Note For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs: BP-L80S and BP-FL75. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 21 GUI screen operations section and audio control section Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 LEVEL THUMBNAIL MENU 0 10 0 10 CH-3 ESSENCE MARK F-RUN SET R-RUN SET F R W AUTO MANUAL AUDIO SELECT SUB CLIP S.SEL CH-1 PRESET DISC MENU 7 8 SHIFT REGEN CLOCK 9 0 qa CH-2 CH-4 AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS F R W qs a THUMBNAIL indicator This lights when thumbnails are displayed. b THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list (see page 116). When pressed, the whole-screen display changes to a thumbnail display. Press once more to return to the whole-screen display. For a thumbnail search using essence marks, hold down the SHIFT button and press this button (see page 117). c SET/S.SEL (set/scene selection) button and arrow buttons Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit settings, and for GUI screen operations. The arrow buttons select items and change values, and the SET/S.SEL button confirms settings. Pressing this button with thumbnails displayed and the SHIFT button held down adds a sub clip to the current clip list (scene selection). See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. See page 126 for more information about scene selection. d MENU button Displays a special menu for operations in GUI screens (see page 110). When the whole-screen is displayed, pressing this button has no effect, and the operation is invalid. 22 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls e F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/ recording run) switch Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator. The operating mode is set as explained below, depending on the position of the switch. F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of the operating state of the VDR. Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode with an external timecode. SET: Sets the timecode or user bits. R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the disc. For details, see “Setting the timecode” (page 69) and “Setting the user bits” (page 69). f LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1/2 recording level) knobs Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH-2 switches are set to MANUAL. g SUB CLIP indicator This lights when using a clip list for playback. h SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button Press this to play back according to a clip list. You can play back a particular clip or sequential clips, or carry out a search of the selected clip list. To display the Disc Menu which allows you to carry out operations such as saving, recalling, or deleting a clip list, hold down the SHIFT button and press this button. i SHIFT button Use this in combination with other buttons. j PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/ CLOCK switch Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize the existing timecode. PRESET: Records a new timecode. REGEN: Records timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the disc. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/ R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in RRUN mode. CLOCK: Records timecode synchronized to the internal clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode. Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2. AUTO: Automatic adjustment MANUAL: Manual adjustment l AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 (audio channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2. FRONT: Audio input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner (not supplied) if it is installed AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4. F (FRONT): Audio input signals from a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector R (REAR): Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/ CH2 connectors W (WIRELESS): Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner (not supplied) if it is installed Left side and upper section Chapter 1 Overview k AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1/2 adjustment method selection) switches 1 2 3 4 5 SDI IN (OPTION) GENLOCK IN TEST OUT TC OUT 6 TC IN 7 a ASSIGNABLE 3/4 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu. Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu). For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209). b Lid of the disc compartment This opens when the EJECT button on the top panel is pressed. Press the side of the lid to close. c SDI IN connector (BNC type) The unit can record HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals that are input to this connector. Input the return video signal. Setting RETURN VIDEO to ON on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu allows you to display the HD-SDI signal input on the SDI IN connector in the viewfinder while the RET button is pressed. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 23 Chapter 1 Overview d GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input) connector (BNC type) • This connector inputs a reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when timecode is to be synchronized with external equipment. Use the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H-phase (phase of horizontal sync signal). Available reference signals vary depending on the current system frequency as shown in the following table. System frequency 1080/59.94i 1080/50i 1080/29.97P 1080/25P 1080/23.98P 720/59.94P 720/50P synchronize the timecode of an external VTR with the timecode of the camcorder. g TC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC type) To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this unit, connect this connector to the external VTR’s timecode input connector. Rear a Available reference signals 1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i 1080/50i, 625/50i 1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i 1080/50i, 625/50i 1080/23.98PsF 1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i 1080/50i, 625/50i b c • This connector also inputs a return video signal. You can display the HD-Y (1080i) signal in the viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu. • Input an external video signal. The unit can record analog composite video signals that are input to this connector. d LINE This connector outputs the video signal for a video monitor. The output signal can be selected from composite video, HD-Y, and R, G, B. To switch output signals, use the TEST OUT SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu. If the output signal is set to one of R, G, or B, then this setting changes to HD-Y when the camcorder is powered off and on again. Depending on menu settings, menus, timecode, and shot data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor. This connector can also be used to 24 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls f MIC 48V OFF LINE AES/EBU MIC 48V OFF AUDIO IN SUPER HD /SD To apply an external lock to the timecode of this unit, input the reference timecode. f TEST OUT connector (BNC type) AES/EBU 12V 1.0A e TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC type) For details of timecode, see “Setting the timecode” (page 69). e CH1 1/2 SDI OUT 1 CH2 3/4 AUDIO OUT SDI OUT 2 g h i j k l a TALLY (back tally) indicator (red) Lights up during recording. It will not light if the TALLY switch is set to OFF. This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings (see page 18) in the same manner as the REC/TALLY indicator in the viewfinder. For details, see “Operation Warnings” (page 246). b TALLY switch Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function. c (network) connector (RJ-45 type) This is a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector for network connection. CAUTION Note Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch. h SDI OUT 1 connector (BNC type) • For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port. Follow the instructions for this port. • When you connect the network cable of the unit to peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction due to radiation noise. Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and SDSDI signal output, use the SDI OUT 1 SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu. d EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack) i SDI OUT 2 connector (BNC type) You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and playback sound during playback. When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone. You can use this with the EARPHONE jack on the front of the unit at the same time. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker. You can select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI, SDSDI and VF signal output, use the SDI OUT 2 SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu. Setting menus, timecode, or shot data can be superimposed on the camera output video depending on the menu settings, and you can view them on the monitor screen. e LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors j AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1 and channel-2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female) These select the audio source of the audio input signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. LINE: Line input audio equipment AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal MIC: Microphone input Note When these switches are in the MIC position, and the +48V/OFF switch is set to +48V, if you inadvertently connect any audio device other than a microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be damaged. f +48V/OFF switches Select either of the following positions for the microphones to be connected. +48V: For a microphone to use an external power supply OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power supply g REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connect an RM-B170/B750 remote control unit, which makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely. Chapter 1 Overview Before using this connector, you must set ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL” (see page 212). These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone. When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to AES/EBU, the CH1 connector is used for channel-1 and -2 inputs, and the CH2 connector, for channel-3 and -4 inputs. k AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5pin, male) Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR switch. l (USB) connector This is a USB 2.0 connector. Connect one of the following devices, depending on what you want to do. Device Enables Windows USB Text input wth the on-screen keyboard or mouse software keyboard (see page 122) Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 25 Chapter 1 Overview Device USB flash drive Optional CBKWA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor Optional CBKWA100 Wireless Adaptor Enables Recording of proxy data (see page 100) Loading of planning metadata (see page 134) Saving and loading user setting data (see page 220) Making wireless LAN connections (see page 213) c Camera operator tally indicator CBK-WA100 status indicator Wireless LAN connection For details, see “Status display on the viewfinder screen” (page 27). Before using this connector, you must set ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL” (see page 212). HDVF-20A viewfinder (optional) 1 qf 2 qg 3 4 5 6 Lights up while camcorder is recording. This indicator can be covered when not in use. This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in the same manner as the tally indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder. d Eyecup e Indicators and status display f Diopter adjustment ring Allows for optimal focus adjustment. g Tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording. Set the TALLY switch to OFF when not in use. The brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY switch. This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in the same manner as the camera operator tally indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder. h PEAKING control Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder. i CONTRAST control 7 8 9 PEAKING CONTRAST BRIGHT 0 ZEBRA DISPLAY ASPECT ON OFF MOMENT TALLY HIGH OFF LOW qa qs qd a Plug Connect to the VF connector on the camcorder. b Stopper Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camcorder when it is slid from side to side. Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder. j BRIGHT control Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder. k TALLY switch Controls the tally indicator located on the front of the viewfinder. HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to high. OFF: The tally indicator is disabled. LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low. l ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch Controls the zebra pattern display on the viewfinder screen as follows. ON: A zebra pattern appears and stays. 26 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls m DISPLAY/ASPECT switch Turns the marker indication on and off, and switches between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios for viewfinder screen display. DISPLAY: When the marker indication is enabled with the camcorder, the marker indication on the viewfinder screen turns on and off every time you push the switch up to this position. ASPECT: Each push of the switch down to this position toggles the mask display on and off. (Make mask display settings on the MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu (see page 155).) n Viewfinder cable o Microphone holder Status display on the viewfinder screen • Recording with HDSDI REMOTE I/F on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set to G-TLY Flashes when the camcorder is the following states. • Set to Auto Interval Rec mode or the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode (1 flash per second) • Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode or recording in the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode (4 flashes per second) • Set to the single-shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode, or recording in that mode (2 flashes per second) Chapter 1 Overview OFF: The zebra pattern disappears. MOMENT: A zebra pattern appears and stays for about five seconds. b BATT (battery) indicator This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted, and stays lit when the battery is completely exhausted. To prevent interruption during operation, replace the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing. The battery power level at which the indicator starts flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. For details, see page 171. c REC (recording, red tally) indicator Indicators The following indicators are arranged above and below the viewfinder screen to show the current state and adjustments of the camcorder. Lights up while camcorder is recording. This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in the same manner as the tally indicator and the camera operator tally indicator. d Viewfinder screen TALLY/REC BATT 1 2 e VTR SAVE indicator 3 This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to SAVE, putting the VDR into power save mode. 4 5 VTR SAVE 6 a TALLY (green tally) indicator Lights when the camcorder is the following states. • Picture Cache mode enabled • Disc Exchange Cache mode enabled f ! (warning) indicator This indicator lights when any of the following conditions occurs with the corresponding item set to ON on the ‘!’ LED page of the OPERATION menu. • The gain is set to other than 0 dB. • The SHUTTER selector is not set to the standard setting. 1), 2) • The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. • ATW is enabled. • The lens extender is used. • The FILTER selector is set to other than ND:1. • The reference value of auto iris adjustment is not the standard value. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 27 Chapter 1 Overview The lighting-up conditions of each item can be set on the ‘!’ LED STD page of the OPERATION menu. Top of viewfinder screen ab c 1) The standard SHUTTER setting differs, depending on the recording format. 1080/50i, 1080/59.94i, 720/50P, 720/59.94P: The SHUTTER selector is set to OFF. 1080/23.98P: 1/48 shutter is ON. 1080/25P: 1/50 shutter is ON. 1080/29.97P: 1/60 shutter is ON. 2) When SHUTTER SELECT on the SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to DEGREE, the standard setting is “SHUTTER selector: OFF”, regardless of the recording format. Layout of the status display on the viewfinder screen The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc. When the menu screen is not displayed and the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch is set to on, the items for which an ON setting was made on the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen. The messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about three seconds while settings are being changed, during adjustment, and after adjustment. For details about the display item selection, see “Selecting the display items” (page 201). For details about setting change and adjustment progress messages, see “Change confirmation/ adjustment progress messages” (page 203). For details about marker display, see “Setting the marker display” (page 203). All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below. d e f g h i 59.9 i[ 30] EX Z 99 W 1 2 13.4V HD422 50 E0001:001/004 DC IN 13.9 K + Ext. CONT 35-30 FAN 3G/4G WHITE:NG LEVEL TOO HIGH EXT REC2 TCG 01:23:45:15 HDSDI 5600 LOW LIGHT 1 35 - 30 125C F1.7 1 W:A 18 dB 1/ 2000 2 jk l m n a Color temperature Displays a color temperature calculated from the gain of R and B, in the range 0.0 K to 99.9 K (in steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed depending on the OFFSET WHT setting (see page 217). No display: OFFSET WHT is OFF +: The value of OFFSET WHT is greater than 3200K. –: The value of OFFSET WHT is less than 3200K. b Video format Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded (see page 53). The video aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) can also be displayed when the recording format is set to IMX 50, IMX 40, IMX 30, or DVCAM. c Extender Displays the extender settings of this unit and the lens. EX: The lens extender is on. 08: The lens shrinker is on. x2D: The unit’s digital extender is x2. Ex2D: The lens extender is on, and the unit’s digital extender is x2. x3D: The unit’s digital extender is x3. Ex3D: The lens extender is on, and the unit’s digital extender is x3. x4D: The unit’s digital extender is x4. Ex4D: The lens extender is on, and the unit’s digital extender is x4. d Zoom position Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range from 0 to 99. 28 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls f System frequency and frame rate During shooting, displays information about the clip being recorded or the clip to be recorded next. During playback, displays information about the playback clip. The information that appears depends on the setting of DISP CLIP NAME on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu. You can also set DISP CLIP NO(PB) on the VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu to “ON” to display the clip number and total number of clips during playback. When DISP CLIP NAME is set to “PLAN”: During shooting, when Planning Clip Name Display in the Disc Menu is set to “Enable”, this area displays the title specified in the currently loaded planning metadata. (The display format follows the setting of “Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area” in the Disc Menu.) When DISP CLIP NAME is set to “AUTO”: During shooting, this area displays one of the following, depending on the setting of AUTO NAMING on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu. • “C****” or “TITLE”: The clip name (standard name, user-specified name, or title) specified by “Display Title” in the Disc Menu • “PLAN”: During shooting, when Planning Clip Name Display in the Disc Menu is set to “Enable”, the title specified in the currently loaded planning metadata. (The display format follows the setting of “Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area” in the Disc Menu.) During playback, this area displays the clip name (standard name, user-specified name, or title) specified by “Display Title” in the Disc Menu. During Slow & Quick Motion shooting and playback, displays the system frequency and the frame rate. The frame is rounded to a 2-digit integer and displayed in brackets ([ ]) (see page 88). This display does not appear during normal shooting and playback. The following characters can be displayed in this area. • Digits: 0 to 9 • Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z • The following symbols: !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), *, +, , (comma), -, . (period), /, : (colon), ; (semicolon), <, =, >, ?, @, [, ], ^, _, {, |, }, ~ • Space Chapter 1 Overview e Clip information g Wireless microphone reception level When a UHF portable tuner is installed in the camcorder, “W” appears together with foursegment reception level indicators for each of the channels (1 or 2 channels) that can be used by the tuner. The indications are as follows. Normal use: The number of white segments indicates the strength of the signal level. Muted: The number of gray segments indicates the strength of the signal level. Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed instead of the indicators. 1) Tuner battery is low: The channel number and indicator of the corresponding channel flash. 1) 1) DWR-S02D only h Power source voltage/battery remaining capacity When the unit is powered from a battery pack, indicates the remaining capacity of the power source voltage. When the unit is powered from a battery connected to the DC IN connector or AC adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe, indicates the power source voltage. i External battery Appears if the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector. j Clip Continuous Rec function Appears when the Clip Continuous Rec function (see page 90) is enabled. CONT (lit): Continuous recording to extend the previous clip is possible. CONT (flashing): A new clip will be created and recorded. k Cooling fan control mode This appears when FAN CONTROL on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to “R.MIN” or “MIN”. FAN (lit): The cooling fan is operating at low speed. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 29 Chapter 1 Overview FAN (flashing): The cooling fan is operating at low speed, but the temperature inside the unit has risen to a level just below the level at which an alarm occurs. Note If you do nothing while the FAN display is flashing, the unit will attempt to lower the internal temperature by operating the fan at high speed. When the FAN display begins to flash, you should stop shooting and other operations and wait until the internal temperature drops, and then restart operations. l GPS reception status For details, see “Icons displayed on the screen” (page 103). m Memory symbol and remaining capacity, wireless LAN connection status, or CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor remaining media status When a USB flash drive is connected to the enabled USB connector, a memory symbol appears indicating the mount status of the USB flash drive and its remaining capacity. Memory symbol and remaining capacity display Icon Remaining Description capacity display Lit Proxy data recording is enabled, and there is at least 5 minute of remaining capacity. Flashing Proxy data recording is enabled, but there is less than 5 minute of remaining When the optional CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor is connected via USB, the remaining media capacity on the CBK-WA100 is displayed if Wi-Fi/ETHER_RM is set to “RM” or “ALL” on the CAM CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. n Wireless adaptor reception status Displays the reception status of the optional CBK-WA100. LTE connections: Displays 3G/4G symbol. Station mode: Displays 4-bar signal strength. Access point mode: Displays AP symbol. Bottom of viewfinder screen a b c EX Z 99 W 1 2 13.4V HD422 50 E0001:001/004 DC IN 13.9 K + Ext. CONT 35-30 FAN 3G/4G WHITE:NG LEVEL TOO HIGH EXT REC2 TCG 01:23:45:15 HDSDI 5600 LOW LIGHT 35 - 30 125C F1.7 1 W:A 18 dB 1/ 2000 12 Out capacity. a) Proxy data recording is INH disabled. b) The USB flash drive is write a External device control and single clip playback Out protected. c) The USB flash drive could REC2: Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I/F is set to “CHARA” and SDI REC CONTROL is set to “RM” on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and the camcorder is remotely controlling recording on external devices connected to the SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output).1) REC2 P PARALLEL REC: Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I/F is set to “CHARA” and SDI REC CONTROL is set to “PARA” on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and the camcorder not be mounted. d) a) Use a USB flash drive with enough free capacity remaining. b) Enable the proxy data recording function. c) Clear the write protection on the USB flash drive. d) Format or exchange the USB flash drive. When Wi-Fi on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu is set to “ENABL”, the 30 wireless LAN connection status is displayed in this area, as follows. Not connected, or connection destination unknown: An “×” lights. Connecting: Four gray segments flash. Connection completed (signal strength 0): One gray segment lights. Connection completed (signal strength 1 to 4): White segments light. The number of white segments (1 to 4) indicates the reception signal level (1 to 4). Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls defghij k l mn A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A. B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B. P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST or when the preset button on an RMB170 has been pushed. T: Displayed when ATW is being used. 1) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI. g Timecode b Setting change and adjustment progress message display area For details, see “Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages” (page 203). c External input status and aberration correction function EXT HDSDI/SDSDI/VBS: When the REC VIDEO SOURCE item on the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu has been set to EXT, then “EXT” and the signal type (HDSDI, SDSDI, or VBS) flashes when a valid signal is input to this unit. For details, see “Recording video from external devices” (page 98). ALAC: Appears when ALAC in the CAM CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to “AUTO” (see page 181). d Electric color temperature filter/Scene file number The electric color temperature filter display appears when the CC 5600K function is set to ON. When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu is set to “ON”, the number of the currently loaded scene file (“S1” to “S5”) appears instead of the filter display. e Filter Indicates the currently selected filter type (see page 14). The optical CC filter position (A, B, C, or D) appears to the right side of the ND filter display (1 to 4). f White balance memory Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory. Chapter 1 Overview and external devices connected to the SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output)1) are mutually controlling recording. SNGL: Appears when SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to “ON”, and the unit is searching or playing a clip (see page 79). Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time, timecode, user bits or other information selected by the DISPLAY switch (see page 19). h Gain value Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector. i Shutter speed Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode. However, if the SHUTTER selector (see page 14) is set to OFF, nothing is displayed. For details of the displayed shutter speed, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 60). j Operation/alarm display area and clip transfer status display area For details, see “Operation/alarm messages” (page 250). It also displays clip transfer status when an optional CBK-WA100 is connected. k Audio level Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2. The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as follows to the audio level. 1 2 3 -52 -28 -20 -12 -8 (dB) 1 Audio channel 1 level indicator 2 Audio channel 2 level indicator 3 VDR level meter indicator The segment colors change from gray to white at or above the AU REF LEVEL set on the AUDIO2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. This setting does not affect the relationship between the number of lit segments and the audio levels. The example in the above figure shows the colors when AU REF LEVEL is set to –20 dB. Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 31 l Remaining disc capacity Chapter 1 Overview Indicates the remaining recording time (in minutes) of the disc. Examples of remaining recording time indication Indication . . . 110 < 100 < 90 < 90 - 85 85 - 80 . . . 20 - 15 15 - 10 10 - 5 5MIN (flash) 4MIN (flash) 3MIN (flash) 2MIN (flash) 1MIN (flash) 0MIN (flash) Remaining recording time . . . 120 to 110 minutes 110 to 100 minutes 100 to 90 minutes 90 to 85 minutes 85 to 80 minutes . . . 20 to 15 minutes 15 to 10 minutes 10 to 5 minutes 5 minutes 4 minutes 3 minutes 2 minutes 1 minute 0 minutes Note During shooting in special modes, such as Interval Rec or Slow & Quick Motion, the indicated remaining disc time may differ from the time which can be actually shot and recorded. This is particularly true when FRAME RATE is set to the maximum value in Slow & Quick Motion shooting, in which case the actual remaining time is about half of the indicated remaining disc time. m Remaining clips display Displays the remaining number of clips that can be recorded. The display flashes once per second when the number of remaining clips is less than 10. n Iris setting/auto iris override Indicates the F value (iris setting) of the lens. Auto iris override is shown by an indicator made up of two segments each on the upper and lower sides. For details, see “Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment” (page 64). 32 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Chapter 2 Preparations 1 For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and AC adaptors listed below. • BP-L80S/FL75 Lithium-ion Battery Pack • AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor 2 1 BP-L80S/FL75 2 Align these lines. Using a battery pack When a BP-L80S/FL75 Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will operate continuously for the time shown below. Model name BP-L80S BP-FL75 Operating time Approx. 100 minutes Approx. 85 minutes Chapter 2 Preparations Preparing a Power Supply 2 Slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow points at the matching line on the camcorder. Note The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature when used. 1 Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery. 2 For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the battery charger operation manual. Note on using the battery pack A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged. To attach the battery pack 1 Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder. 1 “LOCK” arrow 2 Matching line on the camcorder Note If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal may be damaged. Preparing a Power Supply 33 To detach the battery pack Holding the release button in, pull the battery pack up. Attaching the Viewfinder Chapter 2 Preparations CAUTION When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire. Note The viewfinder is supplied separately. Release button Notes • During recording and playback (while the ACCESS indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery pack. • Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack. Using AC power When using the AC-DN10 AC Adaptor Mount an AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply. The AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power. Attaching the HDVF-20A/200/ C35W/C30WR Note When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the following points. • Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF connector. If you make this connection when the camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not function properly. • Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the camcorder’s VF connector. If the coupling is loose, noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not operate properly. For more information about the connection of the viewfinder and camcorder, contact a Sony service representative. 1 To an AC outlet 34 Attaching the Viewfinder 1 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring, 2 attach the viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder leftto-right positioning ring. Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring Stopper 3 1 Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob 2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF connector. Moving the viewfinder shoe up 1 Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder positioning levers and the front-to-back viewfinder positioning knobs, and then pull the viewfinder slide assembly forward. 2 Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench, detach the viewfinder slide assembly and handle front cover. VF connector Detaching the viewfinder You can carry out this by following the attaching procedure in reverse order, but there is an additional action to take: when detaching the viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the stopper. Chapter 2 Preparations 2 Adjusting the viewfinder position To adjust the viewfinder left-right position, loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back positioning knob. Attaching the Viewfinder 35 Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket Handle front cover Bolt with hexagonal hole Chapter 2 Preparations By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket (not supplied), you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder. Viewfinder slide assembly 3 Attach the handle front cover with the bottom edge up. 1 Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous section “Moving the viewfinder shoe up” to detach the viewfinder slide assembly. 2 Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied bolts. Bolts supplied with the BKW-401 To attach the viewfinder at the top To attach the viewfinder at the bottom (factory default) 4 36 Attach the viewfinder slide assembly, reversing the steps of the removal procedure. Attaching the Viewfinder 3 Adjust the front-to-back position so that the arm of the BKW-401 does not touch the handle when it is raised. Adjust position so that arm does not touch handle Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen from further away. It is also easy to remove dust from the viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is detached. 1 Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise, to align the red marks on the locking ring and the viewfinder barrel. 1 1 Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel. 2 Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel. Then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel. 3 Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its “LOCK” arrow points at the red mark on the viewfinder barrel. Chapter 2 Preparations Detaching the eyepiece To reattaching the eyepiece When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a new one. For details of a replacement eyecup, contact a Sony service representative. Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen To adjust the viewfinder focus Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest. Diopter adjustment ring 32 1 Locking ring 2 Locking ring match mark 3 Match mark on the viewfinder barrel 2 Detach the eyepiece. Match mark on end of eyepiece Attaching the Viewfinder 37 To adjust the viewfinder screen Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below. 1 2 Chapter 2 Preparations PEAKING CONTRAST ZEBRA DISPLAY ASPECT ON OFF MOMENT 3 BRIGHT TALLY HIGH OFF LOW 1 PEAKING control 2 CONTRAST control 3 BRIGHT control Setting the Area of Use When using the unit for the first time The area of use is not factory preset. Before using this unit, you need to set this item. (You cannot use the unit without setting this item.) To set the area of use POWER switch MENU knob 1 Set the POWER switch to the ON position. The screen for setting the area of use appears in the viewfinder. FORMAT SETTING COUNTRY : NOT SELECTED SYSTEM LINE : 1080 SET FORMAT AND TURN OFF ONCE. 2 Press the MENU knob. z on the left of NOT SELECTED changes to ?, and you can now select the area of use. FORMAT SETTING COUNTRY :?NOT SELECTED SYSTEM LINE : 1080 SET FORMAT AND TURN OFF ONCE. 38 Setting the Area of Use 3 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of use. Setting NTSC(J)AREA NTSC AREA Area of use Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock NTSC area (Japan) a) NTSC area (for areas other than Japan) b) PAL area c) a) The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with no black setup. The system frequency is 59.94i. b) The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE). The system frequency is 59.94i. c) The composite signal output from this unit is a PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i. 4 1 Display the TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). Change the SYSTEM LINE (video resolution) setting as required. Setting 1080 720 5 You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock. The date and time set are reflected in the timecode. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) Chapter 2 Preparations PAL AREA D02 TIME/DATE Resolution (horizontal × vertical) 1080 lines (1920 × 1080) 720 lines (1280 × 720) Set the POWER switch to OFF, then once again to ON. The unit is now ready for use. 2 TOP ADJUST GPS ADJUST : : EXEC EXEC HOUR MIN SEC : : : 12 55 58 YEAR MONTH DAY : : : 14 03 31 Press the MENU knob. The TIME ADJUST setting window appears. TIME ADJUST ESC HOUR MIN SEC : : : 12 55 58 YEAR MONTH DAY : : : 14 03 31 OK • • • • • • 3 HOUR: Sets the hour value. MIN: Sets the minutes value. SEC: Sets the seconds value. YEAR: Sets the year. MONTH: Sets the month. DAY: Sets the day. Turn the MENU knob to move b to the item you want to set, and press the MENU knob. b on the left of the selected item changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to ?. Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock 39 4 5 Chapter 2 Preparations 6 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value, and press the MENU knob. z changes to b and ? changes to z. To continue the remaining settings, repeat steps 3 and 4. When you finish settings, turn the MENU knob to move b to “OK”, then press the MENU knob. The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 3 to 5. The TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears again. The time set on the TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed. To cancel the setting Before executing step 6, move b to “ESC” at the top right of the window and press the MENU knob. Alternatively, flick the CANCEL/PRST/ ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side. All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears. Note When you set the time, also set TIME ZONE. Set TIME ZONE on the UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu. For details, see “Setting the UMID data” (page 218). Setting the Clock to GPS Time You can set the camcorder clock using clocks on GPS satellites. Note The following actions are required on the camcorder in order to use this function. • GPS must be set to ON on the GPS SETUP page of the OPERATION menu. • GPS positioning 1 40 D02 TIME/DATE Display the TIME/DATE page in the DIAGNOSIS menu, and turn the MENU knob until the b cursor is pointing to GPS ADJUST. Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock 2 TOP ADJUST GPS ADJUST : : EXEC EXEC HOUR MIN SEC : : : 12 55 58 YEAR MONTH DAY : : : 14 03 31 Press the MENU knob. The “EXECUTE OK?” message appears (the b cursor is pointing to NO, which is flashing). 3 Turn the MENU knob to select YES, then press the MENU knob. The camcorder clock is set to the time using clocks on the GPS satellites. securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above. Mounting the Lens Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector. 5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps. Chapter 2 Preparations First power off the camcorder, and then mount the lens using the following procedure. 4 For information about using the lens, refer to the operation manual for the lens. 3 5 Lens mount securing rubber 4 21 1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount. 2 Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount, and insert the lens into the mount. 3 Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens. Caution If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens mount Mounting the Lens 41 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length Chapter 2 Preparations If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length (the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane). Make this adjustment after mounting or changing the lens. The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check the identification of the various controls in the lens manual. About 3 m (10 ft) 42 1 Set the iris to manual. 2 Open the iris. Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) away from the camera, lit well enough to provide a satisfactory video output level. 3 Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment ring). 4 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto. 5 Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it. 6 Set the zoom ring to wide angle. 7 Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus, being careful not to disturb the focus ring. Adjusting the Flange Focal Length 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto. 9 Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws. Preparing the Audio Input System 2 4 3 You can attach the ECM-680S stereo microphone (not supplied) to the microphone holder of the HDVF-20A viewfinder (not supplied). 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp. Microphone holder clamp 1 On how to perform this operation, refer to the operation manual for the microphone. 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT (for CH-1/ CH-2) or F (for CH-3/CH-4). 4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamps. 2 2 Chapter 2 Preparations 1 Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector Place the microphone in the microphone holder. 1 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet type, supplied with this unit and the ECM-680S) around the microphone, while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer. 2 Place the microphone in the holder so that “UP” is at the top. 3 Close the microphone holder. 4 Tighten the screw. Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors You can connect up to two monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, using a CAC-12 Microphone Holder (not supplied). Preparing the Audio Input System 43 The following is the procedure for attaching an electret condenser microphone such as the ECM678/673. On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation manual for the CAC-12. 1 2 Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. 3 Set the switches as follows. Chapter 2 Preparations Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector to MIC. • Set the +48V/OFF switch indicated below, depending on the power supply type of the microphone. Internal power supply: Set the +48V/OFF switch to OFF. External power supply: Set the +48V/ OFF switch to +48V. • Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH4) switch for the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR (for CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4). Attach the electret condenser microphone. 1 Loosen the ball joint lock lever. 2 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet type, supplied with this unit and the microphone) around the microphone, while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer. 3 Place the microphone in the holder so that “UP” is at the top. 4 Close the microphone holder. 5 Tighten the screw. 6 Position so that the microphone does not interfere with the viewfinder and tighten the ball joint lock lever. 1 2 When attaching the ECM-678/673, use the microphone adaptor supplied with the CAC12 Microphone Holder. 3 4 1 +48V/OFF switch 2 Monaural microphone 3 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches 4 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector Microphone 4 Switch the input level to match the sensitivity of the microphone used. Switch the input level by changing the REAR MIC REF setting on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu (factory default setting is –60 dB). For details, see page 173. XLR connection automatic detection function With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch. The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the 44 Preparing the Audio Input System AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO item. DWR-S02D or WRR-855S Notes Attaching a UHF portable tuner (for a UHF wireless microphone system) To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system, fit one of the following UHF portable tuners. • DWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver • WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit • WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner For details of these units, refer to the operation manuals for them. 3 Set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel to which you want to input audio signal to WIRELESS (see page 23). Notes • When the XLR connection automatic detection function is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch is set to WIRELESS, the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is automatically selected when an audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. In such a case, set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. (The factory default setting is OFF.) • When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to LINE or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function. They are determined by the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches. To fit the DWR-S02D or WRR-855S To fit the WRR-862 (when using a BPL80S/FL75 Battery Pack) 1 1 Remove the four fixing screws holding the cover of the portable tuner/receiver housing slot located in the rear of this unit, to remove the cover. Chapter 2 Preparations • If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud sounds may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio may be affected. • In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector, use an adaptor. • When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1). After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws back into their original places. Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not supplied; service part number: A-8278057-B) to the back of the camcorder. 1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the four screws placed in the tuner fitting. For three of these screws, insert the screwdriver through the corresponding hole and tighten the screw. Note Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened. 2 Insert the DWR-S02D or WRR-855S into the housing slot, and fasten the four fixing screws. 2 Loosen the adjustment screws on the tuner fitting. 3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP-L80S/FL75 Battery Pack to be Preparing the Audio Input System 45 attached, and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position. 4 Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR-862. If the XLR connection automatic detection function is on, the input signal for audio recording is selected automatically, and therefore this setting is not required. About the WRR tuner fitting (service part number: A-8278-057-B), contact a Sony service or sales representative. Chapter 2 Preparations BP-L80S/FL75 4 Adjustment screws Mount plate (supplied with WRR-862) 1 Phillips type screwdriver 2 Attach the battery pack. On how to attach the battery pack, see “To attach the battery pack” (page 33). 3 Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting. 2 3 1 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches 2 To DC OUT connector 3 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector 4 LINE / AES/EBU /MIC selectors Connecting line input audio equipment Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. Switch settings Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to LINE. WRR-862 4 Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the camcorder, and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. 5 Set the switches as follows. • Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector for the channel to which the audio output cable is attached to MIC. • Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH4) switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR (for CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4). 46 Preparing the Audio Input System Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded • With the XLR connection automatic detection function being off (the factory default setting): A signal must be selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for connecting the external audio equipment. • With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on: When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch. The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO item. Tripod Mounting 4 Attach the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not supplied) to the tripod. Tripod adaptor 1 2 3 1 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches 2 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector 3 Audio equipment 4 LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors Chapter 2 Preparations 1 Camera mount 2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor. Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks. 3 Try to move the camcorder back and forth to confirm that it does not slip off the attachment. Tripod Mounting 47 To remove the camcorder from the tripod adaptor Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow. Chapter 2 Preparations Red button Lever Note The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press the red button against the lever a second time and move the lever as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor. Connecting a Video Light With this camcorder, you can use the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light (powered by 12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W). • If you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop the VDR operation. • The output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power (through the DC IN connector or battery pack). The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change according to voltage increase. Notes • Do not use a video light with power consumption of over 50 W. • The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V. To attach the video light Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder grip, and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector. Note The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the 1/4-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slidetype shoe, contact a Sony service representative. 48 Connecting a Video Light Using the Shoulder Strap 1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting. Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release. g Pull up the strap to lock the fitting. Chapter 2 Preparations To attach the shoulder strap To remove the shoulder strap g Clip 2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way as in step 1. Using the Shoulder Strap 49 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position Chapter 2 Preparations You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position (the factory default setting) backward by up to 10 mm (13/32 inch) or forward by up to 25 mm (1 inch). This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder. 1,3 Connecting the Remote Control Unit Note Before connecting/disconnecting a remote control unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off. Connecting the RM-B170/B750 Remote Control Unit enables remote control of the principal camera functions. Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control unit, the remote control mode is cancelled. 1 2 Shoulder pad 1 2 3 50 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad. Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position. Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position. 2 3 1 RM-B170/B750 2 Remote control cable 3 REMOTE connector Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected The following switches on the camcorder do not function. • GAIN selector • OUTPUT/DCC switch • WHITE BAL switch • AUTO W/B BAL switch • SHUTTER selector • Button to which the TURBO SWITCH function has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch or RET button on the lens) • REC START button (and the VTR button on the lens, and the button to which the recording start/ stop function has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/ 4/5 switch or RET button on the lens)) (when the RM REC START item on the CAM Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position / Connecting the Remote Control Unit CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM) Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected Function of the recording start/stop buttons when the remote control unit is connected When the remote control unit is connected, you can make a setting to determine which of the recording start/stop buttons you will use. This setting is made using the RM REC START item on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. Relationship between the setting of the RM REC START item and the function of recording start/ stop buttons Recording start/ stop button Settings of RM REC START RM CAM PARA Disabled Enabled Enabled Camcorder’s REC START button Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled Button to which the Disabled Enabled Enabled recording start/stop function has been assigned (camcorder ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch or RET button on the lens) Remote control Enabled Disabled Enabled unit’s VTR button When the monitor is connected to the MONITOR OUT connector of the remote control unit The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-B170/B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder. Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B170/ B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM-B170/B750. The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected. Structure of the paint adjustment data The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as shown below: one is the “independent data region” that is used when a remote control unit is not connected, and the other is the “remote control data region” that is used when a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the camera section depending on whether or not a remote control unit such as the RM-B170 is connected. Setup menu of the camcorder Independent data region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA KNEE POINT DETAIL LEVEL R/B GAIN R/B BLACK Chapter 2 Preparations The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled. When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder RM-B170 Remote control data region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA KNEE POINT DETAIL LEVEL R/B GAIN R/B BLACK Non-volatile memory Hardware of the camera section RM-B170 connected RM-B170 not connected Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to the camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the “remote control data region” and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled. The settings of the absolute value rotational controls 1) and absolute value switches 2) are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected. When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder, the “independent data Connecting the Remote Control Unit 51 region” becomes effective. Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected. Chapter 2 Preparations 1) Absolute value rotational controls: The data corresponding to the angular position of controls is output. Rotational controls for which the data corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output are called relative value controls. 2) Absolute value switches: Like toggle switches or slide switches (except momentary switches), the switches (or knobs) whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches. When RM COMMON MEMORY on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to “ON”, you can use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the independent data region even if you connect the remote control unit. In this case, the settings stored in the independent data region will be renewed when you change the settings on the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is removed. However, if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit. Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you connect the remote control unit. In this case, you should set the control knob to the relative value mode on the remote control unit. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit. 52 Connecting the Remote Control Unit Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the Recording Format Audio Recording format 24bit/48kHz Number of channels 16bit/48kHz 8 channels b) 8 channels a) 4 channels b) 4 channels c) Video Recording format MPEG HD422 50 (Bit rate: 50 Mbps) MPEG HD420 HQ/ SP (Bit rate: 35/25 Mbps) MPEG IMX 50/40/ 30 (Bit rate: 50/40/30 Mbps) DVCAM (Bit rate: 25 Mbps) Resolution System 1080 720 1080 720 525 frequency a) 59.94i/29.97P/ 50i/25P/ 23.98P 59.94P/50P 59.94i/29.97P/ 50i/25P/ 23.98P 59.94P/50P 59.94i b) 29.97P 625 50i c) 25P 525 59.94i b) 625 a) When the video recording format is set to MPEG HD422 50. b) When the video recording format is set to MPEG IMX 50/40/30. c) When the video recording format is set to MPEG HD420 HQ/SP or DVCAM. Notes • It is not possible to combine material recorded in different frame frequency groups on a single disc (see page 54). • This unit can record up to four channels of audio. If you select a format with eight channels of audio, silence is recorded in channels 5 to 8. Setting the system frequency 1 Display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu. 29.97P 027 FORMAT 50i c) 25P SYSTEM LINE : SYSTEM FREQUENCY: REC FORMAT a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P: When the area of use is set to NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC AREA. 50i/25P/50P: When the area of use is set to PAL AREA. b) When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080/59.9i or 720/59.9P c) When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080/50i or 720/ 50P COUNTRY Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting The recording formats supported by this camcorder are as follows. TOP : 1080 59.9i HD422 50 : NTSC(J)AREA For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select SYSTEM FREQUENCY, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired system frequency. Setting the Recording Format 53 You can select the frequency shown below depending on the combination of the COUNTRY and SYSTEM LINE settings. COUNTRY NTSC(J)AREA NTSC AREA PAL AREA SYSTEM SYSTEM LINE FREQUENCY 1080 59.9i/29.9P/ 23.98P 720 59.9P 1080 50i/25P 720 50P Change the COUNTRY or SYSTEM LINE setting as required. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the video recording format 1 Display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select REC FORMAT, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired recording format. As you turn the MENU knob, the recording format changes as follows: HD422 50 y HD420 HQ y HD420 SP y IMX 50 y IMX 40 y IMX 30 y DVCAM. To set the aspect ratio (when IMX 50, IMX 40, IMX 30, or DVCAM is selected) Select ASPECT RATIO(SD) on the FORMAT page, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio. As you turn the MENU knob, the aspect ratio changes as follows: 16:9 y 4:3. 027 FORMAT TOP SYSTEM LINE : SYSTEM FREQUENCY: : NTSC(J)AREA Note The unit ignores this setting when it records video from external devices (see page 98). To set the audio recording format (when IMX 50, IMX 40, or IMX 30 is selected) Select AU DATA LEN(IMX) on the FORMAT page or AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE 54 Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc As long as the frame frequency group is the same, clips in different recording formats can be recorded or written to the same disc. 1) In this manual, this is referred to as “mixed format recording mode”. 1) The recording format is regarded as different whenever the system frequency, video resolution, video codec/bit rate, or number of audio channels or number of bits does not match. Notes • Regardless of frame frequency group matching, it is not possible to mix clips with different video resolutions (number of system lines) in the same clip list. • When the unit is in a mode that calls for playback across clips that were recorded in different recording formats, video and audio playback may stop at the point where the format changes from one format into another, and then start again. Frame frequency groups The system frequencies supported by this unit are divided into frame frequency groups, as shown in the following table. Frame frequency group 59.94 Hz 50 Hz 1080 59.9i REC FORMAT : IMX 50 ASPECT RATIO(SD): 16:9 AU DATA LEN(IMX): 16bit COUNTRY menu, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired audio recording format. As you turn the MENU knob, the audio recording format changes as follows: 16bit y 24bit. Setting the Recording Format 23.98 Hz System frequency 59.94P 59.94i 29.97P 50P 50i 25P 23.98P You can record clips with different recording formats, for example HD422 and HD420SP clips, by putting this unit into mixed format recording mode. To enable mixed format recording mode Set MIXED RECORDING on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ENABL”. If you want to disable mixing of clips with different recording formats, leave this item set to “DSABL”. However, regardless of the mixed format recording mode setting, it is always possible to mix clips in the following format groups. • HD420 HQ, SP, and LP • 1080/59.94i and 1080/29.97P • 1080/50i and 1080/25P Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder, conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted. Black balance adjustment White balance adjustment Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases. • When the camcorder is used for the first time • When the camcorder has not been used for a long time • When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly • When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have been changed by using the USER menu It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off. Viewfinder screen displays If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started, messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP MODE item is set to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu. Note Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off. Adjusting the black balance In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are performed in the following order: black set and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu. For details of manual black balance adjustment, refer to the Maintenance Manual. Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 55 Possible messages are listed below. Error message ABB : NG IRIS NOT CLOSE ABB : NG TIME LIMIT 2 1 1 OUTPUT/DCC switch 2 AUTO W/B BAL switch Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting 1 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM. 2 Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch. The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed. During adjustment, the following message is displayed on the viewfinder screen. If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the black balance adjustment. Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK until “-BLACK SET-” appears after “-BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary. For information about this internal check, refer to the Maintenance Manual. ABB:EXECUTING BLACK SET The messages change in the following sequence : BLACK SET r BLACK BALANCE The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message “ABB:OK” and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory. Notes • During the black balance adjustment, the iris is automatically closed. • During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault. If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen. 56 ABB : NG R (or G or B) : OVERFLOW Meaning The lens iris did not close; adjustment was impossible. Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts. The difference between the reference value and the current value is so great that it exceeds the range. Adjustment was impossible. Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Note If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect. Black balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is next adjusted. If a memory error occurs If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the black balance and white balance memory contents have been lost. Adjust the black balance and white balance again. Contact a Sony representative if this message continues to appear even after the black balance and white balance have been adjusted again. For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual. change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen (in display mode 3). Adjusting the white balance 1 Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure below. 3 Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to it. Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used. The absolute minimum white area is as follows. 1 2 34 1 FILTER selector 2 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible. 3 OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM 4 WHITE BAL switch: A or B a) a)White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “MEM” on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu. If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL switch is changed, a message reporting the new setting position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen. 2 The white object must be within the rectangle and have an area of at least 10% of the screen. Note Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle. 4 Adjust the lens iris. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Rectangle centered on the screen. The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length and width of the screen. Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an appropriate setting. Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/ manual switch on the lens to automatic. 5 Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHT and then release the switch. Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows. The possible settings of the FILTER selector and their corresponding filters to be selected are listed below. FILTER selector (inner knob) setting 1 2 3 4 ND filter CLEAR 1/ ND 4 1/ ND 16 1/ ND 64 If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a message reporting the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting AUTO W/B BAL switch The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed. During adjustment, the message “AWB:EXECUTING WHITE BALANCE” Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 57 is displayed on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3). The white balance adjustment ends in about one second with the message shown in the following figure, and the adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory (A or B) that was selected in step 1. Error message WHITE : NG POOR WHITE AREA WHITE : NG OVER LEVEL Meaning The white area could not be checked. The white video level is too high. Either stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter. If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting AWB:OK . K Approximate color temperature of the subject If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris, the iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on the lens. For details, refer to the lens operation manual. 1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control. If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3). Possible messages are listed below. WHITE : NG COLOR TEMP HIGH WHITE : NG COLOR TEMP LOW WHITE : NG TIME LIMIT 58 If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. Note Error message WHITE : NG LOW LEVEL For information about this internal check, refer to the Maintenance Manual. Meaning The white video level is too low. Either open the lens iris or increase the gain. The color temperature is too high. The color temperature is too low. Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts. Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance For details of automatic white balance adjustment, see page 57. White balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted. There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B, and adjustments for each of the CC filters can be automatically stored in the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B) of the WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four built-in CC filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments can be stored. However, the memory contents are not linked to the CC filter settings in the following cases. • When the number of memories allocated to each of A and B is limited to one by setting the FILTER WHT MEM item on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to OFF. If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu, the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)”, the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions. To save white balance settings obtained by ATW Set ATW HOLD MEMORY in the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to “ON”. When this is done, auto white balance settings obtained by ATW are written to the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B) that is currently selected with the WHITE BAL switch. 1) You can then turn ATW off and continue shooting with the current white balance values. The unit continues to use the values that were in effect immediately before ATW was turned off. continues to appear even after the white balance and black balance have been adjusted again. For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual. 1) This function is not available when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. If you have connected a remote control unit, the unit uses the memory corresponding to the remote control unit setting (A, B, or C). Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting WB ATW HOLD MEMORY: OFF a) ATW: ON t ATW: OFF a) White balance settings stored in memory A, B, or C WB ATW HOLD MEMORY: ON b) ATW: ON ATW: OFF b) White balance settings immediately before ATW was turned off. t White balance settings used when ATW is turned off (WB: White balance setting value, t: Shooting time) If a memory error occurs If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the white balance and black balance memory contents have been lost. Adjust the white balance and black balance again. Contact a Sony representative if this message Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 59 Setting the Electronic Shutter Shutter modes 720 The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Standard mode Select this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects with little blurring. SYSTEM System Shutter speed (unit: LINE setting frequency seconds) 1/ 1 1 1080 59.94i 100, /125, /250, 1/ 50i 29.97P 25P 23.98P 720 59.94P 50P 1 1 500, /1000, /2000 1 1 60, /125, /250, 1/ 1 1 500, /1000, /2000 1/ a), 1/ , 1/ , 40 60 120 1/ 1 1 125, /250, /500, 1/ 1 1000, /2000 1/ a), 1/ , 1/ , 33 50 100 1/ 1 1 125, /250, /500, 1/ 1 1000, /2000 1/ a), 1/ , 1/ , 1/ , 32 48 50 60 1/ , 1/ , 1/ 96 125 250, 1/ 1 1 500, /1000, /2000 1/ 1 1 100, /125, /250, 1/ 1 1 500, /1000, /2000 1/ , 1/ , 1/ 60 125 250, 1/ 1 1 500, /1000, /2000 1/ a) This speed cannot be selected when the unit is in Slow & Quick Motion mode and FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency. ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode Select this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens. 60 SYSTEM LINE setting 1080 Setting the Electronic Shutter System frequency 59.94i 50i 29.97P a) Shutter speed (unit: Hz) 60.00 to 4300 50.00 to 4700 30.00 to 2700 25P a) 25.00 to 2300 23.98P a) 24.00 to 2200 59.94P 50P 60.00 to 4300 50.00 to 4700 a) When the unit is in Slow & Quick Motion mode and FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency, the lower limits for shutter speed settings are as shown below. 29.97P: 60.00Hz 25P: 50.00Hz 23.98P: 48.00Hz SLS (slow speed shutter) mode Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level lighting conditions. SYSTEM LINE setting 1080 720 Shutter speed (unit: frames) 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 2, 4, 6, 8, 16 Notes • Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter, the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed. • When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field. • Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing in synchronization with the frequency of the power supply causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60 Hz. However, if the power frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter speed to 1/100 can reduce this flicker. • When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs. Before using ECS mode, check the shooting conditions. • The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the current system frequency. • In SLS mode, white flecks are more prominent when you set the shutter speed (number of frames) to higher values. Executing the APR(SLS) function on the APR page (see page 183) may alleviate the problem of white flecks in SLS mode. selector down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears. When all modes and speeds are displayed, the display changes in the following order. Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed Standard mode (with system frequency: 59.94i) Switching the shutter mode, and the shutter speed in standard mode: Repeatedly flick the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side (see the next section). Switching the shutter speed in ECS mode and SLS mode: Select ECS mode or SLS mode with the SHUTTER selector, and then turn the MENU knob (see page 61). SLS mode ECS mode If you have changed the configuration, only the selected modes and speeds appear. • Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be switched to angle display by using SHT DISP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu (see page 180). MENU knob SHUTTER selector You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select in advance whether or not you use ECS or SLS. To set the shutter mode and standardmode shutter speed Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off. 1 2 Follow the procedure described in “Selecting the display items” (page 201) to set the VF DISPLAY MODE item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu. Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT. The current shutter setting indication appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen. Examples: “: SS : 1/250”, “: ECS : 60.0 Hz” 3 Before the shutter setting indication disappears, flick the SHUTTER To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS mode 1 Set the shutter speed mode to ECS or SLS (see the previous item). 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired frequency or number of frames. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting • When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is configured to display all of the modes and speeds in “Shutter modes” (page 60), except SLS mode. You can change this configuration by selecting only the required modes and speeds on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu (see page 159). When the RM-B170 Remote Control Unit is connected You can set the shutter speed of ECS or SLS with the RM-B170. To change the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance. This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu. Note The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B170 or another remote control unit is connected to the camcorder. Setting the Electronic Shutter 61 1 Display the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. 1 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting 2 ECS SLS 1/100 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 025 SHT ENABLE : : : : : : : : ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON Turn the MENU knob to move b to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want, then press the MENU knob. Six shutter speeds appear. A registered shuttle angle appears in the DEGREE field of each line. A shutter speed (exposure time, in units of seconds) appears in the SECOND field, as calculated by converting from the selected frame rate. Each time that you flick the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side, the setting or mode changes in the following order. (SLS mode and ECS mode appear only when they are enabled on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.) Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then press the MENU knob. Note that only the shutter speeds set to ON can be selected with the SHUTTER selector. To set the shutter speed in degree units On the SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can specify degrees (angle of opening of the shutter) to select the shutter speed in standard shutter mode. Note When you enable degree settings, the unit disables all items on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu except SHUTTER ECS and SHUTTER SLS. 62 Example of standard mode display (shutter degrees setting) 1 To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section. The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen. Setting the Electronic Shutter TOP SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE ADD: ---.DEL: DEGREE SECOND 1: 216.0 1/99.85 2: 180.0 1/119.7 3: 90.0 1/239.0 4: 45.0 1/475.0 5: 22.5 1/940.0 6: 11.2 1/1880 z on the left of the selected item changes to b and ? on the left of the setting changes to z. To set another mode or speed, return to step 2. 4 Select SHUTTER SELECT, and turn the MENU knob to display DEGREE. M27 SHUTTER SELECT b on the left of the selected item changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to ?. 3 Display the SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and press the MENU knob. 2 SLS mode 3 4 5 6 ECS mode To register user-defined settings You can register up to six shutter angle settings. If six settings are already registered, you must delete one of the registered settings before registering a new one. 1 Rotate the MENU knob to move the b mark to the DEL position, and then press the MENU knob. The b mark changes into a z mark, and the z mark changes into a ? mark. Also, a * mark appears before the number. M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE ADD: ---.DEL:? DEGREE SECOND *1: 216.0 1/99.85 2: 180.0 1/119.7 3: 90.0 1/239.0 4: 45.0 1/475.0 5: 22.5 1/940.0 6: 11.2 1/1880 2 Turn the MENU knob to move the * mark to the number of the shuttle angle that you want to change, and then press the MENU knob. M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE ADD: ---.DEL: DEGREE SECOND *1: 216.0 1/99.85 2: 180.0 1/119.7 3: 45.0 1/475.0 4: 22.5 1/940.0 5: 11.2 1/1880 6: ---.------- 3 M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE ADD: ---.DEL: DEGREE SECOND *1: 216.0 1/99.85 2: 180.0 1/119.7 3: 144.0 1/150.0 4: 45.0 1/475.0 5: 22.5 1/940.0 6: 11.2 1/1880 To add more user-defined settings If there is no empty number in the list: Repeat steps 1 to 4. If there is an empty number in the list: Repeat steps 3 and 4. Deleting unneeded settings When you are selecting shutter speeds, the unit skips numbers that do not have assigned settings. You will be able to select settings more quickly if you delete settings that you use only rarely. You must leave at least one setting, but you can delete settings numbered 2 through 6. Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the ADD position, and press the MENU knob. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting The selected setting is deleted. The numbers of settings after the deleted setting are incremented to bring them up to replace the deleted setting. (The following example shows the display after deletion of the setting “90.0”, which had been registered as setting number 3.) in order of the setting values. (In the figure below, the shutter angle “144.0” was added, and then the list was sorted, so that the angle “144.0” is registered as item number 3.) The b mark changes into a z mark, and the z mark changes into a ? mark. M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE ADD:?180.0 DEL: DEGREE SECOND *1: 216.0 1/99.85 2: 180.0 1/119.7 3: 45.0 1/475.0 4: 22.5 1/940.0 5: 11.2 1/1880 6: ---.------- 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the value to the right of the ? mark into the shutter angle that you want to register, and then press the MENU knob. (The setting value can be selected over the range 360.0 to 4.5.) The newly specified shutter angle is assigned to a free slot in the list, and the list is sorted Setting the Electronic Shutter 63 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 4 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the screen. 5 Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value. Note Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights. The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value. • 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1 stop further open • –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1 stop further close Also you can set the area where light detection occurs. To change the reference value (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the AUTO IRIS page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 019 AUTO IRIS Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not ECS. The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off. Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on. To make the iris more open Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera. The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication. Iris stop 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 To stop down the iris Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera. The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication. Iris stop –0.25 –0.5 2 Check that the b mark is at the IRIS OVERRIDE position, and then press the MENU knob. –0.75 –1 b on the left of the selected item changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to ?. 3 Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press the MENU knob. z on the left of the selected item changes to b and ? on the left of the setting changes to z. The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON”. 64 Indicator Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment Indicator 4 Turn the MENU knob to move b to IRIS WINDOW, then press the MENU knob. b changes to z and z changes to ?. 5 Opening the lens iris Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears, then press the MENU knob. Iris opened by 1 stop (two segments) The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection z changes to b and ? changes to z. Stopping down the lens iris Iris stopped down by 1 stop (two segments) If you select “VARIABLE”, the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size. Set each item to the desired size. Iris stopped down by 0.5 stop (one segment) Item IRIS VAR WIDTH IRIS VAR HEIGHT When the RM-B170 Remote Control Unit is connected The IRIS control knob of the RM-B170 can be used for lens iris setting (auto iris). In this case, the indicator is not displayed. To set the automatic iris window IRIS VAR V POS. 6 1 Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in the previous item to display the AUTO IRIS page. 2 Turn the MENU knob to move b to IRIS WINDOW IND, then press the MENU knob. b on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND. changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to ?. 3 IRIS VAR H POS. Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then press the MENU knob. z changes to b and ? changes to z. The currently selected auto iris window appears on the screen. If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen, set to OFF. Setting The width of the window The height of the window The position of the window in the horizontal direction The position of the window in the vertical direction. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Iris opened by 0.5 stop (one segment) Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen. To counter problems with very bright highlights If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much, leaving the overall image dark, or the highlights may be blown out. In such cases, setting the highlight clip function on reduces the luminance range, avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction. In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON. Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 65 Adjusting the Audio Level Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2. You can also adjust the audio level manually. For audio channels 3 and 4, menu settings allow you to select automatic adjustment, manual adjustment, or fixed. Target audio level for automatic audio level adjustment Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level. If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level is excessive. 0 10 0 10 CH-3 F-RUN SET R-RUN F R W AUTO MANUAL AUDIO SELECT CH-1 PRESET REGEN CLOCK CH-2 CH-4 AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS F R W MIC LEVEL control 1 2 1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to REAR. To adjust both input signals, set both switches to REAR. Excessive input level 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to the channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL. 3 With the LEVEL control(s) for the channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume. Target input level Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input from these connectors is automatically selected for audio recording. In this case, start the operation from step 2. You can turn on and off the XLR connection automatic detection function on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows. REAR1/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 1 Setting SIDE1 FRONT F+S1 66 3 LEVEL Adjusting the Audio Level Control LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left) MIC LEVEL control LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with MIC LEVEL control. REAR2/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 2 Setting SIDE2 FRONT F+S2 Control LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the right) MIC LEVEL control LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with MIC LEVEL control. 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL. 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume. Note Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector Note If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on, when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/ CH2 connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are automatically selected. Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone, confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR AUTO item to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows. MIC CH1 LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 1 Setting SIDE1 FRONT F+S1 Control LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left) MIC LEVEL control LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with MIC LEVEL control. MIC CH2 LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 2 Setting SIDE2 FRONT F+S2 Control LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the right) MIC LEVEL control LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with MIC LEVEL control. Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls. Note When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control. LEVEL 0 10 0 10 CH-3 F-RUN SET R-RUN F R W AUTO MANUAL AUDIO SELECT CH-1 PRESET REGEN CLOCK 3 1 CH-2 CH-4 AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS F R W 2 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es) to FRONT. Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 Selecting the recorded audio You can select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH4 switches, or you can have the selection made automatically, as follows. Adjusting the Audio Level 67 To automatically select the same audio as on channels 1 and 2 On the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set the AUDIO CH3/4 MODE item to “CH 1/2”. page of the MAINTENANCE menu to FRONT. The levels of audio channels 3 and 4 can now be adjusted with the MIC LEVEL control. To set to a fixed value In step 2 of the previous procedure “To adjust manually”, set the menu items to FIX. 1 2 3 Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting 4 5 6 CH-3 switch 1 F: The audio signal from the front microphone is recorded. 2 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector is recorded. 3 W: The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recorded. CH-4 switch 4 F: Same as with the CH3 switch. 5 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector is recorded. 6 W: Same as with the CH3 switch. Note When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to LINE or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function. They are determined by the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches. Adjusting the audio recording levels To adjust automatically Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to STREO or MONO. To adjust manually 68 1 Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to OFF. 2 Set AUDIO CH3 LEVEL (for audio channel 3) and AUDIO CH4 LEVEL (for audio channel 4) on the AUDIO-3 Adjusting the Audio Level 5 Setting Time Data F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator keeps running. R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode generator runs only while recording. Setting the timecode The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds : frames). RESET/RETURN button RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT LEVE 3,5 4 EXPAND CHAPTER COUNTER RC U-BIT THUMBNAIL CLIP MENU 0 ESSENCE MARK AUTO MANUAL To make the timecode consecutive When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the disc normally produces consecutive timecode. However, once you remove the disc and record on another disc, the timecode will no longer be consecutive when you use the original disc again for recording. In this case, to make the timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN. Saving the real Time in the Timecode Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode. When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu. AUDIO SELE SUB CLIP S.SEL CH-1 PRESET 2 10 F-RUN SET R-RUN SET To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame mode You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or nondrop frame (NDF) mode on the TIMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu. SHIFT REGEN CLOCK AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock” (page 39). Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting 1 DISP SEL HOLD Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-RUN. Setting the user bits 1 Press DISP SEL to set the LCD screen to the status display. 2 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET. 3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you can record user information such as the date, time, or scene number on the timecode track. The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes. 4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set. To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET/RETURN button. Setting Time Data 69 generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder. Connections for timecode synchronization Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below. 1 Example 1: Synchronizing with an external timecode RESET/RETURN button DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT LEVE Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting 2,4 3 EXPAND CHAPTER COUNTER RC U-BIT CLIP MENU THUMBNAIL 0 ESSENCE MARK 10 F-RUN SET R-RUN SET AUTO MANUAL AUDIO SELE SUB CLIP S.SEL CH-1 PRESET SHIFT REGEN CLOCK AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS 2 External timecode Reference video signal 1 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT. 2 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. The first (leftmost) digit flashes. 3 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set. To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET/RETURN button. 4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator. The set user bit data will be recorded for both LTC and VITC. To store the user bit setting in memory The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off. Synchronizing the timecode You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode 70 1 Setting Time Data 1 GENLOCK 2 TC IN IN a) a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF. Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders or timecode synchronization To lock the timecode to an external source 1 2 Reference camcorder 1 3 4 2 DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT LEVEL EXPAND CHAPTER COUNTER RC U-BIT CLIP MENU THUMBNAIL 0 ESSENCE MARK 10 F-RUN SET R-RUN SET 0 AUTO MANUAL AUDIO SELECT 3 SUB CLIP S.SEL CH-1 PRESET 4 SHIFT 2 1 REGEN CLOCK CH-2 AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS 2 To another camcorder to be synchronized 1 TEST OUT 2 TC OUT 3 TC IN 4 GENLOCK IN a) a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF. SDI IN (OPTION) GENLOCK IN TEST OUT TC OUT Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting 4 3 1 TC IN 5 1 Turn on the POWER switch. 2 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET. 3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN. 4 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC. 5 Supply a timecode signal and a reference video signal complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector, respectively. Setting Time Data 71 This operation synchronizes the internal timecode generator with the external timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can disconnect the external timecode without losing the synchronization. However, there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the timecode signal during recording. Notes Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting • When you finish the above procedure, the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the counter display will show the value of the external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording. • If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case, the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized with the external timecode. • When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the timecode cannot be synchronized with the reference video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu. User bit settings during timecode synchronization When the timecode is synchronized, only the time data is synchronized with the external timecode value. Therefore, each camcorder can have its own user bit settings. You can lock the users bits of this camcorder to the user bits of external timecode by setting EXTLK UBIT in the TIMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu to EXT. To release the timecode synchronization First disconnect the external timecode, then set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN. To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during timecode synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack. You may lose timecode synchronization if you remove the battery pack first. Camera synchronization during timecode synchronization During timecode synchronization, the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector. 72 Setting Time Data Chapter 4 Shooting Handling Discs Discs used for recording and playback 1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Storage • Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or humidity is high. • Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain ingress. • Store cartridges in their cases. Care of the discs • Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using a soft dry cloth. • If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before use. Notes • It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or playback on this unit: - Blu-ray Disc - Professional Disc for Data • PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices with the DL mark (see the following illustration). They cannot be used by XDCAM devices without this mark. Write-protecting discs Chapter 4 Shooting The following Professional Discs 1) can be used for recording and playback on this unit: • PFD23A (capacity 23.3 GB) • PFD50DLA (capacity 50.0 GB) • Do not disassemble the cartridge. • The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position. To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the following figure. Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab DL mark Notes on handling Handling The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be handled and stored carefully. • Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the cartridge. • Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage. SAVE Slide in the direction of the arrow Write Inhibit tab settings SAVE Recording enabled SAVE Recording disabled Handling Discs 73 You can also write protect-individual clips. For details, see “Locking (write-protecting) clips” (page 124). Loading and unloading a disc To load a disc 1 Turn on the POWER switch. Note To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the camcorder is in the upright position (the grip upside, the bottom downside). To unload a disc With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid and eject the disc, then remove the disc. If you are not going to insert another disc, close the disc compartment lid. To unload a disc when the power supply is off If the battery is exhausted, it is not possible to remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button. In such cases, use the following emergency procedure to remove the disc manually. Chapter 4 Shooting LCD monitor POWER switch 2 Press the EJECT button. This opens the lid of the disc compartment. EJECT button 3 1 Insert the disc in the V direction, and 2 close the disc compartment lid manually. 1 2 V indication on the outside The disc is loaded. 74 Handling Discs 1 Turn off the POWER switch. 2 Carry out the operation shown in the following figure. 1 Open this rubber cover. 2 Using a screwdriver or similar implement, slide the black metal plate visible inside, in the direction of the rear of the camcorder. The disc compartment lid opens. A red Phillips screw is visible inside the rubber cap. 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the screw counterclockwise (the direction shown on the rubber cap). This ejects the disc. 4 Close the rubber cover firmly. Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage function) Notes You need not return the screw to its original position after taking out the disc. Turning on the power makes the disc compartment mechanism operable again. Note Do not touch the disc or try to forcibly remove it until it has been completely ejected. Formatting a disc When using a new disc An unused disc requires no formatting operation. The disc is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when loaded into this unit. To format a disc on which material is recorded See page 136 for details of formatting a disc. Note When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the disc is erased. (Even locked clips (see page 124) are also erased.) • Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until recording processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has gone out. • This function salvages as much recorded material as possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100% restoration cannot be guaranteed. • Even when this function is used, it is not possible to recover data from immediately before the interruption of recording. The amount of data lost is as follows. - Quick salvage: From 2 to 5 seconds of data before the interruption of recording. - Full salvage: From 3 to 6 seconds of data before the interruption of recording. (More data may be lost when the unit is subject to vibrations, when you switch frequently between recording and paused, and when you use functions such as Picture Cash.) Chapter 4 Shooting Recording processing does not end normally if, for example, the battery pack is removed during recording, or if the power cord is disconnected during recording. Because the file system is not updated, video and audio data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that point are lost. However, this unit has a salvage function which can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such discs. Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the POWER switch is set to OFF and when battery exhaustion is detected, because the unit does not become powered off until after the end of recording processing. Quick salvage When the unit is powered on again after a recording interruption due to a power interruption, with the disc still loaded in the unit, clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the disc. Processing time is about 5 seconds. Full salvage When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted because of a power interruption, and a disc is manually ejected from that device with the Handling Discs 75 power off, clips are reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc when the disc is loaded in this unit. Therefore, processing takes longer than for a quick salvage (about 30 seconds, although it depends on the state of the disc). Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage. 1 Insert the disc on which recording did not end normally. The following salvage message appears. SALVAGE TO RECORD ON THE DISC, IT IS NECESSARY TO EXECUTE SALVAGE. SALVAGE OK? YES Chapter 4 Shooting 2 NO Turn the MENU knob to move b to “YES”, and press the MENU knob. Salvage processing starts, and the message “EXECUTING” appears. A results message appears when the processing finishes. • If the salvage succeeded, the message “COMPLETED” appears. • If the salvage failed, the message “INCOMPLETED” appears. Clips for which recording did not end normally are lost. To exit without salvaging Select NO in step 1 to exit without performing salvage processing. However, the status of the disc does not change. Salvage is still required to recover the clips for which recording did not end normally. The salvage message will appear again when that disc is inserted again, or when the camcorder is powered on again. Notes • If salvage processing is not done, sections which were recorded normally can be played back, but no new recording can be done on the disc. • Full salvage of discs recorded by this camcorder can be performed with the PDW-F1600, PDW-HD1500, PDW-F800, PDW-700, PDW-740, or PDW-HR1. Full salvage cannot be performed with any other XDCAM device. The following message may appear when you insert a disc that was not recorded normally. The “XXXX” in the message is a code for XDCAM 76 Handling Discs devices that can salvage the disc. Refer to the table below and use one of the indicated devices to salvage the disc. SALVAGE DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED. FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT SERVICE TO RUN CLIP SALVAGE PROGRAM. (XXXX) PUSH ESCAPE SWITCH OR ROTARY ENCODER. Code (XXXX) Model name 0002 PDW-1500/530/510/R1 PDW-F70/F350/F330 0200 PDW-F70/F350/F330 (Version 1.9 or higher) PDW-F75/F355/F335 PDW-HD1500/HR1/700/740 0300 a) 0301 a) PDW-HD1500/700/740 (Version 1.5 or higher) PDW-F1600/F800 a) Does not appear on this unit. To cancel the message and return to normal operation, exchange the disc for a usable disc and flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the ESCAPE side, or press the MENU knob. Basic Procedure for Shooting This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording. Before a shooting session, ensure that the camcorder is functioning properly. For details, see “Testing the Camcorder before Shooting” (page 240). Basic procedure for shooting: from power supply to disc loading 1 Check that there are no obstructions such as cables near the disc compartment lid. Then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid. 5 After checking that the disc is not writeprotected (see page 73), load it and close the disc compartment lid. Basic procedure for shooting: from adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording Switch settings After turning on the power and loading a disc, set the switches and selectors as shown below and begin operation. 2 1 3 2 1 3 Attach a fully charged battery pack. For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply” (page 33). 2 Set the POWER switch to ON. 3 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to status display, and check that the following condition is met. 6 4 Chapter 4 Shooting 4 5 4 5 1 DISPLAY: ON 2 Iris: Automatic 3 Zoom: Automatic 4 OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC: ON 5 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN: F-RUN or R-RUN (set as needed) 6 AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2: AUTO The battery status indicator shows at least five segments (x). If it does not, replace the battery pack with a fully charged one. Basic Procedure for Shooting 77 Shooting During recording, the REC indicator lights in the viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus control, if necessary. Note During recording (while the ACCESS indicator is lit) do not remove the battery pack. If you do, the internal processing for recording may not finish properly, which may cause the last few seconds of recording to be lost. 3 For details, see “Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage function)” (page 75). 6 5,6 4 Chapter 4 Shooting 1 1 The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off. The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is saved as a single clip. 2 Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the black balance. To check the last two seconds of the recording (recording review) If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused, the last two seconds of the recording is played back. If you hold down the RET button, a low-speed reverse search begins at a position two seconds before the recording end position. When you release the RET button, the reverse search stops and playback in the forward direction begins. After playback, the camcorder is ready to start recording again. By assigning the same function as that of the RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/3/4/ 5 switch, you can use the switch in the same way as the lens RET button. For details of black balance adjustment, see page 55. 2 Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions, and adjust the white balance. For details, see “Adjusting the white balance” (page 57). 3 Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom. You can adjust the focus by using the Focus Assist function (see page 81). 4 If necessary, set the electronic shutter for an appropriate mode and speed. For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 60). 5 To start recording, press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens. If the recording start/stop function is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches or RET button on the lens, you can also use this switch. On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches, see page 209. 78 Basic Procedure for Shooting To stop recording, press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again. On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches, see page 209. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for shooting. Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6, successive clips are recorded on the disc. Clip 1 REC START Clip 2 REC REC STOP START Clip 3 REC REC STOP START REC STOP Notes • It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds. If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting, this results in a 2-second clip. • The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on a single disc is 300. If an attempt is made to record more than 300 clips, the error message “MAX # Clips” appears, even if there is free capacity on the disc. Playback control buttons During recording, the playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/ PAUSE, STOP) have no effect. Playing back the recorded clip Normal playback You can also view playback video during a fast forward or reverse search. For details about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level, see page 15 and page 22. To freeze a picture during playback The following operation can also be done from the RM-B170/B750 Remote Control Unit. 1 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start playback. 2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at the instant when you want to freeze the picture. The playback pauses and a frozen picture appears. The timecode of the frozen frame is displayed in the counter display and the To restart playback Press the PLAY/PAUSE button once again. Clip playback modes You can set the clip playback mode to either of the following. Continuous playback mode: The playback target is all of the clips on the disc (factory default setting) Single clip playback mode: The playback target is the currently selected clip only To select single clip playback mode Set SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ON”. Playback in single clip playback mode Playback stops when it reaches the start or end of the clip. The next and preceding clips are not played, even if they exist on the disc. The available playback types include normal playback, and high-speed playback in the forward or reverse directions. To move to another clip, press the PREV, NEXT, F REV + PREV, or F FWD + NEXT button, or perform a thumbnail search. Chapter 4 Shooting By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can review any length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor. There are two other ways to review the recording. Recording review: You can view the last two seconds of the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor. Viewing color playback on a video monitor: You can view the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor. PLAY/PAUSE indicator now flashes (one flash/second). Disc playback start position Although this unit uses optical discs, it is designed to offer the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs. One of these is the playback start position, which works in the same way as with tape, as described below. After playback stop The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was pressed. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the stop position. After recording The unit stops at the position where recording ended. To play back a clip, press the PREV button to move to the start frame of any clip, or press the F REV button to move to any position. After disc insertion The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most recently ejected. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the most recent position. Basic Procedure for Shooting 79 The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is ejected, which allows playback to start at that position whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player. Note The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc is write-protected. Deteriorating playback conditions Chapter 4 Shooting Deteriorating playback may be due to the following causes. • Scratches and dust on the disc surface This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar from cigarette smoke, and so on. Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are not a problem because they are registered in advance as defects, and recording avoids them. However, scratches and soiling which occur after recording can lead to deteriorating playback conditions. • Aging of disc recording layers Over several decades, the recording layers of optical discs can age and cause deteriorating playback conditions. • Deteriorating laser diodes performance The performance of the laser diodes used in optical heads can worsen with age, leading to deteriorating playback conditions. Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate guide to when it is time to replace optical heads. To prevent playback conditions from deteriorating Pay attention to the following points when handling discs. • Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with your hands. • Do not store for long periods in locations which are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans. • Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or in locations exposed to direct sunlight. If playback conditions have deteriorated Read errors occur when playback conditions continue to deteriorate. When a read error occurs, the message “DISC ERROR!” appears, the video freezes, and the audio output is suppressed. If this happens, check the following points. 80 Basic Procedure for Shooting Whether the disc displays the same playback condition on other XDCAM devices: If so, the surface of the disc may be dirty or scratched, or the performance of the recording layers on the disc may have worsened due to age. Do not use discs with these symptoms. Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device displays the same playback conditions: If so, the performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated. Check the total optical output time. Deleting the recorded clip For details, see “Deleting clips” (page 125). Using the Freeze Mix function The Freeze Mix function allows you to display a freeze image over the current shooting video. For example, you can use this function to frame summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in exactly the same way, or to resume an interrupted shooting session with exactly the same framing. To use the Freeze Mix function, you need to assign it to an ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch. For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209) 1 Play the disc that contains the scene you want to use as the framing standard. 2 When the scene that you want appears, press the PLAY/PAUSE button to pause playback. 3 Press the button to which you have assigned the Freeze Mix function. The playback screen changes to black and white, and a freeze image appears over the current shooting video. To change the standard image Use the PLAY/PAUSE button, the F REV and F FWD buttons and other controls to find another image, and repeat step 2. 4 Align the framing of the playback image and the shooting video. 5 Press the button to which you have assigned the Freeze Mix function once more. Focus detection range frame The unit exits Freeze Mix mode. 6 Start recording. Note If you exchange discs before starting to record, be careful to keep the unit from moving. Using the Focus Assist function Focus assist indicator Displaying the focus assist indicator in the viewfinder makes it easier to focus. This is convenient in situations where it may be difficult to focus using only the video in the viewfinder. 1 Display the FOCUS ASSIST page in the OPERATION menu. See “Basic menu operations” (page 193) for more information about menu operations. 2 Select FOCUS ASSIST IND, and turn the MENU knob until ON appears. The focus assist indicator appears. 3 Set the following items as required. FOCUS IND POS: Select the focus assist indicator display position from BOTTM (bottom), LEFT, TOP, and RIGHT. FOCUS AREA MARK: Turn the display of the frame around the focus detection range OFF (hide) or ON (display). How to read the focus assist indicator Chapter 4 Shooting To display the focus assist indicator Notes • The focus assist indicator is not displayed when the gain is set to 18 dB or higher. • When you display the focus assist indicator, the display of effective pixels (which you select by setting 100% MARKER in the MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu to “ON”) is hidden. • When you display the frame of the focus detection range, the box cursor (which you select by setting User Box in the MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION menu to “ON”) is hidden. The “in focus” position is the position where the bar reaches its maximum length. Focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring so that the bar extends to its maximum length. In focus position: Position where bar is at maximum length Note The focus indicator may show little or no variation when you are shooting a smooth subject or a dark scene. Basic Procedure for Shooting 81 Advanced Operations for Shooting Recording essence marks Shot marks and other essence marks can be recorded on the disc. Recording essence marks for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points. This increases editing efficiency. Chapter 4 Shooting To record a shot mark using the RET button on the lens To make it possible to record shot marks using the RET button on the lens, carry out the following procedure. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu. ?M11 ESSENCE MARK TOP RET SHOT MARK 1 RET SHOT MARK 2 : : ON ON INDEX PIC POS : 0SEC FIND MODE : R.ST For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 3 Select the essence mark to be recorded, and press the MENU knob to display “ON”. Repeat the step 2, as necessary. To record shot mark 1/2 When the camcorder is in recording or playback mode, operate the lens RET button as follows. Shot mark 1: Press the RET button once. Shot mark 2: Press the RET button twice in rapid succession. 82 Advanced Operations for Shooting “ShotMark1” or “ShotMark2” appears in the viewfinder screen for about one second near the timecode display. If the SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 recording function has been assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches, you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 essence mark. On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches, see page 209. If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the USB connector, you can record shot marks from Shot Mark0 up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to 9 keys on the numeric keypad. Setting clip flags with switches You can set three types of clip flags (OK/NG/ KEEP) during recording, immediately after recording, or during playback. Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips they need. You can use switches on the unit to set these flags. But before you can do so, you need to assign the corresponding flag functions to the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches or the RET button on the lens (see page 209). To set a clip flag During recording, immediately after recording, or during playback (including search and still picture playback), press the button to which the flag function has been assigned. Press the button once at the position where you want to set the flag. The specified flag is set, and “*** ClpFlg” (***: OK, NG, or KEEP) appears near the timecode display in the viewfinder for about three seconds. To clear a clip flag During recording or playback, press the button to which the flag function has been assigned. Press the button twice in rapid succession. The flag is cleared, and “ClpFlg DEL.” appears for about three seconds. You can also set and clear clip flags from a GUI screen. For details, see “Setting clip flags” (page 124). Setting the thumbnail image at recording time When you record a clip, you can specify which frame to use as the clip thumbnail image (see page 105). (The factory default setting is to use the first frame in the clip as the thumbnail.) For example, if all clips have the same image in their first frames, you can specify a frame a few seconds after the start of the clip, so that all thumbnails will not show the same image. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu. 2 Select INDEX PIC POS, and press the MENU knob. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time. 4 Press the MENU knob. Notes • Storage of images to memory begins after you select Picture Cache mode. If you begin recording immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode, images from before the selection will not be recorded. • During playback, recording review or GUI screen operations, no data is saved to the Picture Cache memory. Thus it is not possible to use this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material from playback or recording review. To set the Picture Cache mode/Picture Cache time (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored picture data (Picture Cache function) The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory, in which you can cache the last few seconds (maximum 30 seconds) of captured video and audio, so that recording starts from a point just before you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens. Note Picture Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states. • The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled. • The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode. • During Slow & Quick Motion shooting Setting the Picture Cache mode/Picture Cache time To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture Chapter 4 Shooting For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). data storage time (Picture Cache time) using the USER menu. The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds recorded from the Picture Cache, counting back from the time when you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording. However, the number of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is changed, and in the special situations explained in the following notes. Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu. 005 REC FUNCTION TOP SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE : : ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE: CLIP CONT REC : LIVE LOGGING : OFF OFF OFF For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select CACHE REC, and turn the MENU knob to display CACHE. 3 Select CACHE REC TIME, and turn the MENU knob to display the desired Picture Cache time. As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture Cache time changes as follows: 0-2s y 2-4s y 4-6s y 6-8s y 8-10s y 18-20s y 28-30s. Advanced Operations for Shooting 83 The Picture Cache mode settings once made continue to be effective until changed. You can assign the Picture Cache on/off function to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4/5 switches or RET button on the lens. For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209). Notes • You can do a menu operation to change the Picture Cache time while the camcorder is in recording mode. However, the new setting takes effect only after the recording is finished. • In Picture Cache mode, the internal timecode generator operating mode is always F-RUN regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch. Chapter 4 Shooting 84 Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode is basically the same as that for normal recording. However, note the following differences. • When you record in Picture Cache mode, the picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data stored in memory (equal to the Picture Cache time) is recorded to disc. For this reason, disc access may continue for a short time after you press the REC START button to stop recording. During this time, the playback control buttons are disabled, as in recording mode. Also, if you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this time, a separate clip is recorded. • When you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during disc access, the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the Picture Cache time, especially when there are a large number of clips recorded on the disc. In Picture Cache mode, you should avoid stop and start recording operations in quick succession. • The time disc access stops after the REC START button is pressed equals the Picture Cache time. However, if you start recording within the Picture Cache time immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode, changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback or recording review, the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory. Thus, the time disc access stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time. • In Picture Cache mode, you cannot set the FRUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET to make Advanced Operations for Shooting timecode settings. To make timecode settings, first exit Picture Cache mode. When power is lost during recording in Picture Cache mode • If the POWER switch is turned off during recording in Picture Cache mode, the camcorder gets powered off after disc access has continued for a few seconds so that the picture at the moment when the POWER switch is turned off is recorded. • If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable, or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording in Picture Cache mode, video and audio stored in memory will be lost without being recorded to the disc. For this reason, make sure you do not replace the battery while recording. Time-lapse video (Interval Rec function) Using the memory in the camcorder, you can capture time-lapse video. There are two modes for this function, which is known as “Interval Rec”. Auto Interval Rec mode: In Auto Interval Rec mode, pictures are automatically shot a frame (two frames when the recording format is set to 720p) at a time at the specified interval and stored in memory. To use this function, you must set the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME). Manual Interval Rec mode: A specified number of frames (NUMBER OF FRAME) is recorded when you press the REC START button or the lens VTR button. There are two Manual Interval Rec modes: a single shot mode in which recording is done once with each press of the button, and a consecutive mode in which recording is done repeatedly at a specified interval after the button is pressed. A pre-lighting function is available in Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode. This function automatically turns on the light before recording starts, which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions. Note Interval Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states. • The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled. • The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled. • The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode. • During Slow & Quick Motion shooting Item Description • When you set the POWER When the switch to OFF, the camcorder camcorder power will switch off by itself after is switched off disc access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory. • If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut power to the AC adaptor, picture data stored before recording stops (a maximum of ten seconds) may be lost. Take care when replacing the battery. Operation limitations during recording Item Time code Description The internal time code generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-RUN/ SET/R-RUN switch is set. Not recorded. Audio signals Playback control • Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of buttons To make settings 1 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Menu operations The settings of the Interval Recrelated items on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu cannot be changed. To change the settings, do either of the following. • Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode Stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens. • The single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode Exit the Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button. Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu. Select CACHE/INTVAL REC, and turn the MENU knob to display “A.INT”. 005 REC FUNCTION TOP SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE : : ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC: TAKE TOTAL TIME : REC TIME : PRE-LIGHTING : A.INT 5MIN 5SEC OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE: CLIP CONT REC : OFF OFF Chapter 4 Shooting Manual Interval Rec mode The EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE and STOP buttons are disabled. To use these buttons, stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens. • The single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode The F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, and STOP buttons are disabled. To use these buttons, exit the Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button. Auto Interval Rec mode settings and shooting As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y CACHE y A.INT y M.INT. 3 Select TAKE TOTAL TIME, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired total time for shooting. As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: 5MIN y 10MIN y 15MIN y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN y 50MIN y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 5H y 7H y 10H y 15H y 20H y 30H y 40H y 50H y 70H y 100H. Here MIN means minutes (5MIN is 5 minutes) and H means hours (1H is one hour). Advanced Operations for Shooting 85 4 Select REC TIME, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired time to be recorded on the disc. As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: 5SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN ... 85MIN. Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5 seconds) and MIN means minutes (1MIN is one minute). You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME. The setting value changes within the range that can be set. For example: When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H, the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN. (60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes.) Chapter 4 Shooting 5 As required, select PRE-LIGHTING, and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on-time before recording starts. As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y 2SEC y 5SEC y 10SEC. Note Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording. The light switch must also be set to ON. With these settings, the light turns on and off automatically. However, the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less. When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON, the light remains on continuously. (The light does not turn on and off automatically.) When the setting is completed, the message “AUTO INTERVAL **M**S” appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen. “**M**S” indicates the shooting interval. For example, the message “AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S” indicates that the shooting interval is four seconds. The camcorder exits Auto Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off. However, the TAKE TOTAL TIME, REC TIME, and PRELIGHTING settings are maintained. You do not need to set them again the next time you use Auto Interval Rec mode. 86 Advanced Operations for Shooting To shoot and record 1 After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording, following the instructions in “Basic Procedure for Shooting” (page 77), secure the camcorder so that it will not move. 2 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens. The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode. When you use the PRELIGHTING function, recording starts after the light is switched on. The actual recording to disc begins when the camcorder has saved about ten seconds of video in memory, so disc access is intermittent. While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, the TALLY (green tally) indicator in the viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/second) and the message “AUTO INTERVAL **M**S” flashes on the viewfinder screen. When the camcorder is capturing the picture in memory, the REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder lights. After the length of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME) has elapsed, the camcorder automatically stops recording. To interrupt shooting Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens. Disc access may occur for recording picture data already stored in memory. To continue shooting Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again. To exit Auto Interval Rec mode Do either of the following. • Set the POWER switch to OFF. • Set CACHE/INTVAL REC to OFF on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu. Time required for shooting and time required for recording on the disc Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly. To use this function, you need to set the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME). The time required for shooting is the time required to capture the very slowly moving subject, and the camcorder must be arranged so that during this time the subject is always in the frame. The disc recording time indicates the running time of the completed recording. The camcorder calculates the time-lapse interval from these two times. Total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) 3 To make settings 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select CACHE/INTVAL REC, and turn the MENU knob to display “M.INT”. : : ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC: NUMBER OF FRAME : TRIGGER INTERVAL: M.INT 1 M DISC EXCHG CACHE: CLIP CONT REC : LIVE LOGGING : OFF OFF OFF Select NUMBER OF FRAME, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired number of frames to be recorded in each shot. As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: 1 y 3 y 6 (when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422 50, HD420 HQ, or HD420 SP: 2 y 6 y 12). 4 Chapter 4 Shooting Manual Interval Rec mode settings and shooting Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes. Single shot mode: Each time the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder captures to memory a single shot consisting of the specified number of video frames. Consecutive mode: Once the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval, with each shot consisting of the specified number of video frames. TOP SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y CACHE y A.INT y M.INT. When M. INT appears, the camcorder is in Manual Interval Rec mode and the TALLY (green tally) indicator in the viewfinder flashes. Shooting interval Time for recording on the disc (REC TIME) 005 REC FUNCTION Select TRIGGER INTERVAL, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired trigger mode or length of interval. As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: M y 1SEC y 2SEC y 3SEC y 4SEC y 5SEC y 6SEC y 7SEC y 8SEC y 9SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y 2MIN y 3MIN y 4MIN y 5MIN y 6MIN y 7MIN y 8MIN y 9MIN y 10MIN y 15MIN y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN y 50MIN y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 6H y 12H y 24H. Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5 seconds) and MIN means minutes (1MIN is one minute). M: The single shot mode (recording only one shot after one operation). In the viewfinder, the TALLY (green tally) indicator flashes twice per second. A setting value other than “M”: The consecutive mode (recording shots repeatedly after one operation). In the Advanced Operations for Shooting 87 viewfinder, the TALLY (green tally) indicator flashes four times per second. 5 When a setting value other than “M” (the consecutive mode) is selected in step 4, select PRE-LIGHTING, and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on-time before recording starts as required. As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y 2SEC y 5SEC y 10SEC. Note Chapter 4 Shooting Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording. The light switch must also be set to ON. With these settings, the light turns on and off automatically. However, the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less. When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON, the light remains on continuously. (The light does not turn on and off automatically.) When the setting is completed, the following message appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen. In single shot mode: MANU INTERVAL * FRAME In consecutive mode: INTERVAL * SEC (MIN/ H) * FRAME “* SEC”, “* MIN”, and “* H” indicate the length of interval and “* FRAME” indicates the number of frames. The camcorder exits Manual Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off. However, the NUMBER OF FRAME, TRIGGER INTERVAL, and PRE-LIGHTING settings are maintained. You do not need to set them again the next time you use Manual Interval Rec mode. To shoot and record 88 The camcorder starts recording in Manual Interval Rec mode. When you use the PRELIGHTING function, recording starts after the light is switched on. While recording in Manual Interval Rec mode, the TALLY (green tally) indicator in the viewfinder flashes (2 or 4 flashes/second) and the message “MANU INTERVAL (* SEC) * FRAME” flashes on the viewfinder screen. To exit shooting Do one of the following. • In the single shot mode, press the EJECT button. • In the consecutive mode, press the REC START button or the lens VTR button to stop recording. • Set the POWER switch to OFF. After the camcorder has exited from Manual Interval Rec mode, it records picture data stored in memory to the disc. To exit Manual Interval Rec mode Do one of the following. • Set the POWER switch to OFF. • Set the CACHE/INTVAL REC setting to OFF on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu. Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion (Due to be supported from package version 2.30) When the recording format is MPEG HD422, 50 Mbps, and the resolution/system frequency is 1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P, you can specify a recording frame rate that is different from the playback frame rate. By shooting with this function, you can obtain smooth slow motion and fast motion effects. Notes 1 After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording, following the instructions in “Basic Procedure for Shooting” (page 77), secure the camcorder so that it will not move. 2 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens. Advanced Operations for Shooting • No audio is recorded during Slow & Quick Motion shooting. • Slow & Quick Motion cannot be enabled when the unit is set up to record external input video. Switch to shooting with the camera (see page 98). • The following functions are disabled automatically whenever you enable the Slow & Quick Motion function. - Picture Cache function - Interval Rec function • • • • To enable the function 1 2 Check that you are not recording and that the recording format of this unit is set to MPEG HD422, 50 Mbps, and the resolution/system frequency is set to 1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P. Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu. See “Basic menu operations” (page 193) for more information about menu operations. 3 Select SLOW & QUICK, and turn the MENU knob until ON appears. 005 REC FUNCTION SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE 4 TOP : : ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC : -- DISC EXCHG CACHE : CLIP CONT REC : LIVE LOGGING : ---- Select FRAME RATE, and turn the MENU knob until the desired frame rate appears. The frame rate setting ranges are as follows. Recording format 1080/23.98P 1080/25P 1080/29.97P Frame rate 1 to 48 1 to 50 1 to 60 When you have finished making settings, the system frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the frame rate with the MENU knob while viewing this display. Exchanging discs while recording (Disc Exchange Cache function) Even if you run out of free disc capacity while recording, you can continue recording by using the Disc Exchange Cache function. This function enables seamless recording over extended recording sessions, too long to fit on one disc, by recording to the unit’s internal memory while you exchange the disc. Notes • Disc Exchange Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states. - The Interval Rec function is enabled. - The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled. - The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode. - During Slow & Quick Motion shooting • The unit’s internal memory is not unlimited, so the video and audio may be interrupted if it takes too long to exchange the disc. Chapter 4 Shooting - Disc Exchange Cache function - Clip Continuous Rec function - Live Logging function When you enable Slow & Quick Motion, limitations apply to the values that can be selected for the following items. - Gain value: 0 to 12 dB only - Color bar signal: 100% only Timecode is recorded as R-RUN during Slow & Quick Motion shooting. Lower resolution in the vertical direction may be evident in video recorded at frame rates of 25P or higher (1080/23.98P), 26P or higher (1080/25P), and 31P or higher (1080/29.97P). Slow & Quick Motion can be used only with certain settings, including the recording format (MPEG HD422 50 Mbps) and the resolution and system frequency settings (1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/ 29.97P). Slow & Quick Motion is disabled automatically if you change any of these to other settings. To enable the Disc Exchange Cache function 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select DISC EXCHG CACHE, and turn the MENU knob to display “ON”. The TALLY (green tally) indicator lights in the viewfinder. To exchange discs with the function enabled When the disc exchange cache function is enabled, the following procedure allows you to exchange discs while continuing to record. Advanced Operations for Shooting 89 1 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording. The REC (recording, red tally) indicator lights in the viewfinder, and the tally indicator lights. 2 Press the EJECT button with the unit still in the recording state. The REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator flash (once per second), and the disc is ejected. If the message “DISC FULL!” appears You can continue recording, because video and audio continue to be saved to internal memory. Press the EJECT button and continue to step 3. Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function Normally, a clip is created as an independent file each time that you start and stop recording. But this function allows you to start and stop recording while continuously recording to the same clip, for as long as the function remains enabled. This is convenient when you do not want to generate a large number of short clips, and when you want to record without worrying about exceeding the clip limit (up to 300 clips). It is still easy to find recording start points, because a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the recording start point each time you start recording. 1 Note Chapter 4 Shooting Do not stop recording before pressing the EJECT button. If you stop recording, the unit will stop storing video and audio in internal memory and this function will not work. 3 Quickly remove the disc, insert a formatted blank disc, and close the cover. When the disc is loaded, the REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator change to lit, and recording continues. If the REC indicator and tally indicator begin flashing rapidly during the disc exchange If the indicators change to flashing twice per second, that means that the unit’s internal memory is almost full. Complete the disc exchange quickly. Notes • If you insert a disc that cannot be recorded (such as a full disc or one with the Write Inhibit tab of the disc set to the recording disabled position), the unit ejects that disc as soon as it is recognized. • Recording may not start immediately if you insert an unformatted disc, or a disc that already contains a large number of clips. As a result, the video and audio may be interrupted. 90 Advanced Operations for Shooting Display the REC FUNCTION page in the OPERATION menu. See “Basic menu operations” (page 193) for more information about menu operations. 2 Select CLIP CONT REC and turn the MENU knob until ON appears. “CONT” appears in the viewfinder, and the function is enabled. You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off function to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4/5 switches or the RET button on the lens. For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209). Note Clip Continuous Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states. • The Picture Cache function is enabled. • The Interval Rec function is enabled. • The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled. • The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode. • During Slow & Quick Motion shooting To stop the function When the function is enabled, you can stop it by executing any of the following operations. (A new clip will be created when you next start recording.) • Operate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip) • Establish a network connection • Eject the disc • Change the recording format • Power the unit off To disable the function Set CLIP CONT REC in the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu to OFF. Retaking the most recent clip A retake function is available, making it easy to erase and retake the most recently recorded clip. To use the retake function, you need to assign it to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches in advance. For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209). Example: After recording clip 3, you want to delete it and record a new clip 3 after clip 2. Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically About the automatic title generation function By default, clips on each disc are assigned names in the range C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF. For this reason, two discs can contain clips with the same names. The automatic title generation function allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on several discs, which facilitates clip management. For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles TITLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to C0017.MXF on disc 2. To retake the most recent clip Titles are made up of prefixes, up to 10 characters in length, and five-digit serial numbers such as TITLE 00001. With recording paused or after the end of a recording review (see page 78), proceed as follows. Chapter 4 Shooting New clip C0020.MXF 1 Hold down the button to which the retake function has been assigned. While the button is held down, the last frame of the recorded clip and the message “PUSH RET FOR CLIP DELETE” appears. 2 In this state, press the RET button. The message “DELETING LAST CLIP” appears, and the processing for deleting the last recorded clip begins. When the deleting has finished, the message “LAST CLIP WAS DELETED” appears. Notes • The retake function cannot be used when the Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled. • If an operation (other than recording review) which is not a retake operation is carried out after the last clip has been recorded, the retake function does not work even when the camcorder is in the recording pause state. In this case, the message “RE-TAKE NOT ALLOWED!” appears. When you want to replace the last clip with a new clip, delete the clip (see page 125). Once you carry out a retake operation, the last clip is deleted even if you do not carry out a recording operation afterwards. C0002.MXF C0001.MXF TITLE00020 TITLE00020 TITLE00001 Clips recorded on Disc 1 C0017.MXF C0002.MXF C0001.MXF TITLE00037 TITLE00022 TITLE00021 Clips recorded on Disc 2 Setting the title prefix You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list stored in internal memory, or by entering the prefix directly. However, to choose from a prefix list, you must create the list beforehand on a computer and Advanced Operations for Shooting 91 field and the serial number in the NUMERIC field. transfer it to the unit’s internal memory using a USB flash drive. Setting the initial value of the serial number The initial value of the serial number can be set to 00001 (the default) or to any other number. The number is automatically incremented by 1 each time you record a clip. When it reaches 99999, it returns to 00001 for the next clip. Note Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the serial number setting, for example if you reset the serial number to the original value after recording several clips. Care should be taken when setting the serial number. To assign user-defined titles automatically when clips are recorded Chapter 4 Shooting (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu. 030 CLIP TITLE TITLE TOP : DSABL To create a list of title prefix strings Prepare the data beforehand according to the following rules. File name Assign the name “TITLES.TXT” to the file. Input format Enter title prefixes one at time, separated by newline (CRLF) characters. Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long. A prefix file can contain up to 20 prefixes. Allowable characters • Digits: 0 to 9 • Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z • The following symbols: !, #, $, %, &, ', ( , ), ~, =, -, ^, @, [, ], {, }, +, ; (semicolon), , (comma), . (period), _ (underscore) • Space Title prefix list example Tennis<CRLF> Basketball<CRLF> Skiing_1<CRLF> Skiing_2<CRLF> To transfer a title prefix list to the internal memory of the camcorder For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select “TITLE” and then press the MENU knob. 3 Turn the MENU knob to display “ENABL” and then press the MENU knob. 030 CLIP TITLE TITLE : SELECT PREFIX : CLEAR NUMERIC : LOAD PREFIX DATA: PREFIX : TITLE NUMERIC : 00001 1 ENABL EXEC EXEC EXEC Advanced Operations for Shooting Create the following directory on the USB flash drive and copy the title prefix file (TITLES.txt) into it. \\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\GENERAL\VA L_LIST 2 Connect a USB flash drive with the title prefix file (TITLES.TXT) to the USB connector of the camcorder. 3 On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu (see page 161), select “LOAD PREFIX DATA” and then press the MENU knob. TOP Clip titles will be generated automatically if you record in this state. The title of the next clip to be recorded will be a combination of the prefix in the PREFIX 92 (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) “USB MEMORY ACCESS” appears, and the file on the USB flash drive (TITLES.TXT) is transferred to the internal memory of the unit. The message “COMPLETE!” appears when the transfer finishes. 030 CLIP TITLE Note The message “FILE NOT FOUND!” appears if no list of title prefixes is found. Check the location where the file is stored on the USB flash drive. To select a prefix from the title prefix list (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu. Move x onto the character you want to change, and then press the MENU knob. 4 Turn the MENU knob to move x onto the desired character in the list of selectable characters, and then press the MENU knob. Select “SELECT PREFIX” and then press the MENU knob. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining characters. 6 When you have finished entering the prefix, turn the MENU knob to move x to “END” and then press the MENU knob. A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears. P00 TITLE PREFIX 001: 002: 003: 004: 005: 006: 007: 008: 009: 010: ESC Tennis Basketball Skiing_1 Skiing_2 Athletics Aquatics Cycling Softball Fencing Sailing Note When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to the internal memory of this unit, only the initial value “TITLE” appears. 3 Select the desired title prefix from the list, and then press the MENU knob. The CLIP TITLE page appears again, and the selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field. The camcorder exits prefix input mode, and the original CLIP TITLE page appears. To set the initial value of the clip title serial number You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number to 00001 (default) or to any 5-digit value. To return the initial value to 00001 (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 1 2 2 Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). Select “PREFIX” and then press the MENU knob. Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). To enter a title prefix directly (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) Chapter 4 Shooting 3 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 TOP TITLE : ENABL SELECT PREFIX : EXEC CLEAR NUMERIC : EXEC LOAD PREFIX DATA: EXEC PREFIX : TITLE !#$%&'()+,-.0123456789; =@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz{}~ INS DEL RET ESC END Select “CLEAR NUMERIC”and then press the MENU knob. The message “CLEAR OK? bYES NO” appears. 3 Select “YES” and then press the MENU knob. The value in the NUMERIC field returns to 00001. A prefix string appears. Advanced Operations for Shooting 93 To set the initial value to any number (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select “NUMERIC” and then press the MENU knob. 3 Move x onto the digit you want to change, and then press the MENU knob. Chapter 4 Shooting 4 Turn the MENU knob to move x onto the desired digit in the list of selectable digits, and then press the MENU knob. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining digits. 6 When you have finished entering the value, turn the MENU knob to move x to “END” and then press the MENU knob. The camcorder exits numeric input mode, and the original CLIP TITLE page appears. To check clip titles Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose title you want to check. The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen. See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107) for more information about the thumbnail screen. Notes • It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value. Even if you enter 00000, the value is reset to 00001 when the camcorder exits numeric input mode. • The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every time a title is generated. When the value reaches 99999, the next number restarts from 00001. • Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the serial number after recording several clips or the same is true depending on the value setting. Care should be taken when setting the serial number. Assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists The following standard format names are assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or recorded by XDCAM devices. Clips: C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF Clip lists: E0001E01.SMI to E0099E01.SMI When you record or create clips and clip lists, you can assign user-defined names instead of the standard format names. Assigning meaningful names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file management. Limitations • Letters, numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 character set can be used. However, the following control characters and symbols cannot be used. - Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F - Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, | • Depending on the character type, the length of name (“C*” part) may be limited to 14 characters. (The limit for ASCII characters is 56 characters.) • All file name extensions are converted automatically to uppercase. • Titles are used as user-defined clip names on this unit. Therefore, the available characters are limited to those supported by the title function. • Files generated along with clips and clip lists are assigned the same names (the “C*” or “E*” part of the following file names). - Clips: Metadata files (C*M01.XML), user metadata files (C*M02.KLV), proxy AV data files (C*S01.MXF) - Clip lists: Metadata files (E*M01.XML) • The following names cannot be assigned. - Clips: C0000.MXF - Clip lists: E0000E01.SMI, E0100E01.SMI to E9999E01.SMI, E0000.SMI, E0100.SMI to E9999.SMI • The following names should be avoided. - Clips: C5000.MXF to C9999.MXF - Clip lists: E0001.SMI to E0099.SMI To assign clip names on this unit The title assigned to a clip is also used as the name of that clip (or the file name). 94 Advanced Operations for Shooting C0001.MXF 5 Turn the MENU knob to select “AUTO NAMING” and then press the MENU knob. 6 Turn the MENU knob to display “TITLE” and then press the MENU knob. The same name will now be given to newly recorded clips. TITLE00001 When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “C****” TITLE00001.MXF When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to “TITLE” To use clip names and clip list names via FTP Carry out steps 2 to 4 of “To assign clip names on this unit” (page 94). It is possible to write, transfer, and rename clips and clip lists with user-defined names over FTP connections (see page 233). (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Before starting, set TITLE on the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL and set a title (see page 92). For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Display the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu. 3 Select NAMING FORM and then press the MENU knob. 4 Turn the MENU knob to display “FREE” and then press the MENU knob. You can now enter a user-defined name. 031 FILE NAMING NAMING FORM: AUTO NAMING: TOP FREE C**** Chapter 4 Shooting TITLE00001 Notes • An FTP client software that supports UTF-8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters. Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF-8. • When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period (.), the clip name is the title string minus the first letter. Fuji.MXF User-defined clip names can be used via FTP Sakura.SMI User-defined clip list names can be used via FTP To check clip names Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose name you want to check. The name of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen. See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107) for more information. Advanced Operations for Shooting 95 Note The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed according to the following order of priority. Title > user-defined clip name > standard format clip name Therefore, the display of this item changes as follows, depending on whether or not there is a title. • When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit, the title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit. • The user-defined name or standard format name is displayed for clips without a title. To check clip information (name, title, etc.) For details, see “Checking clip properties” (page 121). Chapter 4 Shooting Using planning metadata Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded. To use planning metadata, you need to load a planning metadata file into the unit’s memory before starting to shoot. There are three ways to load files. • Automatically load a file that has been written to the following directory on a Professional Disc via an FTP connection. If you do not want to load a file automatically, add a “load” property to the PlanningMetadata tag and set the value of the property to “false”, as shown in the shaded part of the following example. Example: <PlanningMetadata …sp load="false" spversion="1.00"> • Use a GUI screen to load a file that has been written to the following directories on a Professional Disc or a USB flash drive (see page 134). • Use a web browser to load a planning metadata file (see page 138). File creation rules File location Professional Disc: General/Sony/ Planning File name • Format that can be used in the General directory (see page 232) • Extension: XML directory a) • ASCII characters (up to USB Flash drive: 63 characters including General/Sony/ Planning directory the extension) • Extension: XML 96 Advanced Operations for Shooting a) The General/Sony/Planning directory is generated automatically when you format a disc. Note Do not save more than 100 planning metadata files in the above save locations. The unit may fail to load the files correctly if more than 100 are saved. For greater convenience in planning metadata operations, you can use the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor and the supplied Sony Planning Metadata Add-in application software. For details, refer to the operation manual of the CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor. To set clip names by using planning metadata The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file. • The ASCII format name that appears in the viewfinder 1) • The UTF-8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name 2) 1) It is also possible to display the UTF-8 format name, or no name (see page 135). 2) When no UTF-8 format name string is specified, the ASCII format name string is registered as the actual clip name. Clip name string format In a text editor, modify the two fields in the <Title> tag that contain the clip name strings (the shaded fields in the example in the next section “Clip name string example”). Enter a name in the first field in ASCII format (up to 50 characters), and enter another name in the second field in UTF-8 format (up to 50 bytes). Clip name string example <?xmlspversion= "1.0"spencoding="UTF-8"?>3 <PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata"spassignId=" P0001"spcreationDate=" 2008-01-20T17:00:00+09:00"splastUpdate=" 2008-03-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp version="1.00">3 <PropertiessppropertyId=" assignment"spupdate="2008-01-20T09:00: 00+09:00"spmodifiedBy="Chris">3 <TitlespusAscii=" Typhoon "spxml:lang ="en"> Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo </ Title>3 </Properties>3 </PlanningMetadata>3 In the above example, sp indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage return. Notes • When you create a file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified. • If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 50 bytes, the ASCII format string is used as the clip name string. If no ASCII format name is specified, the standard format clip name is used. When an ASCII format name string exceeds 50 characters, and when an UTF-8 format name string exceeds 50 bytes, the standard format clip name is used. Setting clip names Load a planning metadata file containing clip names into the unit’s memory (see page 134 and page 138). 2 Carry out steps 2 to 5 of “To assign clip names on this unit” (page 94). 3 Turn the MENU knob to display “PLAN”, and then press the MENU knob. Each time that you start recording, the unit automatically creates clip names using the names specified in the planning metadata file. An underscore (_) and a five-digit serial number (00001 to 99999) is appended to each clip name. Examples of automatically generated clip names • Clip names displayed in the viewfinder: Typhoon_00001, Typhoon_00002, ... 1) • The actually recorded clip names: Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001, Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002, ... 1) When display of the ASCII format clip name has been selected (see page 135). Notes • The serial numbers return to 00001 on the next recording operation if you reach number 99999. • Serial numbers are not reset when you power the unit off or exchange discs (newly generated numbers are continuous on the old ones). • If the ASCII format clip name string is longer than 14 characters, it is displayed in the To specify user disc IDs by using planning metadata You can use planning metadata to define user disc IDs which are saved in metadata files on XDCAM discs. To define a user disc ID, specify it as an ASCII or UTF-8 format disc name string in the planning metadata. Notes • A user disc ID is set only after the recording is finished. • User disc IDs cannot be set to the disc where another user disc ID is already set. Use one of the following to change the user disc ID, or delete it before starting the operation described below. - Software keyboard screen (see page 133) - One of the software applications Disc name string format Use a text editor to enter an ASCII string (up to 127 characters) or a UTF-8 string (up to about 42 multibyte characters) in the shaded part of the example in the next section, “Example of disc name specification”. Chapter 4 Shooting 1 viewfinder as the first 7 characters + x (abbreviated) + the last 5 characters, for a total of 13 characters. You can change the serial numbers by using Planning Clip Name Suffix in the Disc Menu (see page 112). Example of disc name specification <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="UTF-8"?>3 <PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata"spassignId="H00123"sp creationDate="2009-09-10T08:00:00-05:00"sp lastUpdate="2009-09-10T13:43:52-05:00"sp version="1.00">3 <Properties propertyId="assignment"sp class="original"spupdate=" 2009-09-10T15:00:00-05:00"sp modifiedBy="Chris">3 <Title usAscii="Football Game"sp xml:lang="ja">Football Game 10/09/ 2009</Title>3 <Meta name="MediaName"sp content=" FootBall "/>3 </Properties>3 </PlanningMetadata>3 In this example, sp indicates a space and 3 indicates a newline. Advanced Operations for Shooting 97 You can check user-specified disc name strings in the Disc Properties screen (see page 133), where they appear as the user disc ID. Note When you create a planning metadata file, enter the specification as a single statement with newlines at the indicated newline positions only and spaces at the indicated space positions only (except for spaces in the disc name string). To set essence mark names by using planning metadata Chapter 4 Shooting You can use planning metadata to specify userdefined names for the Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark 9 essence marks that correspond to the 0 to 9 keys on a USB keyboard. When planning metadata that contains user-defined essence mark name strings is loaded into this unit’s memory, the unit displays those names for the essence marks that correspond to the keys and that are recorded when the keys are pressed. See page 82 for more information about recording essence marks, and see page 96 for more information about how to load files. Essence mark name string format Use a text editor to enter essence mark names in the sections indicated by shading in “Essence mark name string example”. Names can be either in ASCII format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 characters). <Meta name="_ShotMark2"spcontent= " Shoot "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark3"spcontent= " Corner Kick "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark4"spcontent= " Free Kick "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark5"spcontent= " Goal Kick "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark6"spcontent= " Foul "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark7"spcontent= " PK "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark8"spcontent= " 1st Half "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark9"spcontent= " 2nd Half "/>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark0"spcontent= " Kick Off "/>3 </Properties>3 </PlanningMetadata>3 In the above example, sp indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage return. You can check user-defined essence mark name strings in the User Defined Essence Marks screen (see page 136). Note When you create a definition file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified, except within essence mark name strings. Note If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, the maximum length of that string is 16 characters. Essence mark name string example <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding= "UTF-8"?>3 <PlanningMetadata xmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/planningmetadata "spassignId="H00123"spcreationDate= "2009-04-15T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate= "2009-04-15T15:00:00Z"spversion="1.00">3 <Properties propertyId="assignment"sp class="original"spupdate= "2009-04-15T15:00:00Z"spmodifiedBy= "Chris">3 <Title usAscii="Football Game"spxml:lang="en">Football Game 15/04/2009</Title>3 <Meta name="_ShotMark1"spcontent= " Goal "/>3 98 Advanced Operations for Shooting Recording video from external devices You can select between recording of data shot by the camera and recording of data input from an external device by using a menu or by using the ASSIGN 2 switch. Notes • If you want to use the ASSIGN 2 switch, you must assign the video switching function to the ASSIGN 2 switch beforehand (see page 209). • Switching by the ASSIGN 2 switch takes priority over switching by the menu. (Switching by menu is not possible if the function has been assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch.) • Video breakup may occur around the switch if you switch the input during recording. • Camera video is recorded if you switch to external input without inputting an external video signal to the SDI IN (OPTION) connector or the GENLOCK IN connector. • It is not possible to record external input video with a changed aspect ratio. To record SDI signals You can record HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals input to the SDI IN connector. When an HD recording format (MPEG HD422 50, or MPEG HD420 HQ/ SP) is selected, SD-SDI signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording. Notes 1 Display the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu. You can record analog composite signals input to the GENLOCK IN connector. When an HD recording format (MPEG HD422 50, or MPEG HD420 HQ/SP) is selected, analog composite signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording. Note Even if the GENLOCK item on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to OFF, the unit automatically genlocks to external video signals that are input to the GENLOCK IN connector. When GENLOCK is set to OFF, the genlock is cancelled when the input of external video signals stops and the unit switches to camera shooting. 1 Display the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu. 2 Select REC VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to display “EXT”. 3 Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to display “VBS”. Chapter 4 Shooting • It is not possible to record HD-SDI signals when an SD recording format (MPEG IMX 50/40/30, or DVCAM) is selected. • The system frequency and resolution (HD-SDI input only) of input signals must match the current settings of this unit. Otherwise the input signals cannot be recorded. • Only audio signals embedded in SDI signals are recorded, regardless of the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches. Recording analog composite signals After you complete this setting, you can record external video signals by inputting analog composite signals to the GENLOCK IN connector. Using the Live Logging function For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select REC VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to display “EXT”. 3 Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired signal to be recorded. As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: HDSDI 1) y SDSDI y VBS. 1) HDSDI cannot be selected when an SD recording format is selected. After you complete this setting, you can record the video signals of external devices by inputting the HD SDI signals selected in step 3 to the SDI IN connector. The Live Logging function allows you to transfer proxy AV data to a computer as you are shooting, or to send and receive metadata between this unit and a computer. On this unit, you can transfer data via Ethernet or a wireless LAN. 1) This function allows you to do the following on your computer. • View proxy AV data • Add and edit metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, and so on) • Create clip lists After adding or editing metadata, or creating a clip list, you can transfer the metadata or clip list from the computer back to this unit for recording on the original disc. Advanced Operations for Shooting 99 1) To make wireless LAN connections, you must install the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor or the optional CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor. See page 213 for more information about wireless LAN settings. There are two Live Logging operating modes: Live mode and Live View mode. The following table lists the main functions provided by each operating mode. Operating mode Live Live View Main functions as seen from this unit Chapter 4 Shooting • Send clip metadata • Write edited clip metadata back to disc • Receive planning metadata • Receive clip lists • Same functions as above • Send proxy AV data Notes • In Live View mode, it is not possible to set time data by setting the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set time data, first switch from Live View mode to another operating mode. • Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, time data advances in F-RUN mode while the unit is operating in Live View mode. • In Live View mode, it is not possible to set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN and record timecode that is continuous with timecode read from the disc. To record with the Live Logging function enabled On the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu, set LIVE LOGGING to one of the following. LIVE: Live mode VIEW: Live view mode Notes • It is not possible to enable the Live Logging function while this unit is in the following states. - The proxy data recording function is enabled. - During Slow & Quick Motion shooting • It is not possible to set the Live Logging function to Live View mode while this unit is in the following states. - The Picture Cache function is enabled. - The Interval Rec function is enabled. - The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled. - The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled. 100 Advanced Operations for Shooting • The Live Logging function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the proxy data recording function. Recording proxy data You can connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector and use it to save proxy data. (Here, “proxy data” refers to proxy AV data for the clips on the disc as well as to metadata.) 1) You can then connect this USB flash drive to a computer to view the recorded proxy AV data, to edit and enter metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, and so on), and to create clip lists. 1) When recording of proxy data finishes, the planning metadata that has been loaded into this unit (if any) is also copied to the USB flash drive. The data is saved in the following directories, which are created automatically when a USB flash drive is mounted. • Proxy AV data: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\ MEMDISC\PROAVID\Sub • Metadata: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC\ PROAVID\Clip • Planning metadata: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\ MEMDISC\PROAVID\General\Sony\Planning Notes • USB flash drives must be formatted with the FAT32 file system. If a drive is formatted with any other file system, reformat it on this unit (see page 102). • Never remove a USB flash drive or disconnect the battery pack or power cord while it is being accessed (while this unit’s ACCESS indicator is lit). Doing so can corrupt the data on the USB flash drive and make it unusable. To enable proxy data recording and copying to USB flash drives Before starting, set ETHERNET/USB in the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL”. 1 In the OPERATION menu, display the MEMORY REC page. See “Basic menu operations” (page 193) for more information about menu operations. 2 Select MEMORY REC, and turn the MENU knob until ENABL appears. 032 MEMORY REC MEMORY REC TOP : ENABL COPY CURRENT CLP : COPY ALL CLIPS : ABORT COPY : EXEC EXEC EXEC DEL ALL MEM CLP FORMAT MEMORY EXEC EXEC : : • • This enables proxy data recording and copying from discs to USB flash drives. Notes • It is not possible to make proxy data recording settings while this unit is in the following states. - Wireless LAN connections are enabled. • The Live Logging function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the proxy data recording function. 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector. 2 Check the memory symbol and the memory remaining display (see page 30). 3 After confirming that the USB flash drive has enough free capacity, press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording as normal. 1) • • The clip’s proxy data is written to the USB flash drive at the same time that the clip is recorded to the disc. 1) After the unit is powered on. some time is required for the memory symbol to appear. However, if the connected USB flash drive has enough free memory and recording is enabled, then recording of proxy data to the USB flash drive begins as soon as recording starts, even if the memory symbol has not yet appeared. The proxy data is the same data as the proxy data for clips that are recorded to the disc. Notes • If you start recording immediately after powering the unit on, and then stop recording after only a short time, the recording operation does not end until the unit has recognized the USB flash drive and recorded the proxy data to it. Note that if you enable this function and start recording without connecting a USB flash drive, • Chapter 4 Shooting To record proxy data while synchronizing with disc recording • recording will take longer because the unit will require more time to recognize that no flash drive is connected. The message “USB MEMORY INHIBIT!” or “USB M. INHI” appears if you connect and attempt to access a write protected USB flash drive, In this case, remove the USB flash drive, set it to enable recording, and connect it again. The message “MEM REC NG!” appears if you start recording without a USB flash drive connected. After recording stops, connect a USB flash drive, refer to “To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”, and copy the proxy data that could not be written to the USB flash drive during recording. It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash drive while the Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled. If you attempt to do so, the message “MEM REC NG!” appears and the data is not recorded. To record the proxy data, stop recording and copy the data to the USB flash drive as explained below in “To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”, and then resume shooting. Never disconnect the battery pack or power cord while recording to a USB flash drive (while the ACCESS indicator of this unit is lit). If you do so, recording processing will not end normally, and the clip proxy data that was recorded to the USB flash drive before the interruption will be lost. The message “MEM REC NG!” appears if the USB flash drive runs out of memory during recording (while the ACCESS indicator of this unit is lit), and the clip proxy data that was being recorded immediately before the message appeared is lost. If this occurs, exchange the USB flash drive, refer to “To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”, and copy the proxy data that could not be recorded. It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash drive only. To stop recording Recording to a USB flash drive stops whenever recording to the disc stops. To stop recording to the USB flash drive only, set MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu to “DSABL”. To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive Proceed as follows to select an already recorded clip on a disc and copy its proxy data to a USB flash drive. Note The following functions stop during execution of a copy. • Playback cue up • Picture Cache recording Advanced Operations for Shooting 101 1 2 Search for the video of the clip (being played or stopped) that you want to copy. Select COPY CURRENT CLP in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu, and then press the MENU knob. The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears. 3 To cancel a copy to a USB flash drive 1 Select “YES”, and then press the MENU knob. Chapter 4 Shooting During the execution of the copy, the message “MEMORY ACCESS **%” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor, where “**” is replaced with a number (0 to 99) that indicates the percentage completed. When processing finishes, the message “COMPLETE!” appears. The proxy data of the current clip (the currently stopped clip, or the one that being played) is copied to the USB flash drive. To copy the proxy data of all clips on a disc to a USB flash drive Proceed as follows to copy the proxy data of all clips on a disc to a USB flash drive. Note The following functions stop during execution of a copy. • Playback cue up • Picture Cache recording 1 Note The message “M. Shortage” appears when the mount of data to be copied exceed the free capacity of the USB flash drive. The copy is not executed. Exchange the USB flash drive for one with enough free capacity. Select COPY ALL CLIPS in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu, and then press the MENU knob. The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears. 2 To delete recorded proxy data To delete data recorded on the disc at the same time that you delete proxy data from a USB flash drive, execute the DELETE CLIP command in the Thumbnail menu (see page 125). To delete proxy data from the USB flash drive only, proceed as follows. 1 102 Advanced Operations for Shooting Select DELE ALL MEM CLP in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu, and then press the MENU knob. The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears. 2 Select “YES”, and then press the MENU knob. During the execution of the deletion, the message “MEMORY ACCESS” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor. When processing finishes, the message “COMPLETE” appears. All of the proxy data in the USB flash drive is deleted. Select “YES”, and then press the MENU knob. During the execution of the copy, the message “MEMORY ACCESS **%” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor, where “**” is replaced with a number (0 to 99) that indicates the percentage completed. When processing finishes, the message “COMPLETE!” appears. The proxy data of all clips on the disc is copied to the USB flash drive. Select “YES”, and then press the MENU knob. The message “ABORTING” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor while the unit is aborting the copy operation. The message “ABORT” appears when the abort processing is completed. The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears. 2 Select ABORT COPY in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu, and then press the MENU knob. To format a USB flash drive Proceed as follows to format a USB flash drive with the FAT32 file system. 1 Select FORMAT MEMORY in the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu, and then press the MENU knob. The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears. 2 Positioning status Positioning Select “YES”, and then press the MENU knob. During the execution of the format, the message “MEMORY ACCESS” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor. When processing finishes, the message “COMPLETE” appears. All of the data in the USB flash drive is deleted. Obtaining GPS location information Set GPS to “ON” on the GPS SETUP page of the OPERATION menu of the camcorder. is displayed in the top right of the viewfinder to indicate that the unit is attempting to obtain location information. When the position is established, location information is recorded when shooting video. Icons displayed on the screen The icon displayed on the screen changes as follows depending on the state of the signals received from GPS satellites. Positioning status Off Positioning not available Searching for satellites Positioning Display GPS receive state No display GPS SETTING is set to “OFF” or an error has occurred. A GPS signal cannot be received, preventing location information from being obtained. Move to a location with a clear view of the sky. Searching for GPS satellites. Several minutes may be required in order to fix the position. A weak GPS signal is being received. GPS receive state A GPS signal is being received, and location information is available. A strong GPS signal is being received, and location information is available. Notes • If a positioning icon is not displayed after several minutes, there may be a problem with signal reception. You can continue shooting or move to an area with a clear view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning icon is not displayed means that location information will not be recorded. • The GPS signal may not be received when indoors or near tall structures. Move to a location with a clear view of the sky. • The recording of GPS information may be interrupted, depending on the strength of the received signal, even if a positioning icon is displayed. To display the state of GPS data reception in the viewfinder Set DISP GPS to ON on the VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu to display the GPS data reception status at all times in the viewfinder. Chapter 4 Shooting To record location information Positioning Display Verifying the GPS location When recording or playing video with GPS data, you can check the location on the GPS INFORMATION screen in the viewfinder. To display the GPS INFORMATION screen in the viewfinder 1 Set STATUS GPS to ON on the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu. 2 Push the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch on the camcorder to the ON/SEL position. The displayed screen changes each time the switch is pushed. Push the switch until the GPS INFORMATION screen appears. The GPS INFORMATION screen, below, is displayed for a few seconds. Advanced Operations for Shooting 103 GPS INFORMATION LATITUDE : N 35 40 '12.36 LONGITUDE: E135 25 '13.31 ALTITUDE : +0123m CALC: 13-03-31T12:45:35Z REAL: 13-03-31T12:45:36Z TIME ZONE +9:00 GPSxxx DOP:02 Displayed items Chapter 4 Shooting Item LATITUDE Description LONGITUDE Longitude a) ALTITUDE Altitude a) CALC Calculated date and time b) REAL Current date and time c) Time zone offset from UTC TIME ZONE Latitude a) a) When recording, the current latitude, longitude, and altitude are displayed. During playback, recorded information is displayed. b) The calculated date and time displays the time obtained using positioning data received from three or more GPS satellites. After positioning is established, the display stops when positioning is subsequently lost. The time is displayed when positioning is reestablished. While positioning is established, the time displayed is always the same as the current date and time. During playback, the calculated time is not displayed. c) The current date and time displays the time obtained from one or more GPS satellites. It matches the GPS satellite clock. When no GPS satellites are available, it displays the time using a crystal-operated clock within the module. During playback, the calculated date and time recorded on the disc is displayed. When shooting without available GPS data, [---------] is displayed. Problems when using GPS GPS signals cannot be received The signals from GPS satellites may not be received due to interference caused by obstructions. In this case, move to a location with a clear view of the sky. For details about locations that may obstruct the signal, see page 272. 104 Advanced Operations for Shooting Calculated location appears incorrect An error of up to a few hundred meters (yards) may occur if the received GPS signal is reflected off nearby structures or if the signal is very weak. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Overview You can perform scene searches, play the searched scenes, and select scenes (edit clip list) in Graphical User Interface (GUI) screens. The GUI screens are your gateways to discs and the data saved on discs. (The GUI screens can display European languages, Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese, and Traditional Chinese for clip names and titles.) Switching between GUI screens Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens The most important GUI screens are: Clip thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails of clips on the disc. “Clip” is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen (see page 106). Clip list thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails of sub clips in a clip list. “Clip List” is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen (see page 106). There are also two playback screens: Clip playback screen: Playback screen for normal video Clip list playback screen: Playback screen for clip list video You will use the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button 1 and the SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button 2 to switch between these four screens. Each press of these buttons switches between the screens as shown in the following figure. The THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP indicators light as follows, according to the type of screen that is currently displayed. Note To switch between these four screens, a disc with recorded clips must be loaded in the unit. Overview 105 Clip playback screen a) Clip thumbnail screen Clip:C0006 1 1 TC 00:23:00:25 TC 00:23:40:07 TC 00:24:45:11 TC 00:25:06:14 TC 00:25:49:23 TC 00:26:22:10 TC 00:27:19:04 TC 00:27:51:09 TC 00:28:22:02 TC 00:23:34:18 TC 00:23:54:22 TC 00:28:06:09 DATE&TIME Unlit 006/040 30 NOV 2005 13:38 DUR 0:00:10:23 Lit THUMBNAIL THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Unlit ESSENCE MARK Unlit SUB CLIP DISC MENU 2 DISC MENU 2 2 Clip list playback screen a), b) Clip list thumbnail screen b) Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens 1 1 THUMBNAIL 002/013 TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:04:14 TC 00:00:12:04 TC 00:00:20:13 TC 00:00:28:08 TC 00:00:35:15 TC 00:00:46:08 TC 00:00:53:22 TC 00:00:59:16 TC 00:01:06:18 TC 00:01:13:11 DATE&TIME 28 JUL 2006 19:55 Lit ESSENCE MARK Lit SUB CLIP DISC MENU a) The playback screens appear when the LCD monitor is switched to display of video with (CHAR) or without (MONI) superimposed text. Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to these modes (see page 18). b) The clip list playback screen appears when a clip list is loaded into the unit’s memory (see page 132). The other thumbnail screens are: • Expand thumbnail screen • Chapter thumbnail screen • Essence mark thumbnail screen 106 2 Clip List:E0001 Unlit Overview SUB CLIP TOTAL DUR TC 00:01:17:27 00:01:31:16 THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Lit SUB CLIP DISC MENU Information and controls in thumbnail screens About the display of clip and clip list names You can specify that titles should appear instead of names in the clip name areas of thumbnail screens. You can also change the display language. To specify that titles (see page 94), if they exist, should be displayed with higher priority than names, select one of the following under Settings >Display Title in the Disc Menu. On: Title1 "title1": Display in the order title1, title2, clip or clip list name. On: Title2 {title2}: Display in the order title2, title1, clip or clip list name. To change the display language according to the area of use (see page 38), select the desired language under Settings >Select Font in the Disc Menu. Displays the name or a title of the selected clip (see page 107). b Selection frame Indicates that the thumbnail is selected. To select another thumbnail, move the frame (see page 115). Multiple selection frames appear when multiple thumbnails are selected (see page 114). Select Font Displayable setting languages – English/Japanese c Clip number/total number of clips European Alphabet Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese d Scrollbar English/European languages English/Korean English/Simplified Chinese English/Traditional Chinese Clip thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the disc in the order that they were recorded. You can use this screen to work with clips – deleting or locking them, selecting their index pictures, adding them to clip lists, and so on. Displays the total number of clips on the disc, and the number of the selected clip. When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed in the thumbnail display area, the position of the slider shows the relative position of the currently displayed clips, and the length of the slider shows the relative length of currently displayed clips within all of the clips. When you have a large number of thumbnails, you can save time by using the Skip Scroll function to jump directly to the thumbnail you want (see page 115). Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Area of use setting NTSC(J)AREA (Japan) NTSC AREA (NTSC area other than Japan) or PAL AREA a Clip name e Recording format The recording format of the selected clip is displayed as a combination of the following information. • Video format logo • Number of system lines • Recording quality • Number of audio channels f Clip date and time Displays the date and time when the selected clip was shot and recorded. Overview 107 g Duration Displays the duration (recording time) of the selected clip. When multiple clips are selected, displays the total recording time of the selected clips. 1 Thumbnail display items 1 2 selection is the timecode of the first frame or the timecode of the thumbnail frame. f Lock icon This icon appears when the clip is locked (protected) (see page 124). Clips cannot be deleted and their clip information cannot be changed when this mark is displayed. 3 Clip list thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the current clip list. You can use this screen to create and edit clips lists. OK TC 00:26:22:10 4 5 2 1 6 3 4 Clip List:E0001 002/013 TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:04:14 TC 00:00:12:04 TC 00:00:20:13 TC 00:00:28:08 TC 00:00:35:15 TC 00:00:46:08 TC 00:00:53:22 TC 00:00:59:16 TC 00:01:06:18 TC 00:01:13:11 a Index picture Displays an image to stand for the content of the clip. The index picture is normally the first frame of the clip. 28 JUL 2006 19:55 Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens This mark, like the folded-over corner of a page that you want to remember, appears when the index picture has been changed to any frame other than the first frame of a clip (see page 120). Note When you cue up a clip, the unit always cues up the first frame, even when the index picture has been changed to a different frame. TC 00:01:17:27 TOTAL DUR 5 b Index picture changed mark 00:01:31:16 6 a Clip list name Displays the name or a title of the clip list (see page 107). b Selection frame See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). c S mark c Sub clip number/number of sub clips This mark appears when shot marks or other essence marks have been set in the clip (see page 82). The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed for clips that show this mark (see page 109). Displays the total number of sub clips in the clip list, and the number of the selected sub clip. d Clip flag icon Displays the corresponding icon when a clip flag (OK/NG/KP (KEEP)) is set in the clip (see page 124). e Clip and frame information Displays the clip or frame information selected with the Clip Information item in the Thumbnail Menu (see page 120). The factory default 108 DATE&TIME Overview d Scrollbar See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). e Clip list date and time Displays the date and time when the clip list was created, or the date and time of its most recent modification. An asterisk (*) appears after the date and time of creation when the current clip list has not been saved to the disc. e Clip name Notes • “New File” appears when no clip list has been loaded into the unit’s memory, and when a clip list has been cleared from the unit’s memory. • A mark appears before the date of creation or modification when a disc is write inhibited. You can create clip lists when the disc is write inhibited, but you cannot save them. Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the clip list. Expand thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized divisions of the selected clip. 2 3 4 Expand Clip 008/024 x 12 001/012 TC 00:01:38:00 TC 00:01:36:14 TC 00:01:36:27 TC 00:01:37:11 TC 00:01:37:24 TC 00:01:38:08 TC 00:01:38:22 TC 00:01:38:19 TC 00:01:40:02 TC 00:01:40:16 CLIP Tene 5 Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to the next one. DUR Chapters are the sections between the shot marks, Rec Start marks, and other essence marks that have been recorded in clips. This screen allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in the selected clip. Note Shot marks can be set by the user during recording and playback. They can be deleted and moved. Essence marks other than shot marks are set automatically. They cannot be deleted or moved. 1 2 3 4 5 Chapter of Clip 001/024 TC 00:23:00:25 TC 00:23:02:00 001/004 TC 00:23:04:00 0:00:00:13 6 a Selection frame See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). b Clip number/total clips x number of divisions Displays the number of the selected clip, the total number of clips on the disc, and the number of times that the selected clip has been divided to display the expansion thumbnails. c Thumbnail number/total thumbnails Displays the total number of expanded thumbnails and the number of the selected thumbnail. d Scrollbar See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). CLIP C0001 DUR 6 0:00:01:05 7 a Selection frame See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens TC 00:01:35:17 TC 00:01:39:06 f Duration Chapter thumbnail screen f Total duration 1 Displays the name or a title of the expanded clip (see page 107). b Clip number/total clips Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the clip that contains the displayed chapters. If the essence mark name is a user-defined name, it is displayed between quotation marks, for example as [Chapter: “Touch Down”] (see page 136). c S1/S2/RS marks The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1, Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence marks are set. Overview 109 d Chapter number/total chapters Displays the total number of chapters and the number of the selected chapter. Note Note The total number of essence marks is the total number of essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc. d Scrollbar The total number of chapters is the total number of chapters in the specified clip only. e Scrollbar See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). f Clip name Displays the name or a title of the clip whose chapter is displayed (see page 107). g Duration Displays the time from the first frame of the selected chapter to the first frame of the next chapter. Essence mark thumbnail screen Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens This screen displays thumbnails of the specified essence mark, found by searching all clips on the disc. 1 2 3 4 Shot Mark1 001/029 TC 00:23:02:00 TC 00:24:45:25 TC 00:25:07:01 TC 00:25:40:24 TC 00:26:22:11 TC 00:27:19:25 TC 00:27:51:25 TC 00:28:06:17 TC 00:28:35:00 TC 00:28:55:02 TC 00:29:10:05 TC 00:29:20:03 See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). e Clip date and time Displays the date and time when the clip that contains the selected thumbnail was recorded or last modified. f Clip name Displays the name or a title of the clip that contains the selected frame (see page 107). Displaying menus Thumbnail Menu The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that are valid for the currently displayed thumbnail screen. To display the Thumbnail Menu To display the Thumbnail Menu, press the MENU button with a thumbnail screen displayed. To return to the original screen, press the MENU button again, or press the RESET/RETURN button. 2 RESET/RETURN button 1 MENU button 30 NOV 2006 19:55 "Capping literally years of spe..." DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT LEVEL EXPAND 5 6 CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT THUMBNAIL MENU 0 10 0 10 CH-3 ESSENCE MARK a Essence mark name F-RUN SET R-RUN SET b Selection frame See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 107). c Essence mark number/total essence marks Displays the total number of essence marks and the number of the selected essence mark. 110 Overview MANUAL AUDIO SELECT SUB CLIP S.SEL CH-1 PRESET Displays the name of the essence mark (Shot Mark1 here). If the shot mark name has been defined by the user, it is enclosed in quotation marks (" ") in the display (see page 136). F R W AUTO DISC MENU SHIFT REGEN CLOCK CH-2 CH-4 AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS F R W Thumbnail screen a) Clip:"Navigeting sibiling relati..." 018/036 TC 00:29:19:23 TC 00:29:38:25 TC 00:29:50:04 TC 00:30:25:11 TC 00:30:40:13 TC 01:01:28:25 TC 00:09:43:14 TC 00:24:24:29 TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:25:42:08 TC 00:25:49:07 TC 00:24:34:27 DATE&TIME 30 NOV 2005 14:14 DUR 1 0:23:22:26 12 Thumbnail Menu Clip Information Select Index Picture Clip Properties Add Sub Clips Delete Clip Lock/Unlock Clip Set Clip Flag Skip Scroll Thumbnail Search SHIFT+SET SHIFT+RESET SHIFT+STOP Thumbnail Menu b) a) Clip thumbnail screen b) Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Shortcut operations Shortcut button names are displayed next to the menu items of commands that have shortcuts (see page 147). Note Shortcuts displayed within parentheses should be used with all menus closed. Thumbnail Menu submenus • The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic commands for thumbnail searches. • The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic commands for moving to other menus. Overview 111 Disc Menu The Disc Menu allows you to do the following. (Underlined values in the Operation/Setting column are the factory defaults.) Item Load Clip List Save Clip List Save Clip list as... Delete Clip List Clear Clip List Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive Planning Metadata Properties Planning Clip Name Suffix Clear Planning Metadata Lock or Delete All Clips Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens 112 Sub-Item Lock All Clips Unlock All Clips Delete All Clips Delete All Voice Disc Properties Format Disc Download Clip via Direct FTP Overview Operation/Setting Load clip list into this unit’s memory. Save a clip list to the disc under its current name, overwriting the old contents. Save a clip list to the disc under a new name. Delete a clip list from the disc. Clear the current clip list from the unit’s memory. Select a media disc or drive and load planning metadata into this unit’s memory. Display the properties of the currently loaded planning metadata. Change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata. Clear the currently loaded planning metadata from the unit’s memory. Lock all clips. Unlock all clips. Delete all clips. Delete all voice data. Display the properties of the currently loaded disc. Or edit the user disc ID, title 1, and title 2. Format (initialize) the currently loaded disc. Used to send clip to and from remote devices and remote computers. Item Settings Operation/Setting Sub-Item SET Key on Thumbnail Sort Clip List by... Sort Planning Metadata by... Display Title Planning Clip Name Display Setting Format Disc Select Font Select USB Keyboard Language Select Mouse Pointer Speed To display the Disc Menu To display the Disc Menu, press the SUB CLIP/ DISC MENU button with the SHIFT button held down in one of the following screens. • Clip thumbnail screen • Clip list thumbnail screen • Clip playback screen Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area Selects the behavior of the unit when the SET/S.SEL button or MENU knob is pressed with one thumbnail selected. Cue up & Still: Cue up the selected thumbnail. Cue up & Play: Cue up and play the selected thumbnail. Selects a method to sort the clip list. Name (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order. Date (Newest First): Sort by date and time of creation, newest clip list first. Selects a method to sort the planning metadata. Name (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order. Date (Newest First): Sort by date and time of creation, newest planning metadata first. Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles. On: Title1 "title1": Display the title in the following order of priority: Title1, Title2, Clip name or Clip list name. On: Title2 {title2}: Display the title in the following order of priority: Title2, Title1, Clip name or Clip list name. Off: Do not display the title. Always display the clip name or clip list name. Selects how to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit. ASCII Clip Name: Display title in ASCII format. Clip Name: Display title in UTF-8 format. Selects whether to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit. Disable: Do not display titles. Enable: Display titles. Selects whether to disable the Format Disc command. Disable: Disable the command. Enable: Enable the command. Selects the language (font) used to display clip names, clip list names, and title2 clip titles. Selects the language of the USB keyboard used in the software keyboard screen. Selects the speed of the USB mouse pointer used in the software keyboard screen from among the following. 5 Fast/4/3 Middle/2/1 Slow • Clip list playback screen To return to the original screen, press the RESET/ RETURN button. Overview 113 3 RESET/RETURN button DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY GUI screen operations BRIGHT LEVEL EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT THUMBNAIL MENU 0 10 0 10 CH-3 ESSENCE MARK F-RUN SET R-RUN SET F R W AUTO MANUAL AUDIO SELECT S.SEL SUB CLIP CH-1 SHIFT DISC MENU MENU knob CH-2 CH-4 AUDIO IN PRESET FRONT REAR WIRELESS REGEN CLOCK F R W 1 SHIFT button 2 SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button Left-/right-arrow buttons DISP SEL HOLD Clip list thumbnail screen RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT LEVEL EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT THUMBNAIL MENU 0 10 0 10 CH-3 Clip List:E0001 002/013 ESSENCE MARK F-RUN SET R-RUN SET F R W AUTO MANUAL AUDIO SELECT SUB CLIP S.SEL CH-1 PRESET TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:04:14 TC 00:00:12:04 TC 00:00:20:13 TC 00:00:28:08 TC 00:00:35:15 TC 00:00:46:08 TC 00:00:53:22 TC 00:00:59:16 TC 00:01:06:18 TC 00:01:13:11 SHIFT DISC MENU REGEN CLOCK CH-2 CH-4 AUDIO IN FRONT REAR WIRELESS F R W Up-/down-arrow buttons DATE&TIME 28 JUL 2006 19:55 TOTAL DUR Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens 1+2 TC 00:01:17:27 00:01:31:16 3 Disc Menu Load Clip List Save Clip List Save Clip List as... Delete Clip List Clear Clip List Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive Planning Metadata Properties Clear Planning Metadata Lock or Delete All Clips SET/S.SEL button To select items Do one of the following to select thumbnails, menu items, timecode digits, and other items. • Turn the MENU knob. • Press the up-, down-, left-, or right-arrow button. • Press the PREV or NEXT button. • With the SHIFT button held down, press the PREV or NEXT button (to move to the first or last item). • Press the PREV button with the F REV button held down, or press the NEXT button with the F FWD button held down (to move to the first or last item). • With the SHIFT button held down, press the upor down-arrow button (to move to the previous or next page). • Press the F REV or F FWD button (to move to the previous or next page). To select multiple thumbnails Do one of the following. • With the SHIFT button held down, turn the MENU knob. • With the SHIFT button held down, press the left- or right-arrow button. 114 Overview To return to the previous screen Press the RESET/RETURN button. Thumbnail Operations To move from a menu level to the next lower or higher menu level For a menu item displayed together with a B or b mark, you can move to the next lower or higher menu level by pressing the right- or left-arrow button. To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press. The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view. To increment and decrement numbers Do one of the following. • Press the up- or down-arrow button. • Turn the MENU knob. Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Selecting thumbnails The thumbnail selection frame (see page 107) indicates the currently selected thumbnail. To move the thumbnail selection frame Turn the MENU knob, or press the arrow buttons. To skip quickly through thumbnails (Skip Scroll function) When you have a large number of thumbnails, like in expand thumbnail screen, you can use the Skip Scroll function to skip through them quickly. See page 114 for more information about operations in thumbnail screens. 1 In the screens like clip thumbnail screen or expand thumbnail screen, display the Thumbnail Menu. 2 Select Skip Scroll, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A small popup window appears on the scrollbar to indicate the position of the currently selected thumbnail within the set of all thumbnails. Expand 007/235 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 Skip Scroll DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 CLIP Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To confirm selections You can use thumbnail screens to display clip information and to find, protect, and delete clips. The thumbnails provide visual confirmation of these and other operations. "Seashore" DUR 007/235 0:00:00:01 Thumbnail Operations 115 3 4 Turn the MENU knob, or press the up or down-arrow button. See “Selecting thumbnails” (page 115) for more information. The current position moves by an amount equal to 1/10 of the total number of thumbnails. Using the expand function to find scenes Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob at the new position. The thumbnail at the position indicated in the small popup window appears in a thumbnail screen like the following 1). Expand The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip into equally sized blocks, and to display thumbnails of the first frame in each block. This is a quick and efficient way to review the selected clip and search for target scenes. You can specify 12, 144, or 1728 divisions. 007/235 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 Note DUR 0:00:00:01 CLIP "Seashore" DUR 0:00:00:01 1) Expand thumbnail screen To select multiple thumbnails Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail that you want to select. Then, with the SHIFT button held down, Turn the MENU knob, or press the right-arrow button. To cancel the multiple selection, move the selection frame without the SHIFT button held down. Clip:"Navigating sibling relati..." TC 00:29:38:25 TC 00:29:50:04 TC 00:30:25:11 TC 00:30:40:13 TC 01:01:28:25 TC 00:09:43:14 TC 00:24:24:29 TC 00:24:34:27 TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:25:42:08 TC 00:25:49:07 30 NOV 2005 14:14 DUR 0:23:22:26 Searching with thumbnails By using the thumbnails that appear in the various thumbnail screens, you can easily cue up and play clips and sub clips. 116 See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip that contains the scene you want to find. 2 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button. The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks, and a list appears in the expand thumbnail screen (see page 109) with the first frame of each block displayed as a thumbnail. 018/036 TC 00:29:19:23 DATE&TIME The maximum number of blocks may be other than 1728 when the recorded duration of the clip is short. In this case, the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1 frame. This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at equal intervals. 3 Select the thumbnail that you want to expand further. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to twice, as required. Note Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they already have the minimum duration (1 frame). Using thumbnails to find clips To return to the previous expansion level Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button with the SHIFT button held down. The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of all clips recorded on the disc. You can use this screen to cue up the selected clip and to carry out playback (see page 118). To display the expand thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip With the expand thumbnail screen still active, press the PREV button or the NEXT button. Thumbnail Operations Using the chapter function to find scenes Chapters are the sections between the shot marks, Rec Start marks, and other essence marks. Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of recording, but shot marks can be set at any scene during recording or playback. The chapter function allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in a clip. See “Recording essence marks” (page 82) for more information. 4 To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter positions You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to adjust the position of shot marks (Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9) at chapter positions. (The positions of Rec Start essence marks cannot be adjusted.) 1 In the chapter thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the shot mark whose position you want to adjust. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select Move Essence Mark. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of a clip with chapters set. The “S” mark appears on the thumbnails of clips with chapters set. 2 The Move Essence Mark screen is displayed. Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button. To delete the shot mark at a chapter position You can delete the shot mark (Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9) at the chapter position in the chapter thumbnail screen. (Rec Start essence marks cannot be deleted.) In the chapter thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail for the frame whose shot mark you want to delete. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select Delete Essence Mark. A message appears asking if you are sure that you want to delete the shot mark. You can perform playback and searches in this screen. 4 Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F REV/F FWD buttons to display the frame you want. You can also perform jog playback by turning the MENU knob. 5 Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens The chapter thumbnail screen (see page 109) appears, with thumbnails of the frames where chapters are set. The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1, Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence marks are set. 1 Select OK to delete the mark, or Cancel to cancel the deletion, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip with chapters With the chapter thumbnail screen still active, press the PREV button or the NEXT button. The unit searches in the reverse or forward direction for the next clip with chapters, beginning with the previous or next clip. Using essence marks to find scenes See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip playback screen or the clip thumbnail screen, press the Thumbnail Operations 117 THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button with the SHIFT button held down. The Select Essence Mark screen appears. The names of essence marks that are not recorded on the disc are displayed in gray. Select Essence Mark Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 Rec Start Cut Others In the clip playback screen, the PREV and NEXT buttons jump to the previous or next recording start points. Playing the scene you have found After finding a clip with one of the methods explained in the previous section, “Searching with thumbnails” (page 116), you can cue up and play the clip that you have found. To search for a thumbnail position and cue it up If planning metadata with user-defined essence mark has been loaded You can select user-defined essence marks (see page 136). See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Select the thumbnail that you want to cue up. Clip:C0010 010/041 OK Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens 118 TC 00:23:00:25 TC 00:23:40:07 TC 00:24:45:11 TC 00:25:06:14 TC 00:25:49:23 TC 00:26:22:10 TC 00:27:19:04 TC 00:27:51:09 TC 00:28:22:02 TC 00:23:34:18 TC 00:23:54:22 TC 00:28:06:09 2 DATE&TIME Select the essence mark that you want, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The essence mark thumbnail screen (see page 110) displays a list of frames where the selected essence mark is set. To switch directly to the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen Before starting, set FIND MODE in the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “R.ST”. When the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen is displayed, each press of the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button switches between that screen and the clip playback screen (Resume function). This setting allows you to use the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button as a shortcut to Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen, which is convenient for checking start points in clip recorded with the Clip Continuous Rec function. To return to the clip thumbnail screen from the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen, press the RESET/RETURN button. Thumbnail Operations 2 30 NOV 2005 13:40 DUR 0:00:04:14 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To play clips with the SET/S.SEL button In the Disc Menu, set Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail to “Cue up & Play”. Play begins from the selected frame when you press the SET/S.SEL button, in the same way as when you press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To search for a thumbnail position and play from there See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Select the thumbnail that you want to play. 2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. 5 Select the clip filtering condition. Item name Clip Flag: OK Clip Flag: NG Clip Flag: KP(KEEP) Clip Flag: none Current Planning Metadata Selecting clips by type (Filter Clips function) AV Format of Selected Clip 6 Clips that have been recorded according to the instructions in the currently loaded planning metadata Video format of the selected clips Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A filter thumbnail screen appears, showing only clips that meet the specified condition. The filtering condition appears at the lower left of the screen. To filter clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 Display the clip thumbnail screen. 2 If you want to select clips by video format, select the thumbnails of clips in that format. 3 Display the Thumbnail menu. 4 Select “Filter Clips”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The Filter Clips screen appears. 7 If you want to filter the clips again with a different filtering condition (to narrow down the filtering results), repeat steps 2 to 6. (The command name selected in step 4 changes to Filter Clips(Narrowing).) To play selected clips continuously Register all of the filtered clips in an automatically generated clip list, and play the clip list. 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen. 2 Select “Copy to Clip List”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens You can select clips of a certain type from among all of the clips on a disc (Filter Clips function). For example, you can do the following. • Select clips in a certain video format from a disc that contains clips in different video formats. • Select clips that have been set “NG” as a clip flag, and delete all of those clips in one operation. • Select only clips that have been recorded on the basis of a specified planning metadata entry, and transfer those clips to an external device using the Direct FTP function (see page 140). Filtering condition Clip flag set in the clip (OK/NG/KP(KEEP)/ none) A clip list thumbnail screen appears, showing filtered clips that have been registered in the clip list. Thumbnail Operations 119 Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails You can select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail screens. 3 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The screen changes to the clip playback screen, and playback starts. Operations on filtering results See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen. 2 Select Clip Information. A window appears in which you can select the information to display. You can use the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen to perform the following operations. Thumbnail Menu Item name Clip Information Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Lock or Delete All Filtered Clips >Lock All Filtered Clips Lock or Delete All Filtered Clips >Unlock All Filtered Clips Lock or Delete All Filtered Clips >Delete All Filtered Clips Filter Clips(Narrowing) Copy to Clip List Upload Clips via Direct FTP Function Select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails. Lock all of the filtered clips. Unlock all of the filtered clips. Delete all of the filtered clips. Narrow down the filtering results. Copy all of the filtered clips to a new clip list. Transfer all of the filtered clips to an external device via a network. To display clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles For clip lists created with the Copy to Clip List command, you can display the clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles. When Settings >Display Title in the Disc Menu is set to “On: Title2 {title2}”, the clip filtering conditions are displayed automatically in screens such as the Load Clip List screen. Clip Information Return to Upper Menu Date Time Code Duration Sequence Number 3 Select the items that you want to display. Return to Upper Menu: Returns to the Thumbnail Menu Date: Date and time of creation, or date and time of the more recent modification Time Code: Timecode of first frame Duration: Playback time Sequence Number: Thumbnail sequence number The selected information will appear at the bottom of the thumbnails when you display a thumbnail screen. Changing clip index pictures The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as index pictures for clips. Normally the index picture is the first frame in a clip, but you can set any frame in the clip as the index picture. Note You can only change index pictures from the clip thumbnail screen. The thumbnails shown in the clip list thumbnail screen, the expand thumbnail screen, and the chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed. 120 Thumbnail Operations To select a clip index picture while viewing the video 3 Select Set Index Picture. A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to set the current frame as the index picture. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. Expand 1 2 In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip whose index picture you want to change. Display the Thumbnail Menu. TC 00:01:35:17 TC 00:01:38:00 TC 00:01:37:11 TC 00:01:37:24 TC 00:01:38:08 TC 00:01:38:22 TC 00:01:38:19 TC 00:01:40:02 TC 00:01:40:16 TC 00:01:39:06 CLIP 3 001/012 Set Index Picture TC 00:01:36:14 Tene OK Cancel DUR TC 00:01:36:27 0:00:00:13 Select Select Index Picture. 4 Select Index screen appears. Select Index:"Navigating sibling relati..." TCR 01:09:16:13 018/036 Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. After pressing the RESET/RETURN button to return to the clip thumbnail screen, check to make sure that the newly selected frame is displayed as the index picture. OK Cancel You can play and search with this screen. 4 You can also perform a jog operation by turning the MENU knob. 5 Press the up-arrow button to select OK, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To select index pictures by using the expand and chapter functions You can check clip properties such as the title, timecode, duration, date and time of creation, and date and time of the more recent modification. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen. 2 Select Clip Properties. The Clip Properties screen appears. After using the expand function (see page 116) or chapter function (see page 117) to find a frame, you can set that frame as the index picture of the clip. The following example explains how to do so from the expand thumbnail screen. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the expand thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail to set as the index picture. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F REV/F FWD buttons to display the frame you want. Checking clip properties Clip No.: Clip number/total number of clips Name: Clip name 1) Title1: Title 1 Title2: Title 2 1) AV Format: Recording format Frame Rate: The frame rate from the time when the clip was shot. For clips shot using Slow & Quick Motion, PB/ Capture, where PB is the playback frame rate and Capture is the shooting frame rate. Thumbnail Operations 121 TC/DUR: Timecode of the first frame/ Recording time Created: Date and time of creation Modified: Date and time of most recent modification Rec Device: Name of device that created clip (product number) 2 An input screen appears for the selected item. (A keyboard appears that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings >Select Font if the area of use setting is NTSC AREA or PAL AREA. A Japanese keyboard appears if the area of use setting is NTSC(J)AREA.) 1) Titles can be displayed in European languages when the area of use (see page 38) is set to “NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”. To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press. The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view. 3 To display the properties of the previous or the next clip Press the PREV button or the NEXT button. Edit the string in the edit box. To enter characters Use the arrow buttons or turn the MENU knob to select a key, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To return to the clip thumbnail screen Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Functions of special keys Key B, b To edit clip information You can edit the name, 1) title 1, and title 2 of a clip by using a software keyboard. , Back Space 1) The NAMING FORM item on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu must be set to FREE (see page 161). CapsLock Notes • The only characters that can be entered are the alphanumeric characters and symbols that appear on the software keyboard, and characters in the fonts supported by this version of the unit’s firmware. Japanese kanji cannot be entered. • Names and titles must be within the specified character length limits. • Some symbols cannot be used in clip names. The keys for those symbols are disabled when you are editing a clip name. See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 In the Clip Properties screen, turn the MENU knob to select the item you want to edit (Name, Title1 1), or Title2). 1) Only ASCII characters can be used for Title1. 122 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Thumbnail Operations FShift 4 Function Move the cursor one character forward or back. Move the cursor to Home or End position. Deletes the character in front of the cursor. Turns the Shift key on permanently (until pressed again), and enables input of capital letters and symbols. Enables input of capital letters and symbols. Turns off after entry of one character. Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. You return to the Clip Properties screen, and the results of the editing are reflected in the clip information. To enter text using a USB keyboard or USB mouse You can connect a Windows USB keyboard or a Windows USB mouse to the USB connector (see page 25) 1), and use them together with the software keyboard to enter text. Connect a Japanese keyboard if the area of use has been set to NTSC(J)AREA. 2) Connect a keyboard that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings >Select Font if the area of use has been set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA. 1) Some USB keyboards or USB mice may not be recognized. In this case, the message “Unknown USB” appears. 2) Only ASCII characters can be entered from a Japanese keyboard. See “List of Supported USB Keyboards” (page 264) for the characters that can be entered on the various language keyboards. Note The keyboard language cannot be changed in the following cases. • When the area of use is set to NTSC(J)AREA. • When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA, and the Disc Menu item Settings >Select Font The keyboard icon on the software keyboard is highlighted when a USB keyboard has been recognized and enabled for use with this unit, and the mouse icon is highlighted and a mouse pointer appears when a USB mouse has been enabled. Notes • Use the proper keyboard for the area of use. Some characters may not be entered correctly if you use a keyboard designed for use in another area. • It is not possible to enter Japanese, even on a Japanese keyboard. USB keyboard special functions keys In addition to the special function keys of the software keyboard, you can use the following special function keys on a USB keyboard. Key R, r Function When the cursor is in an edit box: Move the cursor to the start or end. When “OK” or “Cancel” has the focus: Moves the focus between “OK” and “Cancel”. Delete Deletes the character after the cursor. Shift + T, Selects the string before or after the Shift + t cursor. Ctrl + C, Ctrl + C: Copies the selected string. X, V, A, Z Ctrl + X: Cuts the selected string. Ctrl + V: Pastes a copied or cut string. Ctrl + A: Selects the entire string. Ctrl + Z: Undoes the immediately preceding operation. Enter When the cursor is in an edit box: Moves the focus to “OK”. When “OK” or “Cancel” has the focus: Exits the software keyboard. Esc When the cursor is in an edit box, moves the focus to “Cancel”. Tab Moves the focus between “OK” and “Cancel”. Thumbnail Operations Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To change the display language (font) for clip names, clip list names, and title2 clip titles: Select one of the following languages (fonts) with the Disc menu item Settings >Select Font. • European Alphabet: The keyboard language can be selected with the Disc Menu item Settings >USB Keyboard Language (see following section). • Korean: The Korean keyboard is selected automatically. You can enter Hangul characters if you have connected a Korean USB keyboard. • Simplified Chinese: The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English [United States] keyboard. Only ASCII characters can be entered. • Traditional Chinese: The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English [United States] keyboard. Only ASCII characters can be entered. To change the keyboard language: In the Disc Menu, select Settings >Select USB Keyboard Language and then select the desired keyboard from among the following. • English [United Kingdom] • English [United States] • French [France] • German [Germany] • Italian [Italy] • Polish (Programmers) [Poland] • Russian [Russia] • Spanish [Spain] is set to Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese. 123 USB mouse functions You can use the mouse to move the cursor on the software keyboard. You can also left click on a key to enter the character for that key. To change the speed of the mouse pointer: In the Disc Menu, select Settings >Select Mouse Pointer Speed and then select the desired speed. Adjust according to the selected mouse. To exit the software keyboard from a USB keyboard 1 With the cursor in an edit box, press the Enter key to move the focus to “OK”. 2 Do one of the following. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To confirm the edit and then exit the software keyboard: While “OK” is selected, press the Enter key. To discard the edit and then exit the software keyboard: On the USB keyboard, press the r key or the Tab key to move to “Cancel”, and then press the Enter key. To continue editing: Press any key except the Enter key, the Esc key, and the Tab key. Setting clip flags You can set three types of clip flags (OK/NG/KP (KEEP)) during recording or playback. Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips they need. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip where you want to set a flag. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select “Set Clip Flag”. The clip flag setting screen appears. Thumbnail Menu Set Clip Flag Return to Upper Menu OK NG KP (KEEP) none 4 Select the clip flag that you want to set (OK/NG/KP (KEEP)). A clip flag icon (see page 108) appears for clips that have clip flags set. To clear clip flags Carry out steps 1 to 3, selecting a clip that has a flag set, and then select “none” in step 4. You can also use switches to set and clear clip flags. For details, see “Setting clip flags with switches” (page 82). Locking (write-protecting) clips In a clip thumbnail screen, you can lock the selected clips so that they cannot be deleted or altered. Locking prevents the following operations on clips. • Deletion • Renaming by FTP • Changing the index picture • Adding and deleting shot marks • Setting and clearing clip flags Notes • Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a disc is formatted. • Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position. To lock clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 124 Thumbnail Operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnails of the clips that you want to lock. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select Lock/Unlock Clip. To unlock all clips 4 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then select Unlock All Clips. A lock icon (see page 108) appears on the thumbnail of the locked clips. In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down. A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to unlock all clips. 3 To lock all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then select Lock All Clips. A message appears asking you to confirm locking all clips. 3 Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to cancel it, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Select OK to execute the unlock, or Cancel to cancel it, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Deleting clips You can delete clips while checking their contents. Notes 1 See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. To unlock a specific clip In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to unlock. 1 In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to delete. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select Lock/Unlock Clip. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. A message appears asking you to confirm the unlocking. 3 Select Delete Clip. Clip List:E0001 TC 00:00:00:00 002/013 TC 00:00:04:14 00:00:12:04 UnlockTCClip C0004 Unlock this Clip? TC 00:00:28:08 TC 00:00:35:15 TC 00:00:46:08 TC 00:00:59:16 TC 00:01:06:18 TC 00:01:13:11 DATE&TIME 4 TC 00:00:20:13 OK TC 00:00:53:22 Cancel 28 JUL 2006 19:55 TOTAL DUR TC 00:01:17:27 00:01:31:16 Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down. A window appears asking you to confirm the deletion. The window displays thumbnails of four frames from the target clip (the first frame, two intermediate frames, and the last frame), along with the name, title 1, date of creation, and duration of the clip. One of the following messages also appears, depending on whether the clip is referenced in a clip list. When the clip is not referenced in a clip list: “Delete Clip” When the clip is referenced in a clip list: “Delete Clip & Clip List” (All clip lists that reference the target clip are deleted along with the clip.) Thumbnail Operations Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. • Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position. • Locked clips cannot be deleted. • If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on the disc, all of those clip lists are deleted as well. • If a deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip list, only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the same time as the deletion target clip. 125 Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) 4 What is scene selection? Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The selected clip is deleted, and you return to the clip thumbnail screen. In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the RESET/RETURN button with the SHIFT button held down. To delete all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then select Delete All Clips. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete all clips. 3 Select OK to execute the deletion, or Cancel to cancel it, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Scene selection is a function which allows you to select material (clips) from the material recorded on a disc and perform cut editing. You can do this by operating on this unit only. • Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut editing in the field and in other offline situations. • In scene selection you create a clip list (editing data). Since the material itself is not affected, you can repeat this any number of times. • You can play back the edit list created by scene selection on this unit. • In scene selection you can add whole clips or add parts of a clip. You can add scenes using chapters, change the playback sequence, and amend or delete In and Out points. All of these operations can be carried out easily on this unit. • Clip lists (editing data) created with the scene selection function can be used on XPRI and other full-feature nonlinear editing systems. Note Locked clips cannot be deleted. Clips Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called clips. A clip contains the material from a recording start point to a recording end point. Clips have numbers beginning with C, for example C0001. Recording start point of clip 2 Clip 1 (C0001) Clip 2 (C0002) Recording end point of clip 2 Clip 3 (C0003) Clip 4 (C0004) You can also assign titles to your clips and use the titles to manage them, instead of the clip numbers. For more information, see “Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically” (page 91). 126 Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) Clip lists Unit memory You can use the scene selection function to select clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list called a “clip list”. Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for example E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc. Current clip list can be edited t Clip list playback and thumbnail display (adding, deleting, and reordering sub clips) SAVE m MLOAD Disc Sub clips (clips in clip lists) Clips (or parts of clips) that have been added to a clip list are called “sub clips”. Sub clips are virtual editing data that specify ranges in the original clips. You can use them without modifying the original data. The following figure illustrates the relation between clips and sub clips. Clips on disc Clip 1 (C0001) Clip 3 (C0003) Clip 4 (C0004) Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 In the above example, the whole of clip 2 has been added as sub clip 1, and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub clip 2. Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3. Therefore, when clip list E0001 is played back, clip 4 is played after clip 2, and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played. Clip list playback Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc. To play a clip list, insert a disc into the unit, load the clip list that you want to play, and press the PLAY/PAUSE button. Clips are played according to the data in the clip list. Creating and editing clip lists The following table lists the steps in the creation and editing of clip lists with the scene selection function. To create a clip list, you always need to carry out the steps inside the heavy lines. Other steps can be carried out as required. 1 Clip list editing (current clip list) To edit a clip list, you need to load the clip list from the disc into the unit’s internal memory. The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory is called the “current clip list”. The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation and editing. Clip list playback also uses the current clip list. After creating and editing a clip list, you need to save it to disc. E0001 (Clip list 1) E0002 (Clip list 2) E0003 (Clip list 3) : : E0099 (Clip list 99) Add sub clips: Use the Add Sub Clips command to add the clips you want to use to a clip list. You can add up to 300 sub clips to one clip list.This operation can be carried out in the following thumbnail screens. • • • • Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Clip list (E0001) Clip 2 (C0002) C0001 (Clip 1) C0002 (Clip 2) C0003 (Clip 3) : : Clip thumbnail screen Expand thumbnail screen Chapter thumbnail screen Clip list thumbnail screen Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) 127 2 3 4 Change the sub clip order: Use the Move Sub Clips command to change the order of sub clips in a clip list. Delete sub clips: Use the Delete Sub Clips command to delete specified sub clips from a clip list. Trim sub clips: Use the Trim Sub Clip command to adjust the In and Out points of a sub clip. This function can also be used to adjust the overall duration of the clip list. Set the start timecode: Use the Set Start Time Code command to set the timecode at the start of a clip list. Play the clip list: Use the PLAY/ PAUSE button and other playback controls to play the current clip list and check its contents. Save the clip list: Use the Save Clip List or Save Clip List as… command to save the newly created clip list to the disc. In the clip thumbnail screen, select the clip that you want to add as a sub clip (multiple selections possible). 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The Add Sub Clip screen appears. The clip(s) selected in step 1 appear in the upper part of this screen, and the clip list appears in the lower Scene Selection window. The I cursor in the Scene Selection window indicates the location where the currently selected sub clip(s) will be inserted. Add Sub Clip Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens You can also delete clip lists on the disc. Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) TC 01:01:28:25 TC 00:09:43:14 TC 00:24:24:29 TC 00:24:34:27 TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:24:56:24 TOTAL 00:13:48:24 In the Scene Selection window, move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip. (The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor.) 5 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The selected clip is inserted as a subclip and a “+” mark appears on the thumbnail in the Scene Selection window. To add sub clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. TC 00:30:40:13 4 Note Adding sub clips from the clip thumbnail screen The following procedure explains operations in the clip thumbnail screen. You can proceed in the same way in the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen. Expanded blocks are added as sub clips in the expand thumbnail screen, and chapters are added as sub clips in the chapter thumbnail screen. 017/035 To display the total duration after addition of the selected clip Press the SHIFT button. For details, see “Managing clip lists” (page 132). Clip lists can be created and edited even when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled. However, if you need to save the clip list, set Write Inhibit tab to enable recording before you create or edit the clip list. 002 TC 00:30:25:11 Scene Selection To reedit clip lists on the disc Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip lists you want to edit, and perform the steps 2 to 4 in the previous section. You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the clip thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail screen. However, you must use the clip list thumbnail screen to edit clip lists. 128 1 To check the addition results Move the cursor. 6 Press the RESET/RETURN button. This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen. 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips. 8 Save the clip list (see page 131). In step 1, you can hold down the SHIFT button when you press the SET/S.SEL button. This is a shortcut that displays the Add Sub Clip screen immediately. You can also save the clip list immediately in step 5 by executing the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu. 6 The sub clips are added at the I cursor position, and you return to the clip list thumbnail screen. You can check the results of the addition in that screen. Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail screen See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 2 Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The Clip List (Add) screen appears. Clip List (Add) 002 017/035 TC 00:30:25:11 TC 00:30:40:13 TC 01:01:28:25 TC 00:09:43:14 TC 00:24:24:29 TC 00:24:34:27 TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:24:56:24 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips. 8 Save the clip list (see page 131). In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the SET/S.SEL button with the SHIFT button held down. To reorder sub clips Scene Selection 3 TOTAL 00:13:48:24 To select from expanded thumbnails Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to display the expand thumbnail screen. 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, select the thumbnails of the sub clips that you want to move (multiple selections possible). 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select Move Sub Clips, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To select from chapter thumbnails Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button to display the chapter thumbnail screen. 4 The Clip List (Move) screen appears. The thumbnail selection is confirmed, and an I cursor appears at the bottom of the Clip List (Add) screen (in the Scene Selection window). The I cursor indicates the location where the currently selected sub clips will be inserted. Press the SHIFT button. In the Scene Selection window, move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip. (The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor.) 001/034 TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:21:27 TC 00:04:06:00 TC 00:04:13:14 TC 00:04:35:12 TC 00:04:57:10 TC 00:05:19:08 TC 00:05:41:05 TC 00:06:03:03 TC 00:06:25:00 TC 00:06:46:27 DATE&TIME 08 AUG 2007 11:50 TOTAL DUR TC 00:07:08:25 00:13:48:24 4 Move the I cursor to the point where you want to move the selected thumbnails. 5 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To display the total duration after addition of the selected clips 5 006 Clip List (Move) Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Select the sub clips that you want to add from the upper part of the screen (the part where 8 thumbnails are displayed, multiple selections possible). See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. The sub clips are moved to the I cursor position. 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required. Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) 129 7 To cue up the In point or Out point Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Cue up Inpoint or Cue up Outpoint, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Save the clip list (see page 131). To adjust the In and Out points of sub clips (trim) To cancel the In point or Out point setting Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Reset Inpoint or Reset Outpoint, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The In point or Out point setting returns to the previous value. Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene by changing the positions of the In and Out points. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, select a thumbnail. 6 Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required. 3 Select Trim Sub Clip, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 8 Save the clip list (see page 131). The Clip List (Trim) screen appears. 001/034 Clip List (Trim) Total DUR 00:13:48:24 00:00:21:27 To delete sub clips See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. IN 01:17:33:08 OUT 01:17:55:05 TCR 01:17:33:08 CLIP 019/035 Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Select the clips to delete in the clip list thumbnail screen (multiple selections possible). 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 3 Select Delete Sub Clips, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Cancel Like the clip playback screen, this screen allows you to play and search all clips on the disc. To display a list of In and Out point operations that you can perform Press the MENU button. 4 When you find the point that you want to make the start point, select “IN” and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The timecode of the new In point appears in the timecode display, and the Total (total duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays are updated. 5 When you find the point that you want to make the end point, select “OUT” and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The timecode of the new Out point appears in the timecode display, and the Total (total duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays are updated. 130 1 OK Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion. 4 Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required. 6 Save the clip list (see page 131). To play the clip list Note When this unit is in single clip playback mode (see page 79), only the selected sub clip can be played. See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. To play using GUI screens 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the sub clip where you want to start play. 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the value of the digit. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required. To reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00 Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To start play from the start of the clip list Select the thumbnail of the first sub clip. 2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. To preset the frequently used timecode Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The timecode set in steps 3 and 4 is saved as a preset value. To play using the clip list playback screen 1 Display the clip list playback screen. 2 Press the PREV button or the NEXT button to display the sub clip that you want to play. To start play from the first sub clip Press the SHIFT + PREV buttons to move to the start of the clip list. 3 To recall the preset timecode Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 6 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. OK is selected. 7 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob again. The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode, unrelated to the timecode of the original clips. By default the timecode (LTC) of the start of the clip list is 00:00:00:00, but it can be set to any value. 8 Save the clip list (see page 131). See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. To save under a specified name 1 2 In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Thumbnail Menu. Select Set Start Time Code, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The Set Start Time Code screen appears. To save clip lists See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Save Clip List as..., and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To change the starting timecode of clip lists A list of clip lists appears. Set Start Time Code Disc Menu TC 22 : 34 . 56 : 17 H MIN Preset TC 00:00:00:00 SEC FRM OK Cancel Save Clip List Name & Date/Sorted by Name DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50 E0003 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0004 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0005 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0006 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0007 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0095 18 MAY2006 10:25 E0098 13 JUN2006 13:43 Display Select 3 Press the left- or right-arrow button to select the digit that you want to change. To switch the information displayed for clip lists Press the right-arrow button. Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) 131 With each press, the display changes in the order: “Name & Date” t “Name & Title” t “Name & Short Date” t... 2 A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears. To sort clip lists Select one of the following orders by selecting Settings > Sort Clip List By... in the Disc Menu. Name(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip list name. Date(Newest First): Sort by date and time of clip list creation, newest first. 3 Select the desired clip list name, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Disc Menu Load Clip List Name & Date/Sorted by Name DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50 E0003 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0004 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0005 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0006 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0007 03 AUG2007 17:51 E0095 18 MAY2006 10:25 E0098 13 JUN2006 13:43 Display Select 3 Select the desired clip list, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The name of the clip list selected here appears in the clip list thumbnail screen. When you execute the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu, the clip list will be saved under that name. To save under the same name The following procedure saves the current clip list under its current name (the name that appears in the clip list thumbnail screen). See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. To create a new clip list Select New File and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu (see page 113). 2 Select Save Clip List, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The following procedure clears the current clip list from the unit’s internal memory. The clip list is saved. However, Save Clip List as... is executed when the name displayed in the clip list thumbnail screen is “no name”. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. To clear clip lists 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Clear Clip List, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Note If you press the EJECT button before saving a new or edited clip list, a message appears asking if you want to discard your changes and continue. Follow the instructions in the message to continue or cancel the operation. Managing clip lists To load clip lists The following procedure loads a clip list stored on the disc into the unit’s internal memory as the current clip list. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 132 Select Load Clip List, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu. Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the clip list. 3 Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The current clip list returns to the unnamed state “(no name)”. To delete clip lists The following procedure deletes a clip list from the disc. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Delete Clip List, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Disc Operations A list of clip lists appears. 3 Select the clip list that you want to delete, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion. Delete Clip List E0001 Delete this Clip List? OK Cancel 4 Checking disc properties See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Disc Properties, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The Disc Properties screen appears. Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Settings, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 3 Select Sort Clip List by..., and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 4 Select one of the following sort methods, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Name(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip list name. Date(Newest First): Sort by date and time of clip list creation, newest first. Clip lists will be displayed in the specified order the next time that you carry out an operation such as loading a clip list. User Disc ID: User disc ID Title1: Title 1 Title2: Title 2 1) Total DUR: Total recording time Remain: Remaining recording time Rewrite: Number of times rewritten 1) Titles can be displayed in European languages when the area of use (see page 38) is set to “NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”. To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press. The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To sort clip lists To return to the previous screen Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To edit disc information You can edit the user disc ID, title 1 1), and title 2 by using a software keyboard. 1) Only ASCII characters can be used for the title 1. Disc Operations 133 recording on the USB flash drive and connect it again. • If the message “USB M. INHI” appears when you connect a USB flash drive, disconnect the drive, enable recording on the USB flash drive, and then connect it again. • Depending on the type of USB flash drive, data may not appear if you attempt to read planning metadata immediately after connecting the USB flash drive. In this case, connect the USB flash drive again, or exit the menu and try again. The data will then appear correctly. See “To edit clip information” (page 122) for information about operations. Using planning metadata Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded. To use planning metadata, you will need to save a file in advance in the specified location of a media, and insert the media into this unit. For details, see “To set clip names by using planning metadata” (page 96). 4 To load planning metadata files The selected planning metadata file is loaded into the unit’s memory, and the Planning Metadata Properties screen appears. See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select “Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 5 A media selection screen appears. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Disc Menu Check the information that appears, and press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. By connecting this unit and a computer over a network, you can read planning metadata using a web browser. For details, see “To use a web browser to load planning metadata” (page 138). Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive Return to Upper Menu Professional Disc USB Flash Drive 3 To sort planning metadata Select the media where your planning metadata file is stored, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A list of the planning metadata files stored on the media appears. Disc Menu Load Planning Metadata/ PM_001_sample PM_002_sample PM_003_sample PM_004_sample Professional Disc 04 AUG 10:39 04 AUG 10:39 04 AUG 10:39 04 AUG 10:39 Name &Date/ Sorted by Name Notes • If MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu is set to ENABL, it is not possible to load planning data from a USB flash drive that is write inhibited. Set MEMORY REC to DSABL before starting, or enable 134 Select the desired planning metadata file, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Disc Operations You can sort planning metadata by operating in the same way as in “To sort clip lists” (page 133). However, in step 3, select “Sort Planning Metadata by...”. The planning metadata will be displayed in the specified order the next time you load planning metadata. To check planning metadata properties You can check the properties of the planning metadata that is loaded into this unit’s memory, including the date and time of creation and the clip titles. See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select “Planning Metadata Properties”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The Planning Metadata Properties screen appears. File Name: Planning metadata file name Assign ID: Assign ID Created: Date and time of creation Modified: Date and time of most recent modification Modified by: Name of person who modified the file Title1: Title 1 1) Title2: Title 2 Material Gp: Number of clips recorded with this planning metadata 3 Press the left- or right-arrow button to select a digit to change. 4 Press the up- or down-arrow button, or turn the MENU knob to change the digit. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required. 6 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. “OK” is selected. 1) This can be set as the clip name (see page 96). To return to the previous screen Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 7 To clear planning metadata See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select “Clear Planning Metadata”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To change the serial numbers of clip names using planning metadata You can change the serial numbers that are added to clip names that use planning metadata. A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the planning metadata. 3 See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Planning Clip Name Suffix (change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata), and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or MENU knob. The Planning Clip Name Suffix screen appears. Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Select “OK”, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press. The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view. The planning metadata is cleared from this unit’s memory. To switch the title display in the LCD monitor and viewfinder When planning metadata is loaded into this unit, you can select the format of the title to display in the LCD monitor and viewfinder. See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. Disc Operations 135 2 Select “Settings”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 3 Select “Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area”, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 2 Press ,, and then turn the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The User Defined Essence Marks screen appears. See page 29 for more information about the Clip Info. Area. 4 Select one of the following, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. ASCII Clip Name: Display the ASCII format title (see page 96). Clip Name: Display the UTF-8 format title (see page 96). To display clip names in the clip information area in the viewfinder Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select “Settings”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 3 Select “Planning Clip Name Display” (whether to display the clip name in the viewfinder screen), and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Format Disc, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A message appears asking you to confirm the format. Format Disc All Clips, Clip Lists and Non-AV Data (General Files) will be Deleted. Format OK? OK 4 Clip information is always shown in the warning indicator area of the LCD monitor if the LCD monitor is set to status display. You can display the names of user-defined Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9 essence marks in planning metadata (UTF-8 format, maximum 32 bytes). 1 Cancel Select “Enable”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Checking user-defined essence marks Display the Planning Metadata Properties screen (see page 134) for the planning metadata loaded into this unit. The , button is enabled when the planning metadata contains user-defined essence marks (see page 98). 136 Formatting discs Disc Operations 3 Select OK, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To cancel the format Select Cancel, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To continue by formatting another disc Exchange the disc, select OK, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. To exit the formatting screen Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob with Exit selected. To disable the Format Disc command To prevent inadvertent disc formatting, resulting in the loss of recorded data, you can disable the Format Disc command. See page 114 for more information about GUI screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select “Settings”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 3 Select “Setting Format Disc”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 4 If the connection succeeds, you will be prompted to enter a user name and a password. 3 The user name and password are set to the following when the unit is shipped from the factory. • User name: admin • Password: Model name (“pdw-850”) Select “Disable”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. After the user name and password are verified, an XDCAM web page appears. Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser To display disc and clip properties 1 • Recording, playback, search and other disc operations: Stopped • THUMBNAIL button: Off • Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips, Format Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu: Stopped • Setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu: OFF • FTP connection for file operations: Disconnected, or logged out • Recording of video from external devices: Disabled • Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function: Disconnected • Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu: Values other than VIEW (OFF or LIVE) • MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF Recommended browsers The following browsers are recommended. • Internet Explorer 8 1) • Internet Explorer 9 1) 1) This function may not work properly in 32-bit versions of Internet Explorer if you are using a 64-bit version of Microsoft Windows. You should use a 64bit version of Internet Explorer with 64-bit versions of Windows. To display the unit’s XDCAM web pages 1 2 Connect this unit and a computer to a network (see page 233). Start the browser on the computer, and enter “http://IP_address_of_this_unit/” in the address bar of the browser, and then press the Enter key. For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.001.010”, enter “http:// 192.168.1.10/”. Insert a disc into this unit, and put this unit into the following state. 2 Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens By connecting this unit and a computer over a network, you can display disc properties and clip properties in a web browser installed on the computer (Web Thumbnail function). The Clip Properties page also allows you to download high-resolution clip data, proxy AV data, and metadata from this unit and to save that data on your computer. The Planning Metadata page allows you to load planning metadata directly into the memory of this unit. Enter your user name and password, and then press the Enter key. Display the XDCAM web pages in the browser of your computer (see the previous section). To display disc properties Click “Disc Properties” in the Disc menu. The disc properties of this unit appear in the Disc Properties page. See “Checking disc properties” (page 133) for more information about the various properties. Disc Operations 137 To display clip thumbnails Click “Thumbnails” in the Disc menu. A page of thumbnails of clips on the disc appears. Each thumbnail page displays up to 12 thumbnails. Like the thumbnails in the unit’s GUI screens (see page 108), the thumbnails display several information items, including index picture changed marks, S marks, clip flag icons, and lock icons. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To download high-resolution clip data (HIGH resolution file), proxy AV data (LOW resolution file), or metadata (Clip NRT metadata), click the FTP Download or HTTP Download button to the right of the item that you want. Then click “Save” in the dialog that appears and specify the save destination. The specified data is downloaded to the specified location in your computer. FTP download limitations The following limitations apply to FTP download operations. They do not apply to HTTP download operations. • The characters that can be used in the names of clip-related data files are singlebyte letters, numbers, and symbols. However, the following symbols cannot be used. "#*/:<>?\| • If you click “Cancel” in the download dialog, or if the download is cancelled in some other way with the browser still connected to the unit by FTP, click “Back to Thumbnails” to return to the thumbnails screen, or exit the web browser. When multiple pages exist, you can switch pages by clicking << (back five pages), < (back one page), > (forward one page), or >> (forward five pages). To display clip properties In the Thumbnails page, select a clip by clicking its thumbnail. The properties of that clip appear in the Clip Properties page. See “Checking clip properties” (page 121) for more information about the various properties. To use a web browser to load planning metadata 1 Insert a disc into this unit, and put this unit into the following state. • Recording, playback, search and other disc operations: Stopped • THUMBNAIL button: Off 138 Disc Operations • Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips, Format Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu: Stopped • Setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu: OFF • FTP connection for file operations: Disconnected, or logged out • Recording of video from external devices: Disabled • Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function: Disconnected • Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu: Values other than VIEW (OFF or LIVE) • MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF 2 Display the Planning Metadata page of the XDCAM web pages in the web browser of your computer. 3 Click “Browse...” to open the “Choose File” dialog. 4 Select the planning metadata file (XML) you saved on your computer, and then click “Open”. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To display the Planning Metadata page, proceed in the same way as described in “To display the unit’s XDCAM web pages” (page 137). However, in step 2 enter “http:// IP_address_of_this_unit/mobile.htm” in the address bar. The path of the selected file appears in the “File to send” field. 5 Click “Execute”. The planning metadata is loaded into the unit’s memory and stored in the /General/ Sony/Planning directory on the disc. “OK” appears in the “Status” field when the transfer is complete. Disc Operations 139 Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) You can transfer clips (MXF files) between this unit and external devices over a network. This unit has an Direct FTP function, which allows you to connect to any XDCAM device or computer with an FTP server function and transfer files with a few simple operations in the GUI screen. The following table lists the types of file transfers that this unit can execute. Transfer direction Upload Transfer target One or more clips Multiple clips with clip list Part of one clip Download One clip Function put partial put get Note File transfers with this function are limited to clips (highresolution data) and clip list files. To transfer files of other types (proxy AV data, files in the General and User Data directories, and so on), operate after establishing an FTP connection (see page 228). Upload clip (put) Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Download clip (get) PDW-HD1500 Network Laptop computer a) Local host (this unit) a) The following software requirements must be satisfied. • An FTP server function must be available. • In the case of Windows, Microsoft Window IIS (Internet Information Service) Version 7.0 or higher. • In the case of Macintosh, Mac OS X Version 10.5.6 or higher. 140 Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) Material server Remote host Preparations for clip transfers Check the following points. • This unit and the target transfer device (XDCAM device or computer) must be supplied with stable power and must be connected to a network. • The settings under the NETWORK 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu must be set to values that allow network connections. • The ETHERNET/USB item on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu must be set to ENABL. • For XDCAM devices that support UPnP (universal plug and play), the UPnP function must be enabled (the setting may vary). 3 The Select Transfer Type screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears. 4 To transfer while preserving the UMID of the transfer source clips Check the “UMID Unchange” option. Note To reconnect to a remote host The Reconnect button is enabled if the most recent operation successfully established a connection to a remote host. You can select “Reconnect” and press the SET/S.SEL button or MENU knob to reconnect to that host. The host is selected automatically and the screen changes directly to the Connecting Status screen (see step 9 in the procedure). For the settings on other XDCAM devices, refer to the operation manuals supplied with the devices. Uploading clips Note The Reconnect button is not enabled if the most recent operation failed to connect to a remote host. To upload entire clips 1 Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens If the remote host is a computer, clips are transferred with the UMID unchanged regardless of this setting. To enable the UPnP function on this unit, set UPnP on the NETWORK SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu to ENABLE, and then power the unit off and on again. See page 114 for more information about thumbnail screen operations. Select the type of clip transfer. Selected Clips: Clips selected in step 1. All Clips & ClipList: All clips and clip lists on the disc. To enable the UPnP function The UPnP (universal plug and play) function allows devices to be easily connected to networks. The following XDCAM devices support UPnP. • PDW-F1600 • PDW-HD1500 • PDW-HR1 • PDW-F800 • PDW-700 • PDW-740 Proceed as follows to upload selected clips or all clips and clip lists on the disc. Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. 5 Select ,, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The Select Remote Host screen appears. In the clip thumbnail screen, select the clip to upload (multiple selections possible). To upload all clips and clip lists on the disc, start from step 2. 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu. Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) 141 Item DHCP 6 Setting Setting that specifies whether to acquire the IP address automatically from a DHCP server Enabled: Acquire automatically Disabled: Do not acquire automatically Address Status Method used to set IP address Manual Set: Manually DHCP: DHCP function AutoIP: Auto IP addressing function Undefined: Nothing specified Default Gateway Default gateway Select the remote host (the target device to which you want to transfer the clips). You can register up to four remote hosts. Remote Host 1 to 3: Register these in the settings screen. Remote Host 4(UPnP): A remote host that supports UPnP (universal plug and play) is detected and registered automatically (see “To enable the UPnP function” (page 141)). Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens To check remote hosts discovered by the UPnP function Select “Hosts Discovered via UPnP”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. (If the UPnP function of this unit is disabled, a confirmation screen appears prompting you to enable it. Select “OK” and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The UPnP function will be enabled when you power the unit off and then on again.) The Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen appears. (Some time may be required before the search for remote hosts finishes.) Select the name of a remote host from the list, and press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A network settings screen appears (see step 7). If you establish a connection with the selected remote host, the network settings are saved in Remote Host 4. From the next time that you select “Remote Host 4(UPnP)”, the remote host that you select here will be connected. To check the network settings of this unit Select “Network Config”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The following network settings appear. Item Host Name IP Address Subnet Mask 142 Setting Host name IP address a) Subnet mask Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) a) An IP address determined by a DHCP server appears instantly in this field. Select OK and press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob to return to the previous screen. 7 Select ,, and then press the SET/ S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A network settings screen for the remote host appears. Item Host Name Port Setting Host name or IP address. (If this is a host name, a DNS server must be available on the connected network. Specification of an IP address is recommended.) Port used by the FTP server (normally “21”). Item Setting Device Type The type of the remote host • If the remote host is an XDCAM device, select the model name or “Other XDCAM model” (if the model name is not in the list) from the 9 Select “Connect”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The settings are saved and the Connecting Status screen appears. list of model names. a) • If the remote host is a computer, select “Others(PC Server)” from the list of model names. Description Path Password a) If an XDCAM device is selected as the Device Type, then the User Name and Password are set automatically to the default, and you do not need to make the Port and Path settings. Simply selecting the Host Name (or as appropriate the Description) is enough to fulfill the requirements for connection. If the User Name or Password of the device that you want to connect to changes, set them here. 8 Set the various items. To select an item Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor, and then push the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. A software keyboard appears so that you can enter a setting. The following table lists the various stages that appear in the connection status screen and describes the corresponding processing. Item DNS Name Resolving Description When host was specified by a host name instead of an IP address, the unit is querying a DNS server for the host’s IP address. ping - echo The unit has issued a ping back (communications established) command and is waiting for a response. Open Remote The unit is connecting to the Host remote host over the specified port. FTP Login The unit is logging in to the remote host with specified user name and password. Change When a path was specified, Directory the unit is changing to the specified directory. The status indicated beside each item lights in yellow during processing for that item, and lights in green when the processing finishes. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens User Name Comment about the remote host. (UTF-8 encoding, up to 127 bytes. This setting has no effect on the connection.) The setting that you make here appears as the remote host name in the Select Remote Host screen (see step 5 of the procedure). If the remote host is a computer, path to the transfer destination directory. (This is not needed if the remote host is an XDCAM device.) User name for FTP login. (If the remote host is an XDCAM device, the default is “admin”.) Password for FTP login. (If the remote host is an XDCAM device, the default is the model name, such as “pdw-850”.) If an error occurs The status indicator changes to red. Correct the condition that caused the error and repeat the operation. If you cannot connect Check the following points. • Make sure that this unit and the remote host are correctly connected to the network. • If the remote host is an XDCAM device, make sure that it is not displaying a GUI screen. • If the remote host is an XDCAM device, make sure that a disc is inserted. Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) 143 When the connection is complete (the indicators of all items have turned green), the Upload Clips via Direct FTP screen appears. • Set the ETHERNET/USB item on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to DSABL. To check the connection on the remote host side If the remote host is an XDCAM device, check that the “NETWORK!” has appeared in the display or other status display location. When several files are to be transferred, the entire transfer task is cancelled when the first transfer failure occurs. Subsequent clips are not transferred. Note When the transfer of all files has finished, the Uploading Result Report screen appears. Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen. The progress bars show the progress of the transfer. If multiple clips are being transferred, a count of the clips that have been successfully transferred appears. If the remote host is an XDCAM device, the disc usage also appears. (It does not appear if the remote host is a computer). Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens If a file of the same name already exists at the transfer destination The file name is changed so that it does not conflict with the file at the destination. The name of the file on the transfer source (this unit) appears in the “Original” field, and the name of the file on the transfer destination appears in the “Copy” field. 1) 1) If the clip name is a standard name, it is changed to the unused clip name with the smallest number. (Example: If names C0001 to C0020 are in use, the name “C0021”.) If the clip name is a user-defined name, a serial number is appended to the clip name. (Example: If the name is “EveningNews”, “EveningNews(1)”.) To cancel the processing Do one of the following. • Select “Abort: Immediately”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. • If you are transferring multiple clips, select “Abort: After this clip”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. (The transfer of subsequent clips will be cancelled after transfer of the current clip finishes.) 144 Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) To upload part of a clip You can select part of a clip in the expand thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen and upload that part. Expand thumbnail screen: The clip is divided arbitrarily into parts of equal length, regardless of content. Use this method if you do not need to specify the transfer range precisely. Chapter thumbnail screen: Use this method if you want to transfer a specific range. (By setting essence marks at the start point and end point of the transfer range, you can specify the range with a precision of one frame.) 1 In the clip thumbnail screen, select a clip and press the EXPAND or CHAPTER button. The expand thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen appears. 2 Select the transfer range. To select multiple thumbnails While holding the SHIFT key down, turn the MENU knob, or press the B/IN or b/OUT button. • When more 301 or more clips are stored on a remote host, the denominator indicating the clip total at the upper right is shown as “- - -”, and the names of the 301st and following clips are not displayed. • File names containing other than ASCII characters (kanji and so on) are not displayed. The duration of the transfer range appears in the lower right of the screen. Note When the selected range (duration) in the expand thumbnail screen is less than two seconds, it is expanded automatically to two seconds. 3 Execute step 2 to 9 of the previous section “To upload entire clips”. 4 The download starts. When the download finishes, the Downloading Result Report screen appears. Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen. Downloading clips Proceed as follows to download clips from a remote host (such as other XDCAM device devices or a material server). See page 114 for information about thumbnail screen operations. 1 Display the Disc Menu. 2 Select Download Clip via Direct FTP, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices In the field or another environment where the devices are not connected to a network, you can copy (upload) clips between XDCAM devices by connecting them directly. The example in the following procedure shows how to copy a clip from this unit to a PDW-HD1500. Insert discs into both units and proceed as follows. 1 Connect this unit and the PDWHD1500 by a network cable. The cable can be either a cross cable or a straight cable. 3 Execute steps 6 to 9 of “To upload entire clips” (page 141). If the connection succeeds, the Select Clip to Download screen appears. This unit Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens The Select Remote Host screen of the Download Clip via Direct FTP command appears. Select a clip to download, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Network cable (not supplied) PDW-HD1500 Notes 2 Set up the two units as follows. • If the remote host is a computer, only the MXF files in the specified directory appear. Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) 145 Settings on this unit Item POWER SAVE page of OPERATION menu NETWORK SETTING page of MAINTENANCE menu The Select Remote Host screen appears. Setting ETHERNET/ ENABLE USB DHCP UPnP ENABLE ENABLE 9 Select “Hosts Discovered via UPnP”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The detected connection destination device (the PDW-HD1500) appears in the Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen. 10 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Settings on the PDW-HD1500 Item Item M50 in the MAINTENANCE menu: DHCP Item M59 in the MAINTENANCE menu: UPnP Setting ENABLE ENABLE 3 Power both units off and on again, and wait for about three minutes. 4 Check that the IP addresses of the two units have been set as follows by the Auto-IP function. Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens IP address of this unit Item NETWORK IP SETTING page of ADDRESS MAINTENANCE menu Setting 169.254.XXX. XXX (X: any number) IP address of the PDW-HD1500 Item Item M51 in the MAINTENANCE menu: IP ADDRESS PRESET Setting 169.254.XXX.XXX (X: any number) 5 In the clip list thumbnail screen of this unit, select the clip to copy (upload). 6 Display the Thumbnail Menu. 7 Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. With , selected, the Select Transfer Type screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears. 8 146 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) Detailed information about the connection destination device (the PDW-HD1500) appears. 11 With “Connect” selected, press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. Transfer of the clip begins as soon as the connection is established. During transfer of the clip, “NETWORK!” appears in the display of the connection destination device (the PDW-HD1500). When transfer of the clip completes, an Uploading Result Report appears on the screen. Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob to return to the clip thumbnail screen. 12 Check the copied clip in the clip thumbnail screen of the connection destination device (the PDW-HD1500). Shortcut List You can access many functions from the keyboard, without displaying a menu (shortcut operations). Shortcuts are available for the following functions. The plus sign (+) indicates that one button is held down while another is pressed, for example “SHIFT + RESET/RETURN”. Note The same shortcut may access different functions, depending on the screen that is active when it is executed. Function Clip List Thumbnail (display clip list thumbnail screen) Expand Thumbnail (display expand thumbnail screen) Chapter Thumbnail (display chapter thumbnail screen) Essence Mark Thumbnail (display essence mark thumbnail screen) Add Sub Clip (add sub clip) Delete Clip (delete clip) Lock/Unlock Clip (lock or unlock clip) Set Inpoint (set In point) Set Outpoint (set Out point) Cue up Inpoint (cue up In point) Cue up Outpoint (cue up Out point) Reset Inpoint (reset In point) Reset Outpoint (reset Out point) Cue up (cue up) Operation SUB CLIP/DISC MENU DISP SEL/EXPAND HOLD/CHAPTER SHIFT + THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK Cue up & Play (cue up and play) PLAY/PAUSE b) SHIFT + down-arrow or F FWD SHIFT + up-arrow or F REV SHIFT + NEXT SHIFT + PREV SHIFT + right-arrow or SHIFT + left-arrow THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens Shortcut List 147 Page Down (switch to next page) Page Up (switch to previous page) Go To End (go to the last item) Go To Top (go to the first item) Select Multi Clip (select multiple clips) Exit (exit the current thumbnail screen) SHIFT + SET/S.SEL SHIFT + RESET/RETURN SHIFT + STOP Left-arrow + SET/S.SEL Right-arrow + SET/S.SEL Left-arrow + PREV or left-arrow + NEXT Right-arrow + PREV or right-arrow + NEXT Left-arrow + RESET/RETURN Right-arrow + RESET/RETURN SET/S.SEL a) a) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to “Cue up & Play”, then play starts as soon as cueup is ready. b) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to “Cue up & Play”, then pressing the SET/ S.SEL button has the same effect. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu Organization The following chart shows the organization of menus in this camcorder. TOP MENU USER [A] USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION [B] PAINT [C] MAINTENANCE [D] FILE [E] DIAGNOSIS [F] [A] USER menu USER Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 148 Menu Organization OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SUPERIMPOSE LCD REC FUNCTION ASSIGNABLE SW VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 ' ! ' LED MARKER 1 GAIN SW VF SETTING VF DETAIL AUTO IRIS SHOT ID SHOT DISP SET STATUS LENS FILE USER FILE [B] OPERATION menu OPERATION OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SUPERIMPOSE LCD REC FUNCTION ASSIGNABLE SW POWER SAVE VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 VF DISP 3 VF DISP 4 ' ! ' LED ' ! ' LED STD MARKER 1 MARKER 2 FOCUS ASSIST GAIN SW VF SETTING VF DETAIL AUTO IRIS SHOT ID SHOT DISP SET STATUS WHITE SETTING OFFSET WHT SHT ENABLE LENS FILE FORMAT SOURCE SEL UMID SET CLIP TITLE FILE NAMING MEMORY REC GPS SETUP [C] PAINT menu PAINT [E] FILE menu SW STATUS WHITE BLACK/FLARE GAMMA BLACK GAMMA KNEE 1 KNEE 2 DETAIL 1 DETAIL 2 SD DETAIL SKIN DETAIL MTX LINEAR MTX MULTI V MODULATION SATURATION SATURATION MODE NOISE SUPPRESS SCENE FILE FILE [F] DIAGNOSIS menu DIAGNOSIS [D] MAINTENANCE menu MAINTENANCE HOURS METER TIME/DATE ROM VERSION 1 ROM VERSION 2 ROM VERSION 3 DEV STATUS CA STATUS TOP menu and top-level menus The TOP menu appears when, with no menu displayed, you hold down the MENU knob and set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. The TOP menu contains only top-level menus. <TOP MENU> USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS When you select a top-level menu, the most recently shown page of that menu appears. The CONTENTS page appears when the menu is selected for the first time. For details about how to use menus, see page 193. USER menu This menu allows you to add any desired page from the OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus to suit your needs. By gathering frequently used pages on the USER menu beforehand, you can call up them quickly whenever you need them. This menu is normally displayed when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON. Menu Organization Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings WHITE SHADING BLACK SHADING LEVEL ADJUST BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2 AUDIO-1 AUDIO-2 AUDIO-3 WRR SETTING TIMECODE ESSENCE MARK CAM CONFIG 1 CAM CONFIG 2 CAM CONFIG 3 PRESET WHITE DCC ADJUST AUTO IRIS 2 GENLOCK ND COMP AUTO SHADING APR NETWORK 1 NETWORK 2 WPS Wi-Fi UP CONVERTER SHUTTER SELECT META OUT HEADSET SELECT USER FILE USER FILE 2 ALL FILE SCENE FILE REFERENCE USER GAMMA LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE 2 LENS FILE 3 USB MEMORY 149 USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs. ALL menu This menu allows you to handle all items in the OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus as if they were in one menu. OPERATION menu This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated. PAINT menu This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although you can also use an external remote control unit to set the items on this menu, this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors. MAINTENANCE menu Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings This menu contains items for making settings for audio, timecode, essence marks, and battery. FILE menu This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the camcorder memory or on a USB flash drive. The following files can be saved. User files User files save the setting items and setting data of customized USER menus. You can save up to 100 user files on a USB flash drive. Once you save a user file on a USB flash drive, you can easily set the USER menu to your preference by loading the file. For details on user files, see “Saving and Recalling User Files” (page 220). ALL files ALL files saves the setting data of all of the menus. You can save up to 100 ALL files on a USB flash drive. 150 Menu Organization Once a camcorder is set up according to your preferences and you save an ALL file on a USB flash drive, you can easily set other camcorders to those settings by loading the data from the USB flash drive. Note Device specific data (output levels and shading that requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved. Scene files In the scene file, the setting values of PAINT menu items set to shoot a particular scene are saved. You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files on a USB flash drive. For example, first adjust the settings to shoot a rehearsal of a particular scene and then save them as a scene file. Then load that file before the actual shooting so that you can quickly recreate setup conditions of the rehearsal. Reference files Reference files save the reference values that are set when STANDARD is executed in the SCENE FILE page of the PAINT menu. You can save one reference file in the internal memory of the unit and one on a USB flash drive. Lens files Lens files save the setting data used to compensate for the characteristics of lenses, such as flare, white shading, and auto iris gain. You can save up to 32 lens files in the internal memory of the unit and up to 100 lens files on a USB flash drive. DIAGNOSIS menu This menu shows the digital hours meter, the ROM version, and information about the internal device status of the camcorder. Menu List Tips • • • • The bold-faced numbers designate the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory. The bold-faced settings are the factory default settings. The initial value of items with a setting range of –99 to 99 is 0. When the setup value in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the value is a relative value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual. OPERATION menu No. Page Item Settings Description 01 OUTPUT 1 SDI OUT 1 SELECT OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 1 connector. SDI OUT 2 SELECT OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI/ VF Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 2 connector. SDI OUT 2 SUPER OFF/ON Sets the superimposed information output from the SDI OUT 2 connector. Note Text information is always displayed, regardless of this setting, when SDI OUT 2 SELECT is set to VF. VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector. Note When R, G, or B is selected, turning the power of the unit off and on changes the setting to Y. TEST OUT SUPER OFF/ON Sets the superimposed information output from the TEST OUT connector. Note Regardless of this setting, text data is output from this connector when the setting of TEST OUT SELECT is Y, R, G, or B. During the display of text data, you can hide the text data by switching this item from ON to OFF. (It is also hidden in the viewfinder.) Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings TEST OUT SELECT 151 No. Page Item 02 OUTPUT 2 DOWN CON MODE CROP/SQEZE (Does not appear when the FORMAT page item SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY item is set to 23.9P) Sets the conversion mode for down-converted output. WIDE ID THROU/AUTO Specifies whether to add wide picture information to the SD output signal. THROU: Output the video signals without adding wide picture information. AUTO: When the DOWN CON MODE item is set to SQEZE, add wide picture information to the output video signals. SUPER(VFDISP) OFF/ON SUPER(MENU) OFF/ON SUPER(TC) OFF/ON When the SDI OUT 2 SUPER item or the TEST OUT SUPER item on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON, turn the output of text (superimposed) information from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector on or off for each item. SUPER(MARKER) OFF/ON 03 SUPER IMPOSE Description Turns the marker display on or off in the output from the following connectors. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings • SDI OUT 2 connector (when SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to HDSDI/SDSDI, and SDI OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON) • TEST OUT connector (when TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON) SUPER(ZEBRA) OFF/ON Turns the output zebra display from the following connectors on or off. • SDI OUT 2 connector (when SDI OUT 2 SELECT is set to HDSDI or SDSDI, and SDI OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON on the OUTPUT 1 page) • TEST OUT connector (when TEST OUT SUPER is set to ON on the OUTPUT 1 page) 04 152 Settings LCD Menu List LCD COLOR (–99 to 99) Adjusts the LCD color. LCD MARKER&ZEBRA OFF/ON Turns the marker and zebra display in the LCD monitor on or off. No. Page Item Settings Description 05 REC FUNCTION SLOW & QUICK OFF/ON FRAME RATE 1080/23.98P: 1 to 48 1080/25P: 1 to 50 1080/29.97P: 1 to 60 For details, see “Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion” (page 88). CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF/CACHE/A. INT/ M. INT CACHE REC TIME TAKE TOTAL TIME For details, see “Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored 0-2S/2-4S/4-6S/6-8S/8- picture data (Picture Cache function)” (page 83) and “Time10S/18-20S/28-30S lapse video (Interval Rec 5MIN/10MIN/15MIN/ function)” (page 84). 20MIN/30MIN/40MIN/ 50MIN/1H/2H/3H/4H/ 5H/7H/10H/15H/20H/ 30H/40H/50H/70H/ 100H REC TIME 5SEC/10SEC/15SEC/ 20SEC/30SEC/40SEC/ 50SEC/1MIN to 85MIN PRE-LIGHTING OFF/2SEC/5SEC/ 10SEC TRIGGER INTERVAL M/1SEC to 10SEC/ 15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/ 40SEC/50SEC/1MIN to 10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/ 30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/ 1H/2H/3H/4H/6H/12H/ 24H DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF/ON For details, see “Exchanging discs while recording (Disc Exchange Cache function)” (page 89). CLIP CONT REC OFF/ON For details, see “Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function” (page 90). LIVE LOGGING OFF/LIVE/VIEW For details, see “Using the Live Logging function” (page 99). Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings NUMBER OF FRAME When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422 50, HD420 HQ, or HD420 SP: 2/6/12 When either SYSTEM LINE or REC FORMAT is set to another setting: 1/3/ 6 153 No. Page 06 ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW <1> SW ASSIGN SW <2> Item Settings Description For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 209). ASSIGN SW <3> ASSIGN SW <4> ASSIGN SW <5> ASSIGN SW <RET> 07 ZOOM SPEED 0 to 20 to 99 RETURN VIDEO OFF/ON POWER SAVE ETHERNET/USB REC AUDIO OUT 08 09 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 10 11 VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 VF DISP 3 VF DISP 4 DSABL/ENABL EE/SAVE TEST OUT SAVE OFF/ON Wi-Fi DSABL/ENABL VF DISP OFF/ON VF DISP MODE 1/2/3 DISP EXTENDER OFF/ON DISP FILTER OFF/ON DISP WHITE OFF/ON DISP GAIN OFF/ON DISP SHUTTER OFF/ON DISP AUDIO OFF/ON DISP DISC OFF/ON DISP IRIS OFF/ON DISP ZOOM OFF/ON DISP COLOR TEMP OFF/ON DISP BATT REMAIN INT/VOLT/AUTO DISP DC IN OFF/ON DISP 16:9/4:3 ID OFF/ON DISP WRR RF LVL OFF/ON DISP REC FORMAT OFF/ON DISP CLIP NO(PB) OFF/ON DISP TIMECODE OFF/ON DISP ALAC OFF/ON DISP CLIP NAME PLAN/AUTO DISP SCENE FILE OFF/ON DISP CONT REC OFF/ON LOW LIGHT OFF/ON LOW LIGHT LEVEL (–99 to 99) VF BATT WARNING 10%/20% ABSOLUTE VALUE OFF/ON DISP GPS OFF/ON WIRELESS_STATUS OFF/ON EXT. MEDIA REMAIN OFF/ON SENDING_CLIP_INFO OFF/ON 154 Menu List For details, see “Setting power saving functions” (page 212). For details, see “Selecting the display items” (page 201). No. Page Item Settings Description 12 ‘!’ LED GAIN <!> OFF/ON SHUTTER <!> OFF/ON For details, see “Indicators” (page 27). 13 ‘!’ LED STD WHITE PRESET <!> OFF/ON CC 5600K <!> OFF/ON ATW RUN <!> OFF/ON EXTENDER <!> OFF/ON FILTER ND <!> OFF/ON FILTER CC <!> OFF/ON OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON GAIN <!> 0dB/LOW/MID/HIGH FILTER ND <!> For details, see “Indicators” OFF/ECS/ 1/100 / 1/125 (page 27). / 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 / The setting of SHUTTER <!> 1/2000 /SLS varies depending on the resolution and system frequency. P/A/B/PA/PB/AB See page 28 for information about OFF/ON the standard settings, and see OFF/ON page 60 for information about the OFF/ON settings. 1/2/3/4 FILTER CC <!> A/B/C/D OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON SHUTTER <!> WHITE BAL <!> CC 5600K <!> ATW RUN <!> EXTENDER <!> 14 MARKER 2 MARKER OFF/ON CENTER OFF/ON CENTER MARK 1/2/3/4 SAFTY ZONE OFF/ON SAFTY AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95% ASPECT OFF/ON ASPECT SELECT 15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/ 2.35 ASPECT MASK OFF/ON ASPECT MASK LVL 0 to 12 to 15 100% MARKER OFF/ON USER BOX OFF/ON USER BOX WIDTH 3 to 240 to 479 USER BOX HEIGHT 3 to 135 to 269 USER BOX H POS –477 to 0 to 476 USER BOX V POS –267 to 0 to 266 CENTER H POS –480 to 0 to 479 CENTER V POS –270 to 0 to 269 For details, see “Setting the marker display” (page 203). Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 15 MARKER 1 ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF/ON ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95% 16 FOCUS ASSIST FOCUS ASSIST IND OFF/ON FOCUS IND POS BOTTM/LEFT/TOP/ RIGHT For details, see “Using the Focus Assist function” (page 81). FOCUS AREA MARK OFF/ON Menu List 155 No. Page Item Settings 17 GAIN SW GAIN LOW –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/ For details, see “Setting gain 6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/ values for the GAIN selector 24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB positions” (page 208). GAIN MID –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/ 6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/ 24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB GAIN HIGH –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/ 6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/ 24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB GAIN TURBO –6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/ 6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/ 24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB TURBO SW IND OFF/ON 18 VF SETTING SHOCKLESS GAIN OFF/ON ZEBRA OFF/ON ZEBRA SELECT 1/2/BOTH ZEBRA1 DET LVL 20% to 70% to 107% ZEBRA1 APT LVL 1% to 10% to 20% ZEBRA2 DET LVL 52% to 100% to 109% VF DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99) Description For details, see “Setting the viewfinder” (page 204). VF ASPECT (SD) AUTO/16:9 (When the REC FORMAT item is set to IMX50, IMX40, IMX30, or DVCAM) 19 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 156 20 VF DETAIL AUTO IRIS Menu List VF DETAIL OFF/ON VF DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99) CRISP (–99 to 99) FREQUENCY 9M/14M/18M FAT MODE OFF/ON FLICKER OFF/ON COLOR DETAIL OFF/ON COLOR SEL BLUE/RED/YELL PEAK COLOR OFF/ON CHROMA LEVEL 0%/25%/50%/100% IRIS OVERRIDE OFF/ON IRIS SPEED (–99 to 99) CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF/ON IRIS WINDOW 1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR IRIS WINDOW IND OFF/ON IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 135 to 269 IRIS VAR H POS –460 to 0 to 459 IRIS VAR V POS –250 to 0 to 249 For details, see “Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment” (page 64). No. Page Item Settings Description 21 SHOT ID ID-1 Blank/up to 12 characters For details, see “Setting the shot ID” (page 205). ID-2 Blank/up to 12 characters ID-3 Blank/up to 12 characters ID-4 Blank/up to 12 characters 22 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF/ON SHOT TIME OFF/ON SHOT MODEL NAME OFF/ON SHOT SERIAL NO OFF/ON SHOT ID SEL OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ ID-4 SHOT 16:9 CHARA OFF/ON For details, see “Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars” (page 205). SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF/ON 23 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL OFF/ON STATUS SYSTEM OFF/ON STATUS FUNCTION OFF/ON STATUS AUDIO OFF/ON STATUS GPS OFF/ON For details, see “Displaying the status confirmation screens” (page 206). Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu List 157 No. Page Item 24 WHITE SETTING WHITE SWITCH <B> MEM/ATW Settings Specifies the operating mode when the WHITE BAL switch is set to the B side. MEM: Auto white balance ATW: Auto tracing white balance SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF/1/2/3 Specifies the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch is changed to a new setting (1 is fastest) ATW HOLD MEMORY Selects whether ATW (auto tracing white balance) settings are saved in the memory (A or B) selected by the WHITE BAL switch, in addition to the dedicated ATW memory. OFF: Not saved ON: Saved OFF/ON Description For details, see “To save white balance settings obtained by ATW” (page 58). Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 158 25 ATW SPEED 1/2/3/4/5 Switches the transition speed of auto tracing white balance (ATW) (1 is fastest) AWB FIXED AREA OFF/ON Executes AWB (auto white balance) at the center of the screen. FILTER WHT MEM OFF/ON Specifies whether to allocate a white balance memory slot for each position number of the FILTER selector. OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF/ON WARM-COOL <A> WARM-COOL BAL <A> For details, see “Specifying an Displays reference color offset for the auto white balance setting” (page 217). temperature (–99 to 99) OFFSET WHITE <B> OFF/ON Menu List WARM-COOL <B> Displays reference color temperature WARM-COOL BAL <B> (–99 to 99) No. Page Settings Description 26 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS OFF/ON SHUTTER SLS OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/32 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/33 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/40 OFF/ON The items which can be set differ depending on the setting of the SYSTEM FREQUENCY item on the FORMAT page. For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 60). SHUTTER 1/48 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/50 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/60 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/96 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/100 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/120 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/125 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/250 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/500 OFF/ON SHUTTER 1/1000 OFF/ON 27 28 LENS FILE FORMAT Item SHUTTER 1/2000 OFF/ON LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 F.ID Display only L.ID Display only L.MF Display only SYSTEM LINE SYSTEM FREQUENCY REC FORMAT When the recording format is 1080/23.98P, more shutter speeds can be selected and the SHT ENABLE 2 page appears to display them. For details, see “Selecting the lens file” (page 217). 1080/720 The selectable SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings differ depending on the setting of SYSTEM LINE. For details, see HD422 50/HD420 HQ/ “Setting the Recording Format” HD420 SP/IMX50/ (page 53). IMX40/IMX30/ DVCAM 59.9i/29.9P/50i/25P/ 23.9P/59.9P/50P The selectable settings differ depending on the setting of REC FORMAT. For details, see “Setting the Recording Format” (page 53). AU DATA LEN (IMX) 16bit/24bit (When the REC FORMAT item is set to IMX50, IMX40, or IMX30) COUNTRY NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC AREA/PAL AREA For details, see “Setting the Area of Use” (page 38). Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings ASPECT RATIO (SD) 16:9/4:3 (When the REC FORMAT item is set to IMX50, IMX40, IMX30, or DVCAM) 159 No. Page Item 29 SOURCE SEL FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO (When stereo microphone is connected) Settings Input mode selection for front microphone. REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM/EXT For details, see “Recording video from external devices” (page 98). EXT VIDEO SOURCE VBS/SDSDI/HDSDI WIDE MODE(EXT) Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 160 30 UMID SET Menu List Description AUTO/16:9 When the input signal is SD, select the method that determines whether the signal is treated as a wide signal. AUTO: When wide picture information is detected in the input signal, treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up-converter operating mode to squeeze mode. Record wide picture information when recording SD. When wide picture information is not detected, set the upconverter operating mode to edge crop mode and do not record wide picture information. 16:9: Always treat the signal as a wide signal and set the upconverter operating mode to squeeze mode. Record wide picture information when recording SD. SETUP REMOVE 0.0%/7.5% (When the COUNTRY item is set to “NTSC(J)AREA” or “NTSC AREA”) Selects whether to modify the setup level of input video signals. 7.5%: Remove the setup. (Select when signals with 7.5% setup are input.) 0.0%: Do not remove the setup. (Select when signals without setup are input.) ORGANIZATION COUNTRY CODE Blank/up to 4 characters For details, see “Setting the Blank/up to 4 characters UMID data” (page 218). USER CODE Blank/up to 4 characters TIME ZONE 00 to 3F No. Page Item Settings Description 31 CLIP TITLE TITLE DSABL/ENABL For details, see “Assigning userdefined clip titles automatically” (page 91). SELECT PREFIX EXEC (When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”) CLEAR NUMERIC EXEC (When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”) LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC (When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”) TITLE/up to 10 PREFIX (When the TITLE item characters is set to “ENABL”) NUMERIC 00001 to 99999 (When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”) 32 33 MEMORY REC GPS SETUP C****/FREE AUTO NAMING (When the NAMING FORM item is set to “FREE”) C****/TITLE/PLAN MEMORY REC DSABL/ENABL COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC COPY ALL CLIPS EXEC ABORT COPY EXEC DEL ALL MEM CLP EXEC FORMAT MEMORY EXEC GPS OFF/ON TIME ZONE For details, see “Assigning userdefined names to clips and clip lists” (page 94). For details, see “Recording proxy data” (page 100). For details, see “Obtaining GPS location information” (page 103). GPS DATUM Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 34 FILE NAMING NAMING FORM 161 PAINT menu No. Page Item Settings Description 01 SW STATUS GAMMA OFF/ON Turns the gamma correction on or off. BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns the black gamma correction on or off. MATRIX OFF/ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user-set matrix correction functions on or off. KNEE OFF/ON Turns the knee correction on or off. WHITE CLIP OFF/ON Turns the white clipping correction on or off. 02 WHITE Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 162 Menu List DETAIL OFF/ON Turns the detail signal on or off. APERTURE OFF/ON Turns the aperture function on or off. FLARE OFF/ON Turns the flare function on or off. TEST SAW OFF/ON Selects the test signal. COLOR TEMP <A> Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of temperature. WHITE A. C TEMP BAL <A> (–99 to 99) Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory. R GAIN <A> (–99 to 99) Only the value of R GAIN is changed. B GAIN <A> (–99 to 99) Only the value of B GAIN is changed. COLOR TEMP <B> Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of temperature. WHITE B. C TEMP BAL <B> (–99 to 99) Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory. R GAIN <B> (–99 to 99) Only the value of R GAIN is changed. B GAIN <B> (–99 to 99) Only the value of B GAIN is changed. Page Item Settings Description 03 BLACK/ FLARE MASTER BLACK (–99 to 99) Adjusts the master black level. R BLACK (–99 to 99) Adjusts the R black level. B BLACK (–99 to 99) Adjusts the B black level. MASTER FLARE (–99 to 99) Adjusts the flare level of the master. R FLARE (–99 to 99) Adjusts the R flare level. G FLARE (–99 to 99) Adjusts the G flare level. B FLARE (–99 to 99) Adjusts the B flare level. FLARE OFF/ON Turns the flare correction circuit on or off. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector. GAMMA OFF/ON Turns the gamma correction function on or off. STEP GAMMA 0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 Sets the gamma correction curve by steps. MASTER GAMMA (–99 to 99) Sets the master gamma correction curve. R GAMMA (–99 to 99) Sets the R gamma correction curve. G GAMMA (–99 to 99) Sets the G gamma correction curve. B GAMMA (–99 to 99) Sets the B gamma correction curve. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector. GAMMA TABLE STD/HG/USER Selects the gamma type. STD: Standard gamma HG: Hyper gamma USER: User gamma GAM TABLE (STD) 1 to 5 to 6 Selects the standard gamma type. 1: Corresponds to SD camcorder 2: x 4.5 gain 3: x 3.5 gain 4: Corresponds to SMPTE-240M 5: Corresponds to ITU-R709 6: x 5.0 gain GAM TABLE (HG) 1 to 4 Selects the hyper gamma type. 1: Compress 325% video input to100% video output. 2: Compress 460% video input to100% video output. 3: Compress 325% video input to109% video output. 4: Compress 460% video input to109% video output. GAM TABLE (USER) 1 to 5 Selects the user gamma type. 04 GAMMA Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings No. 163 No. Page Item Settings Description 05 BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns the black gamma correction on or off. 06 07 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 164 08 KNEE 1 KNEE 2 DETAIL 1 Menu List BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/ HIGH Sets the range affected by black gamma. BLACK GAM LEVEL (–99 to 99) Adjusts the master black gamma. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector. KNEE OFF/ON Turns the knee correction circuit on or off. KNEE POINT (M) 50.0% to 95.0% to 109.0% Sets the knee point level. KNEE SLOPE (M) (–99 to 99) Set the knee slope level. KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON Turns the knee saturation function on or off. KNEE SAT LEVEL (–99 to 99) Sets the knee saturation level. WHITE CLIP OFF/ON Turns the white clipping function on or off. WHITE CLIP LEVEL NTSC: 90.0% to 108.0% to 109.0% PAL: 90.0% to 105.0% to 109.0% Adjusts the white clipping level. KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON Turns the Knee Saturation function on and off. KNEE POINT (R) –45.0% to 0.0% to 14.0% KNEE SLOPE (R) (–99 to 99) KNEE POINT (G) –45.0% to 0.0% to 14.0% When KNEE SATURATION is set to OFF, set the RGB knee point levels and knee slope levels individually. KNEE SLOPE (G) (–99 to 99) KNEE POINT (B) –45.0% to 0.0% to 14.0% KNEE SLOPE (B) (–99 to 99) DETAIL OFF/ON Sets the detail correction function on or off. APERTURE OFF/ON Turns the aperture correction function on or off. DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99) Sets the general level of the detail signal. APERTURE LEVEL (–99 to 99) Sets the aperture correction level. DTL H/V RATIO (–99 to 99) Sets the level of the V detail signal. CRISPENING (–99 to 99) Sets the crispening level. LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON Turns the level depend function on or off. LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99) Sets the level of the level depend. DETAIL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99) Sets the frequency of the H detail signal. No. Page Item Settings Description 09 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF/ON Turns the knee aperture function on or off. 10 SD DETAIL KNEE APT LVL (–99 to 99) Sets the knee aperture level. DETAIL LIMIT (–99 to 99) Sets the both detail black and white limiters. DTL WHT LMT (–99 to 99) Sets the detail white limiter. DTL BLK LMT (–99 to 99) Sets the detail black limiter. DTL V-BLK LMT (–99 to 99) Sets the V detail black limiter. V DTL CREATION NAM/G/R+G/Y Selects the source signal of the V DTL signal. Selects the operation mode of DTL H/V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page. H/V: H and V increase and decrease in inverse proportion V: V DTL only enabled SD DETAIL OFF/ON Turns the SD detail correction on or off. SD DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99) Sets the general level of the SD detail signal. SD CRISPENING (–99 to 99) Sets the SD crispening level. SD DTL WHT LIMIT (–99 to 99) Sets the SD detail white limiter. SD DTL BLK LIMIT (–99 to 99) Sets the SD detail black limiter. SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ON Turns the SD level depend function on or off. SD LV DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99) Sets the level of the SD level depend. SD DTL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99) Sets the frequency of the SD H detail signal. SD DTL H/V RATIO Sets the level of the SD V detail signal. (–99 to 99) SD CROSS COLOR (–99 to 99) (When NTSC(J)AREA or NTSC AREA is selected on the FORMAT page) Sets the SD cross color reduction level. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings H/V CONTROL MODE H/V /V 165 No. Page 11 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL Item Settings Description OFF/ON Turns on or off all of channels 1, 2 and 3 for the color detail function. SKIN DETECT Moves to color detection Executes the color detail page. function. SKIN AREA IND OFF/ON Turns on and off the function that displays a zebra pattern where color was detected. When this is ON, a zebra pattern is output from the following connectors. • SDI OUT 2 connector (when all of the following are true: SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to HDSDI, SDI OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON, and either SUPER(MENU) or SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER IMPOSE page is set to ON) • TEST OUT connector (when both of the following are true: TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON, and SUPER(MENU) or SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER IMPOSE page is set to ON) Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 166 Menu List SKIN DTL SELECT 1/2/3 Selects the skin detail channel. SKIN DETAIL OFF/ON Sets CH 1/2/3, selected avobe, on/off. SKIN DETAIL LVL (–99 to 99) Sets the level of the color detail signal. SKIN DTL SAT (–99 to 99) Adjusts the saturation level of the hue possessed by the color detail function. SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 Adjusts the center phase of the hue possessed by the color detail function. SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 39 to 359 Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the color detail function. No. Page 12 MTX LINEAR MATRIX Item Settings Description OFF/ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user-set matrix correction functions on or off. MATRIX(USER) OFF/ON Turns the user-set matrix correction function on or off. MATRIX(PRESET) OFF/ON Turns the preset matrix correction function on or off. MATRIX(PRST) SEL 1/2/3/4/5/6 Selects the preset matrix correction function. 1: SMPTE 240M equivalent 2: ITU-709 equivalent 3: SMPTE WIDE equivalent 4: NTSC equivalent 5: EBU equivalent 6: ITU-601 equivalent MATRIX(USER) R-G (–99 to 99) Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set matrix coefficients. MATRIX(USER) R-B (–99 to 99) Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set matrix coefficients. MATRIX(USER) G-R (–99 to 99) Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set matrix coefficients. MATRIX(USER) G-B (–99 to 99) Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set matrix coefficients. MATRIX(USER) B-R (–99 to 99) Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set matrix coefficients. MATRIX(USER) B-G (–99 to 99) Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set matrix coefficients. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu List 167 No. Page Item Settings Description 13 MTX MULTI MATRIX OFF/ON Turns the linear matrix correction and multi matrix correction functions on or off. ADAPTIVE MATRIX OFF/ON Turns the adaptive matrix correction function (brightness tracking) on or off. ADAPTIVE MAX LVL 0 to 3 to 7 Sets the correction level of the adaptive matrix correction function. MATRIX (MULTI) OFF/ON Turns the multi matrix correction function on or off. MATRIX AREA IND OFF/ON Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area corresponding to the currently selected setting. MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color detection Detects color. page. MTX(MULTI)PRESET EXEC 14 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 168 15 MTX (MULTI) AXIS B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/ Sets 16 hue axes as the targets of R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/ the multi matrix correction G/G+/CY/CY+/B– function. MTX (MULTI) HUE (–99 to 99) Sets hue correction values for each of the 16 axis modes. MTX (MULTI) SAT (–99 to 99) Sets saturation correction values for each of the 16 axis modes. OFF/ON Turns the V modulation function on or off. MASTER VMOD (–99 to 99) Adjusts the master V modulation level. R VMOD (–99 to 99) Adjusts the R V modulation level. G VMOD (–99 to 99) Adjusts the G V modulation level. B VMOD (–99 to 99) Adjusts the B V modulation level. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the output signal of the TEST OUT connector. OFF/ON Turns the low key saturation function on or off. L KEY SAT LEVEL (–99 to 99) Sets the saturation level of the low luminance part. L KEY SAT RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/ KNEE/HIGH Sets the luminance level at which the low key saturation function becomes effective. V MODULATION V MOD SATURATION LOW KEY SAT Menu List Return MTX(MULTI)HUE and MTX(MULTI)SAT values to preset values for each of the 16 axes. No. Page 16 SATURATION SATURATION MODE KNEE/L KEY MODE Switches the saturation function mode. High-intensity processing (KNEE SAT) or low-intensity processing (BLACK GAMMA/ LOWKEY AST) can be selected. KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON Turns the knee saturation on/off when SATURATION MODE is set to KNEE. BLACK GAMMA OFF/ON Turns black gamma correction on/off when SATURATION MODE is set to L.KEY. LOW KEY SAT OFF/ON Turns the LOW KEY SATURATION function on/off when SATURATION MODE is set to L.KEY. NOISE SUPPRESS OFF/ON Turn on and off the noise suppression function. NOISE SUP LEVEL OFF/LOW/HIGH Selects the level of the noise suppression function. 1 STANDARD 2 STANDARD Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of the camcorder. 3 STANDARD 4 STANDARD 17 18 NOISE SUPPRESS SCENE FILE Item Settings Description STANDARD STANDARD – Clears all current detail-adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file. SCENE RECALL EXEC Recalls the scene file from the memory of the camcorder or the USB flash drive. SCENE STORE EXEC Stores the scene file in the memory of the camcorder or the USB flash drive. F.ID Blank/up to 16 characters Sets the File ID. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 5 169 MAINTENANCE menu No. Page Item Settings Description 01 WHITE SHADING WHT SHAD CH SEL R/G/B/TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If TEST is selected, the setting is linked to the setting of TEST OUT SELECT. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector. R/G/B WHT H SAW (–99 to 99) H Saw white shading compensation. R/G/B WHT H PARA (–99 to 99) H Parabola white shading compensation. R/G/B WHT V SAW (–99 to 99) V Saw white shading compensation. R/G/B WHT V PARA (–99 to 99) V Parabola white shading compensation. WHITE SAW/ PARA OFF/ON Turns white shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off. BLK SHAD CH SEL R/G/B/TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If “TEST” is selected, the setting is the same as the setting of TEST OUT SELECT. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector. 02 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 170 03 BLACK SHADING LEVEL ADJUST Menu List R/G/B BLK H SAW (–99 to 99) H Saw black shading compensation. R/G/B BLK H PARA H Parabola black shading compensation. (–99 to 99) R/G/B BLK V SAW (–99 to 99) V Saw black shading compensation. R/G/B BLK V PARA (–99 to 99) V Parabola black shading compensation. BLACK SAW/ PARA OFF/ON Turns black shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off. MASTER BLACK (–99 to 99) Master black level adjustment. MASTER GAIN(TMP) –6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily adjusts the master gain value. 3dB/6dB/9dB/ 12dB/18dB/ 24dB/30dB/ 36dB/42dB VBS VIDEO LEVEL (–99 to 99) Adjusts the composite signal video level. HD-Y LEVEL (–99 to 99) Adjusts the Y level of the HD component signal. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector. No. Page Item 04 BATTERY 1 Info BEFORE END 5%/10%/ 15%...95%/ 100% Note For your safety, and to ensure Info END proper operation of the camcorder, Sony Sony BEFORE END recommends the use of the following battery packs: BP-L80S and Sony END BP-FL75. Settings Description Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued. 0%/1%/2%/3%/ Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is 4%/5% used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of the battery at which the END warning should be issued. 11.5V to 17.0V (in 0.1V steps) Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued. a) 11.0V to 11.5V (in 0.1V steps) Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued. b) 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V (in 0.1V steps) Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued. Other END c) 11.0V to 14.0V (in 0.1 V steps) Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued. DC IN BEFORE END 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued. DC IN END 11.0V to 14.0V (in 0.1 V steps) Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued. DETECTED BATTERY Info/Sony/Other/ Displays the type of automatically detected DC IN battery. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Other BEFORE END 171 No. Page Item 05 BATTERY 2 TYPE DETECTION AUTO/OTHER AUTO: Automatically detects the type of the battery. OTHER: Always judges the battery to be of Settings Description the “OTHER”c) type regardless of the actual battery type. SEGMENT NO.7 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 172 Menu List 11.0V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No.7 should turn off. SEGMENT NO.6 11.0V to 16.0V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No. 6 should turn off. SEGMENT NO.5 11.0V to 15.0V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No. 5 should turn off. SEGMENT NO.4 11.0V to 14.0V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No. 4 should turn off. SEGMENT NO.3 11.0V to 13.0V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No. 3 should turn off. SEGMENT NO.2 11.0V to 12.0V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No. 2 should turn off. SEGMENT NO.1 11.0V to 17.0V (in 0.1 V steps) When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No. 1 should turn off. Battery status indicator segments 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (“E” d) and “F” are always on.) No. Page Item Settings 06 AUDIO-1 FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO Input mode selection for front microphone. Description AUDIO CH3/4 MODE CH1/2/SW Selects the sources to be recorded to channels CH-3/4. CH1/2: Same sources as CH-1/2. SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH3/CH-4 switches. REAR XLR AUTO OFF/ON Turns the XLR connection automatic detection on or off. FRONT MIC REF –60dB/–50dB/ –40dB Sets the reference level of the front microphone. REAR MIC REF –60dB/–50dB/ –40dB Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN CH1 connector is set to MIC. MIN ALARM VOL OFF/SET Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it is turned all the way down. OFF: Almost inaudible. SET: Faintly audible. SP ATT LEVEL Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker. Has no effect on earphone volume. OFF/3dB/6dB/ 9dB HEADPHONE OUT MONO/STREO Selects whether to make the rear earphone monaural or stereo. 07 AUDIO-2 16bit/24bit For details, see “Setting the Recording Format” (page 53). AU REF LEVEL –20dB/–18dB/ –16dB/–12dB/ EBUL Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal. AU REF OUT 0dB/+4dB/ –3dB/EBUL Sets the output reference level. AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO/STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 independently for each channel, or in stereo mode. AU CH34 AGC MODE MONO/STREO/ Selects whether to perform automatic input OFF level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 3 and 4 independently for each channel, or in stereo mode, or not at all (OFF). AU AGC SPEC –6dB/–9dB/ –12dB/–15dB/ –17dB AGC saturation level setting. AU LIMITER MODE OFF/–6dB/ –9dB/–12dB/ –15dB/–17dB For manual audio input level adjustment, selects the limiter saturation level for loud input signals. AU OUT LIMITER OFF/ON Turns the audio output limiter on or off. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings AU DATA LEN (IMX) 173 Page Item Settings 08 AUDIO-3 AU SG (1KHz) ON/OFF/AUTO Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the Color Bar mode or not. ON: A 1 kHz test tone is output during the Color Bar mode. OFF: A 1 kHz test tone is not output during the Color Bar mode. AUTO: A 1 kHz test tone is output only when the AUDIO SELECT CH-1 switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position. MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound F+S1 on CH 1, selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment. SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side) FRONT: MIC LEVEL control F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.) MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound F+S2 on CH 2, selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment. SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side) FRONT: MIC LEVEL control F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.) REAR1/WRR LEVEL SIDE1/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the F+S1 audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel. SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side) FRONT: MIC LEVEL control F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.) REAR2/WRR LEVEL SIDE2/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the F+S2 audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel. SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side) FRONT: MIC LEVEL control F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.) AUDIO CH3 FIX/FRONT Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings No. LEVEL e) 174 Menu List Description Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3. FIX: Fixed FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder No. Page Item Settings Description 08 AUDIO-3 AUDIO CH4 FIX/FRONT Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4. FIX: Fixed FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder LEVEL e) Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu List 175 No. Page Item Settings Description 09 WRR SETTING WRR VALID CH ALL/CH1 Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless receiver, or channel 1 only. ALL: Enable both channel 1 and 2. CH1: Enable channel 1 only. Select this setting to use the wireless receiver as a monaural receiver. WRR CH SELECT f) TX1/TX2 Specifies the target channel for other items in this menu. TX1: Channel 1 TX2: Channel 2 SEL f) WRR DELAY OFF/ON Enables or disables the delay compensation function for wireless audio input. OFF: Disables the function. ON: Enables the function (the audio in all EE output is delayed by about 8 ms). – Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT. The channel number and name shown here are recorded inside the <Description> tag in the clip metadata file C*M01.XML (where * is 0001 to 9999). COMP f) TX* (*: channel number) f) TX* AUDIO PEAK ---/PEAK (*: channel number) f) TX* INPUT LEVEL MIC/LINE (*: channel number) f) Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 176 TX* ATT LEVEL Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT (the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device). – Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT (the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device). AUTO/ 0.0ms~8.0ms Sets the amount of audio delay for the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT. AUTO: Automatically adjusts the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio received from the wireless receiver is zero. 0.0ms~8.0ms: Sets the amount of anticipated wireless system delay, for cases in several wireless systems are being used over a device such as an audio mixer. (*: channel number) f) TX* SYSTEM DELAY (*: channel number) f) Menu List Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or LINE. – (*: channel number) f) TX* LCF FREQ Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is over the peak. No. Page Item Settings Description 10 TIMECODE TC OUT AUTO/GENE Selects the timecode signal output. AUTO: Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and outputs the timecode reader output during playback. GENE: Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and playback. Sets DF or NDF mode. DF: Drop frame mode NDF: Non-drop frame mode EXT-LK DF/NDF INT/EXT (When SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59.94i, 29.97P, or 59.94P) Selects either internal setting or external setting for DF/NDF. INT: Internal EXT: External EXT-LK UBIT INT/EXT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to an INT or an EXT source when the timecode is locked to an external source. INT: Internal lock EXT: External lock LTC UBIT FIX/TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of LTC. FIX: Records the data that is set by the user. TIME: Records the present time. VITC UBIT (SD) FIX/TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of VITC. FIX: Records the data that is set by the user. TIME: Records the present time. WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF/ON Matches the time of the internal clock with the time data of the user bits of an external timecode. Turns the automatic time correction function of the internal clock on or off. UBIT GROUP ID 000/101 Selects the U-BIT GROUP ID. VITC INS LINE 1 NTSC: 12H to Selects the line into which VITC is to be 16H to 19H inserted. PAL: 9H to 19H to 22H VITC INS LINE 2 NTSC: 12H to 18H to 19H PAL: 9H to 21H to 22H Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings DF/NDF DF/NDF (When SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59.94i, 29.97P, or 59.94P) 177 No. Page Item 11 ESSENCE MARK RET SHOT MARK OFF/ON 1 Settings Description For details, see “Recording essence marks” (page 82). RET SHOT MARK OFF/ON 2 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 178 Menu List INDEX PIC POS 0SEC to 10SEC For details, see “Setting the thumbnail image (in 1 sec steps) at recording time” (page 83). FIND MODE R.ST/CLIP Specify the frame to be cued up when the PREV or NEXT button is pressed. R.ST: The frame where a Rec Start essence mark is set CLIP: The first frame of the clip No. Page Item Settings Description 12 CAM CONFIG 1 REC TALLY BLINK OFF/ON Turns the tally illumination control on or off when the battery is almost exhausted or the disc is almost full. REC START BEEP OFF/ON SDI REC CONTROL Turns the REC START/STOP alarm sound on or off. OFF/RM/PARA Specifies the function for enabling synchronized recording with the unit. RM: A REC trigger signal is output to the recorder connected to the SDI OUT connector. PARA: Controls synchronized recording with the unit. HDSDI REMOTE I/F CHARA/ G-TLY/R-TLY Selects whether to use the function that enables recording control from this unit of an external device connected to the CA (camera adaptor) or one of the SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output) of this unit. g) Also selects the indication that shows whether the external device is recording. CHARA: Use the function, and indicate by the controlling external device indicator in the viewfinder (see page 30). G-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the TALLY indicator in the viewfinder. R-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder. Note MATCH CLIP NAME OFF/ON Specifies whether to superimpose clip name information on the HDSDI output on the SDIOUT 1/2 connectors. A clip with the same name as on the camera is created on supported devices. PROAV DISPLAY DSABL/ENABL Specifies whether to display the PROAV directory when this unit is accessed via an FTP connection. DSABL: Do not display. ENABL: Display. MIXED RECORDING DSABL/ENABL For details, see “Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc” (page 54). SINGLE CLIP MODE OFF/ON For details, see “Clip playback modes” (page 79). PB POSITION KEEP/TOP When you switch between the clip playback screen and the clip list playback screen, specifies the clip or sub clip playback start position. KEEP: Play from the position where playback stopped. TOP: Play from the first frame of the first clip or sub clip. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings When R-TLY is selected, the TALLY indicator lights even when the unit is not recording. 179 No. Page Item Settings Description 13 CAM CONFIG 2 TEST SAW SELECT SAW/REC Selects the test signal. COLOR BAR SELECT ARIB/100%/ 75%/SMPTE Selects the HD color bar type. USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON Show only USER menu in the top menu. RM COMMON MEMORY OFF/ON Selects whether or not to share settings for when a remote control unit is connected and when the unit is used alone. RM REC START RM/CAM/ PARA When an RM remote control unit is connected, selects which recording start/stop buttons are enabled. RM: remote control unit CAM: camcorder PARA: both SHT DISP MODE SEC/DEG Selects shutter speed display (seconds or degrees). Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 180 RM F NO DISPLAY CTRL/RET Switches the iris F value display type on remote control units such as the MSU-900. CTRL: Display based on control value from camera RET: Display based on position value from lens FAN CONTROL Specifies the control method for the cooling fan. (This setting is retained even when the unit is powered off.) AUTO: Control the rotation of the cooling fan automatically. R.MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed during recording only (and stop the rotation when this unit is used in an environment so cool that temperatures inside the unit do not rise). MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed (and stop the rotation when this unit is used in an environment so cool that temperatures inside the unit do not rise). AUTO/R.MIN/ MIN Note Regardless of this setting, the cooling fan rotates at high speed if temperatures inside the unit rise to a temperature near the alarm level. Menu List No. Page Item Settings Description 14 CAM CONFIG 3 ALAC OFF/AUTO Specifies whether to activate the aberration correction function. OFF: Do not activate. AUTO: Activate aberration correction when a lens that supports aberration correction is mounted. Note For some aberration correction lenses, the aberration correction function may not activate (“ALAC” does not appear in the viewfinder) immediately after this unit is powered on, even when this item is set to “AUTO”. If this occurs, turn the zoom and focus rings of the lens all the way to one side, and then check to make sure that “ALAC” has appeared in the viewfinder. Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for more information about lenses that support aberration correction. 15 Selects remote control of the camera using a Wi-Fi or Ethernet connection. OFF: Remote control disabled. RM: Remote control operation of the camera is supported via an CBK-WA100, but main-line output (broadcast) is not supported. ALL: Remote control of the camera and main-line output (broadcast) is supported. COLOR TEMP <P> Display reference color temperature. Sets the white balance preset value. C TEMP BAL <P> (–99 to 99) Finer setting when the desired color could not be obtained with the COLOR TEMP <P> color temperature setting. R GAIN <P> (–99 to 99) Sets the R gain preset value. G GAIN <P> (–99 to 99) Sets the G gain preset value. AWB ENABLE <P> OFF/ON When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, turns the function that enables execution of AWB (auto white balance) on and off. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings PRESET WHITE Wi-Fi/ETHER_RM OFF/RM/ALL 181 No. Page 16 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION SEL Item DCC D RANGE 17 Settings Description DCC/FIX Enables or disables automatic knee point adjustment when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM, DCC: ON. DCC: Automatically adjust the knee point according to the luminance of the subject. FIX: Set the knee point to a fixed value. 400%/450%/ 500%/550%/ 600% Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/ DCC switch is set to CAM, DCC: ON. DCC POINT (–99 to 99) Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point. DCC GAIN (–99 to 99) Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value. DCC DELAY TIME (–99 to 99) Adjusts the DCC reaction speed. DCC PEAK FILTER (–99 to 99) Adjusts the response sensitivity to the peak of the DCC detected value. AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW IRIS WINDOW IND 1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the auto iris detection window. VAR: variable OFF/ON Turns on and off the function which displays a frame marker for the auto iris detection window. IRIS LEVEL (–99 to 99) Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value. IRIS APL RATIO (–99 to 99) Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and average value. IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 Adjusts the width of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR. IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 135 to 269 Adjusts the height of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 182 IRIS VAR H POS –460 to 0 to 459 Adjusts the horizontal position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR. IRIS VAR V POS –250 to 0 to 249 Adjusts the vertical position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR. IRIS SPEED (–99 to 99) CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF/ON Menu List Adjusts the auto iris speed. Turns on and off the function which, during auto iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas by dulling the reaction to high luminescence. No. Page Item Settings 18 GENLOCK GENLOCK OFF/ON Turns genlock on and off. GL HD H PHASE (–99 to 99) Sets the HD output H phase for genlock operation. GL SD H PHASE (–99 to 99) (Does not appear when the FORMAT page item SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY item is set to 23.9P) Sets the SD output H phase for genlock operation. REFERENCE INTERNAL/ GENLOCK/ SDI IN Displays the type of reference signal used by this unit. ND OFFSET ADJUST OFF/ON Turns on and off the mode which sets ND (neutral density) filter color compensation values. CLEAR ND OFFSET EXEC Clears ND filter color compensation values. AUTO BLK SHADING EXEC Executes the auto black shading correction function. If executed when in SLS (slow-speed shutter) mode, this performs only fine compensation on edge portions of the screen. 19 20 AUTO SHADING APR RESET BLK SHD EXEC Clear black shading compensation values. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector. MASTER GAIN(TMP) –6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily sets the master gain value. 3dB/6dB/9dB/ 12dB/18dB/ 24dB/30dB/ 36dB/42dB APR EXEC Suppresses white flecks by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function. APR(SLS) EXEC Suppresses white flecks in SLS (Slow Speed Shutter) mode by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function. h) Note The execution time for this function is about 30 minutes. More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low. APR PRESET EXEC Deletes white flecks data that was added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 21 ND COMP Description 183 No. Page 22 NETWORK 1 NETWORK SETUP EXEC Note Item DHCP This menu is not used when using the CBK- IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK WA100 Wireless DEF.GATEWAY Adaptor. NETWORK SETTING Settings Display only Display only IP address Subnet mask Display only Default gateway LINK SPEED Display only Link speed DUPLEX Display only Communications method DNS1 Display only DNS server 1 UPnP Display only Enable or disable UPnP. DHCP ENABLE/ DISABLE Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of the IP address from a DHCP server. Note Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 24 Notes • IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS server 1 and 2 cannot be set when DHCP is set to “ENABLE”. • To check automatically acquired settings, close the menu and open it again. IP ADDRESS xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the IP address of this unit. 192.168.1.10 SUBNET MASK xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets the subnet mask. 255.255.255.0 DEF.GATEWAY xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of the default gateway. 0.0.0.0 LINK SPEED AUTO/10Mbps/ Sets the communications speed. 100Mbps DUPLEX AUTO/FULL/ HALF DNS1 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of DNS server 1. 0.0.0.0 DNS2 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of DNS server 2. 0.0.0.0 UPnP DISABLE/ ENABLE Select whether to enable the UPnP (universal plug and play) function. DISABLE: Disable the UPnP function. ENABLE: Enable the UPnP function. NETWORK 2 NET CFG RESET WPS EXEC Reset network settings to the factory defaults. Display only MAC address of this unit Wi-Fi DSABL/ENABL For details, see “To specify a connection destination by WPS operations” (page 216). ONE PUSH/ WPS MODE Menu List Sets the duplex mode. MAC PIN CODE 184 Enables or disables automatic acquisition of an IP address from a DHCP server Display only This menu is not used when using the CBKWA100 Wireless Adaptor. 23 Description Displays the NETWORK SETTING page, so that you can make network settings. PIN UPDATE WPS START EXEC WPS STATUS Display only No. Page Item Settings Description 25 Wi-Fi Wi-Fi SETUP EXEC Displays the Wi-Fi SETTING page so that you can make wireless LAN settings. Wi-Fi STATUS [-----]/ [xxxxx]/ CONNECT (display only) Communication/connection status xxxxx: Displays the signal strength by the number of x’s. CONNECT: Executing the connection sequence Note This menu is not used when using the CBKWA100 Wireless WIRELESS MODE Adaptor. Note SSID (unknown)/up to Network name 32 characters (display only) NETWORK TYPE ----/INFRA/ ADHOC (display only) CH --/1 to 14 Wireless channel (display only. 13 and 14 are for automatically detected channels only.) AUTH ----/OPEN/ Network authentication SHARED/WPA/ WPA2 (display only) ENCRYPTION ----/DISABLE/ Data encryption WEP/TKIP/AES (display only) SCAN NETWORKS EXEC SSID Blank/up to 32 characters This menu is not used when NETWORK TYPE using the CBKCH WA100 Wireless AUTH Adaptor. Connection mode For details, see “Setting up a wireless LAN” (page 213). INFRA/ ADHOC 1 to 11 OPEN/ SHARED/WPA/ WPA2 ENCRYPTION DISABLE/ WEP/TKIP/AES WEP KEY INDEX 1/2/3/4 INPUT SELECT ASCII5/ ASCII13/ HEX10/HEX26 KEY Blank/up to 26 characters Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Wi-Fi SETTING ----/802.11b/ IEEE 802.11 standard 802.11g/802.11n (display only) 185 No. Page 26 UP UP CON PROCESS FIELD/ADPT CONVERTER 27 SHUTTER SELECT Settings Description Selects the conversion source picture when SD is upconverted to HD. FIELD: Use the field picture. ADPT: Optimize the ratio of conversion from the frame or field picture. UC DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99) Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement by the upconverter. UC CRISPENING (–8 to 7) Sets the amplitude width at which the upconverter does not emphasize lowamplitude signals. UC DETAIL LIMIT (–99 to 99) Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement by the upconverter. UC LV DEPEND LVL (–8 to 7) Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by the upconverter. UC DTL FREQUENCY 3.2M/4.5M/ 5.0M/4.0M Sets the center frequency and frequency properties of edge enhancement by the upconverter. 3.2M: 3.2 ± 1.1 MHz 4.5M: 4.5 ± 1.4 MHz 5.0M: 5.0 ± 0.7 MHz 4.0M: 4.0 ± 2.0 MHz UC DTL H/V RATIO (–3 to 4) Sets the horizontal/vertical ratio of edge enhancement by the upconverter. SHUTTER SELECT SECOND/ DEGREE Selects the shutter speed display unit. SECOND: Second units DEGREE: Degree units (shutter opening angle) See page 62 for more information about degree unit settings. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 186 Item ADD (only when SHUTTER SELECT is set to “DEGREE”) Menu List 360.0 to 180.0 to Registers a shutter degree setting in an empty 4.5 (upper limit number from 1 to 6 (this item is disabled if no of shutter angle number is empty). degrees) DEL – (only when SHUTTER SELECT is set to “DEGREE”) Deletes the setting assigned to a number from 1 to 6 (numbers with no settings assigned cannot be selected). 1 to 6 Display only (only when SHUTTER SELECT is set to “DEGREE”) Displays the shutter opening angle assigned to number 1 to 6, and the corresponding speed in second units, as calculated on the basis of the selected frame rate.This differs as follows, depending on the setting of SYSTEM FREQUENCY. 59.94i, 29.97P: 1: 216.0, 2: 180.0, 3: 90.0, 4: 45.0, 5: 22.5, 6: 11.2 50i, 25P: 1: 180.0, 2: 150.0, 3: 90.0, 4: 45.0, 5: 22.5, 6: 11.2 23.98P: 1: 180.0, 2: 172.8, 3: 144.0, 4: 45.0, 5: 22.5, 6: 11.2 No. Page Item 28 META OUT META DATA ITEM OFF/ON OUT Settings 29 HEADSET INCOM MIC SEL SELECT (CA-FB70, CA-TX70 INCOM MIC Camera LEVEL Adaptors only) Description Sets whether to put recorded VANC packet information in DATA ITEM in MXF files when transferring files via FTP. OFF: Do not include VANC packet information. ON: Include VANC packet information. DYNMIC/ CARBON/ MANUAL Sets the type of the INTERCOM microphone. –60dB/–40dB/ –20dB Sets the level of the INTERCOM microphone (–60dB is selected when MIC SEL is set to DYNMIC or CARBON) INCOM MIC GAIN –6dB/0dB/+6dB Sets the gain of the INTERCOM microphone. INCOM MIC POW OFF/ON Turns the power supply for the INTERCOM microphone on/off (OFF is selected when MIC SEL is set to DYNMIC or CARBON). INCOM MIC UNBAL OFF/ON Turns unbalanced input for the INTERCOM microphone on/off (ON is selected when MIC SEL is set to CARBON). INCOM SIDE TONE 50 to 99 Sets the level of the INTERCOM sidetone. e) A setting for this item is required when AU CH34 AGC MODE in the AUDIO-2 page is set to OFF. f) A setting for this item is required when the DWRS02D Digital Wireless Receiver is installed. g) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI. h) Pixel noise is reduced to some extent by automatic black balance adjustment (see page 55), but the detection capabilities of that function are limited. For the most effective correction, execute the APR function. If “No More White Pixel” appears after the APR function is executed, then there are no more detectable white flecks. FILE menu No. Page Item Settings Description 01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC For details, see “Saving and Recalling User Files” (page 220). F.ID Blank/up to 16 characters USER PRESET EXEC Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings a) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”. b) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”. c) When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “AUTO”, any batteries other than Sony BPseries batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery systems are classified as “Others”. d) Flashes once per second when the battery status is “BEFORE END”, and flashes 4 times per second when the battery status is “END”. For details, see “Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings” (page 200). Menu List 187 No. Page Item 02 USER FILE 2 STORE USR PRESET EXEC Save settings for items on pages registered in the USER menu as the standard settings. CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC Clear the standard setting of pages registered in the USER menu. CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC Return the pages registered in the USER menu to the factory default state. LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF/ON Selects whether to load page and item customization data when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed. LOAD OUT OF USER OFF/ON Selects whether to load USER FILE data for items other than the current USER menu items when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed. BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF/ON Selects whether to load data for items on the pages beyond USER FILE in the USER menu when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed. USER LOAD WHITE OFF/ON Selects whether to load white balance data when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed. 03 ALL FILE Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 188 Menu List Settings Description ALL FILE LOAD EXEC Load ALL file. ALL FILE SAVE EXEC Save ALL file. F.ID Blank/up to 16 characters Name ALL file. ALL PRESET EXEC Return all items to preset values. STORE ALL PRESET EXEC Save the current settings of all items as preset values. CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC Clear the preset values of all items. 3SEC CLR PRESET OFF/ON Turns the following function on and off: When the CANCEL/ PRST/ESCAPE switch is held on the CANCEL/PRST side for three seconds, clear the preset values of each item. NETWORK DATA OFF/ON Selects whether or not to read in the network-related data. No. Page Item Settings Description 04 SCENE FILE 1 STANDARD 2 STANDARD For details, see “Saving and Loading Scene Files” (page 223). 3 STANDARD 4 STANDARD 5 STANDARD 05 06 REFERENCE USER GAMMA STANDARD – SCENE RECALL EXEC SCENE STORE EXEC F.ID STANDARD REFERENCE STORE EXEC Save reference file saved on the USB flash drive in internal memory. REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC Clear reference file. REFERENCE LOAD EXEC Load reference file. REFERENCE SAVE EXEC Save reference file on the USB flash drive. F.ID Blank/up to 16 characters Enter reference file name. Selects whether to load white balance data when SCENE RECALL or STANDARD on the SCENE FILE page is executed. USER GAMMA LOAD EXEC Loads user-created gamma table data (a user gamma file) from a USB flash drive into internal memory. USER GAMMA RESET EXEC Clears a user gamma file from internal memory. F.ID — Displays the name of the user gamma file in internal memory. DATE — Displays the date and time of creation of a user gamma file on a USB flash drive. Menu List Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings SCENE WHITE DATA OFF/ON 189 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings No. Page Item 07 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL EXEC Load lens file. LENS FILE STORE EXEC Save lens file. F.ID No Offset/up to 16 characters Sets the name of the last selected lens file. SOURCE MEMORY1 Displays the number of last loaded lens file. LENS NO OFFSET EXEC Clear lens file. LENS AUTO RECALL OFF/ON/S.No Specifies whether to automatically load the lens file of a lens that supports serial communications. OFF: Do not use the lens file function. ON: Load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name, and reflect the contents of the file. S.No: If the lens can communicate its serial number, load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name and serial number, and reflect the contents of the file. If the lens serial number cannot be communicated, load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name (same as the ON setting). L.ID — Display the name of the connected lens that supports serial communications. L.MF — Display the manufacturer of the connected lens that supports serial communications. LENS M VMOD a) (–99 to 99) Adjusts the lens file V SAW shading compensation. LENS CENTER H a) –480 to 0 to 479 Compensates the horizontal position of lens file center marker. LENS CENTER V a) –270 to 0 to 269 Compensates the vertical position of lens file center marker. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector. LENS R FLARE a) (–99 to 99) Adjusts the lens file flare (R). LENS G FLARE a) (–99 to 99) Adjusts the lens file flare (G). LENS B FLARE a) 08 LENS FILE 2 Settings (–99 to 99) Adjusts the lens file flare (B). OFST a) (–99 to 99) Adjusts the white balance (R) compensation value of the lens file. LENS W-B OFST a) (–99 to 99) Adjusts the white balance (B) compensation value of the lens file. LENS W-R 190 Menu List Description No. Page Item Settings Description 09 LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If TEST is selected, the setting is linked to the setting of TEST OUT SELECT. TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector. LENS R/G/B H SAW a) (–99 to 99) LENS R/G/B H (–99 to 99) PARA a) LENS R/G/B V SAW a) (–99 to 99) LENS R/G/B V (–99 to 99) PARA a) 10 USB MEMORY USB IN > JUMP TO Adjusts the H Saw white shading compensation. Adjusts the H Parabola white shading compensation. Adjusts the V Saw white shading compensation. Adjusts the V Parabola white shading compensation. OFF/USER/ALL/ For details, see “Jumping to a SCENE/LENS/REFER/ File-Related Menu Page when USER1 Connecting a USB Flash Drive” (page 226). a) “EX” is displayed when the extender is on, and “08” is displayed when the shrinker is on. DIAGNOSIS menu Page Item Description 01 HOURS METER OPERATION Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in units of hours. LASER Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical heads. OPERATION (rst) Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in units of hours (reset possible). SPINDLE (rst) Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating, in units of hours (reset possible). LOADING (rst) Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded (reset possible). SEEK (rst) Displays the total seek time by the optical heads, in units of hours (reset possible). ADJUST For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock” (page 39). 02 TIME/DATE GPS ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings No. MONTH DAY Menu List 191 No. Page 03 ROM VERSION PACKAGE: X.XX 1 SY1: X.XX Item Description Displays ROM version. SY2K: X.XX SY2U: X.XX DRV: X.XX AT: X.XX FP: X.XX 04 ROM VERSION LVIS: X.XX 2 TSYS: X.XX TMBP: X.XX CHRN: X.XX BRDG: X.XX PIER: X.XX CAVA: X.XX 05 ROM VERSION DSP0: X.XX 3 PRXA: X.XX 06 DEV STATUS GPS: X.XX I/O: FP, CN, DCP, VF Displays the status of each internal device of this unit. D/A: DCP1, DCP2 EEPROM: CN, DCP, DR FRAM: AT FAN: MB LSI: DCP1, DCP2, TG Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 192 SCI: SY, RM 07 CA STATUS CA: CA-FB70 Displays the version information and signal level of the (CA-FB70 camera adaptor. SERIAL: Camera Adaptor XXXXXXXX only) VER: VX.XXXXXX APR/30/2014 COMMENTXXXXX XXXX OPTICAL LEVEL CCU t CAM: NOSIGNAL CAM t CCU: NOSIGNAL 07 CA STATUS CA: CA-TX70 Displays the version information of the camera adaptor. (CA-TX70 SERIAL: Camera Adaptor XXXXXXXX only) VER: VX.XXXXXX APR/30/2014 COMMENTXXXXX XXXX Menu List Menu Operations indicating the current status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen. For details, see “Selecting the display items” (page 201). To display the TOP menu With no menu displayed on the screen, hold down the MENU knob and set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. Displaying menus 1 Depending on the internal switch settings, display of the TOP menu may be disabled. For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual. Basic menu operations By pressing and turning the MENU knob, you can set various menu items. In the remainder of this section, the LCD monitor is generally shown as an example of the menu display, but a similar display also appears on the viewfinder screen. 5 4 32 1 Viewfinder 2 LCD monitor 3 DISP SEL/EXPAND button 4 MENU ON/OFF switch 5 POWER switch To select the setting items and values on the menu Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases explained below. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings To use the MENU ON/OFF switch, open the cover of the menu operating section. When the camcorder is powered on, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON to display the menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor. If this is the first time the menu has been used after the camcorder has been powered on, the USER menu is displayed. If the menu has been used before, the last accessed page appears. When the menu is not displayed on the LCD monitor Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button below the LCD monitor to select the CHAR display. To clear the menu display from the screen Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. (When the cover of the menu operating section is closed, this switch is automatically set to OFF.) When the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch on the viewfinder is set to on, the display Menu Operations 193 To scroll pages ?001 OUTPUT1 TOP SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF TEST OUT SELECT: TEST OUT SUPER : VBS OFF ?005 REC FUNCTION SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE TOP : : ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE: CLIP CONT REC : LIVE LOGGING : OFF OFF OFF TOP When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to switch pages. To select a menu or setting item 001 OUTPUT1 TOP 001 OUTPUT1 SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF TEST OUT SELECT: TEST OUT SUPER : VBS OFF TEST OUT SELECT: TEST OUT SUPER : VBS OFF When b appears, turn the MENU knob to move b up and down. To change a setting value Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 194 001 OUTPUT1 TOP 001 OUTPUT1 TOP SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF TEST OUT SELECT:? TEST OUT SUPER : VBS OFF TEST OUT SELECT:? TEST OUT SUPER : Y OFF When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to change the setting (ON/OFF, value, etc.). To confirm the selection of a menu, a setting item, or a setting value Each time you press the MENU knob, the menu display switches in the following sequence. Menu Operations Example: When using the OPERATION menu TOP menu CONTENTS page ?000 CONTENTS <TOP MENU> USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS ADVANCED If the menu has not been used TOP 01.OUTPUT 1 02.OUTPUT 2 03.SUPERIMPOSE 04.LCD 05.REC FUNCTION 06.ASSIGNABLE SW 07.POWER SAVE 08.VF DISP 1 09.VF DISP 2 10.VF DISP 3 If the menu has been used before Menu selection mode Menu selection page TOP 000 CONTENTS SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF TEST OUT SELECT: TEST OUT SUPER : VBS OFF 01.OUTPUT 1 02.OUTPUT 2 03.SUPERIMPOSE 04.LCD 05.REC FUNCTION 06.ASSIGNABLE SW 07.POWER SAVE 08.VF DISP 1 09.VF DISP 2 10.VF DISP 3 ?001 OUTPUT1 TOP Setting item selection mode TOP OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF TEST OUT SELECT: TEST OUT SUPER : VBS OFF Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 001 OUTPUT1 SDI OUT1 SELECT: Setting value selection mode 001 OUTPUT1 TOP SDI OUT1 SELECT:? OFF SDI OUT2 SELECT: SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF OFF TEST OUT SELECT: TEST OUT SUPER : VBS OFF Note If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the camcorder is powered on, “TOP” does not appear at the upper right on the above screen, and you cannot go to the TOP menu. In this case, follow the procedure in “To display the TOP menu” (page 193). Menu Operations 195 When you set items on the ALL, OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus, move b to the menu that contains the desired item in the TOP menu, and then press the MENU knob. To display the TOP menu when another menu is displayed Move b to “TOP” displayed at the top right of each page of the menu, and press the MENU knob. Or flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch repeatedly to ESCAPE until the TOP menu is displayed. 2 Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears. ?005 REC FUNCTION Using the USER menu (example menu operation) SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE This section explains menu operations using the USER menu as an example. The operations are the same for the ALL, OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, and DIAGNOSIS menus. For details about how to operate the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, see “Editing the USER menu” (page 197). 1 ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE: CLIP CONT REC : LIVE LOGGING : OFF OFF OFF Press the MENU knob. b and z appear. 005 REC FUNCTION Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Normally, the USER menu appears. If it does not, turn the MENU knob to move b to USER in the TOP menu, and press the MENU knob. If the USER menu has been used before, the last accessed page appears. In this case, go to step 2. If this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu appears. In this case, follow the procedure below. 1 Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired page number. ?U00 CONTENTS SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE 4 5 Menu Operations ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE: CLIP CONT REC : LIVE LOGGING : OFF OFF OFF Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item, and then press the MENU knob. Turn the MENU knob to change the setting. Depending on the direction of turning the knob, the setting value increases, decreases, switches between ON and OFF, and so on. TOP This indicates that the menu screen can be scrolled. TOP : : b changes to z, and z changes to ?. 01.OUTPUT 1 02.OUTPUT 2 03.SUPERIMPOSE 04.LCD 05.REC FUNCTION 06.ASSIGNABLE SW 07.VF DISP 1 08.VF DISP 2 09.'!' LED 10.MARKER 1 2 Press the MENU knob again. The page selected in 1 is displayed. Go to step 3. 196 3 TOP : : To interrupt changing the settings Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON again, the values that were displayed when you interrupted the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making settings. 6 Press the MENU knob. z changes to b, and ? changes to z. The selection is confirmed. 7 To continue setting other items on the same page, repeat steps from 4 to 6. 8 To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. The menu disappears from the screen, and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen. To cancel a change or return to the standard settings Note Depending on the setting item, in some cases only the function to return to the standard setting is valid. 1 Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above procedure, flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position. 3 Editing the USER menu The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding, deleting or replacing the pages. To add a new page Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again. The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu. While the EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 pages are all blank in their initial state. You can register up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of these pages. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) The message “CANCEL DATA” appears to indicate that the change has been cancelled. 1 Display the TOP menu (see page 193). 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, and press the MENU knob. The message “CANCEL DATA OK?” appears. 2 When nothing appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to move b to the page number, and press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to switch pages. If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the menu appears. The message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears on the screen. 4 ?E00 CONTENTS 01.EDIT 02.EDIT 03.EDIT 04.EDIT 05.EDIT 06.EDIT 07.EDIT 08.EDIT 09.EDIT 10.EDIT Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again. This returns to the standard settings. To move to another page SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE 3 TOP ?U05 REC FUNCTION : : ON 30P CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE: CLIP CONT REC : LIVE LOGGING : OFF OFF OFF When ? appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to switch pages. PAGE USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER TOP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU knob. Then select one of EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19, and press the MENU knob. If a different page other than the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears, then press the MENU knob. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings To return to the standard settings after pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above procedure, flick the CANCEL/ PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position. Example: when the EDIT USER 9 page is selected Menu Operations 197 E10 EDIT USER 9 4 TOP Press the MENU knob. Then select the line where you want to add an item, and press the MENU knob. To delete items from a page by using the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 197). 2 Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to delete. 3 Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position. The message “DELETE ITEM OK?” appears. The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. EDIT FUNCTION ESC INSERT MOVE DELETE BLANK 5 To delete items from a page by using the menu Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 197). 2 Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob. Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to delete, and press the MENU knob. The following menu appears. The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. TOP Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 01.OUTPUT 1 02.OUTPUT 2 03.SUPERIMPOSE 04.LCD 05.REC FUNCTION 06.ASSIGNABLE SW 07.POWER SAVE 08.VF DISP 1 09.VF DISP 2 10.VF DISP 3 Add the items as follows. The EDIT USER 9 page appears again, displaying the newly added item. Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob. The previously displayed page appears again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears. 4 Select YES, and press the MENU knob. 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 197). 2 Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to replace, and press the MENU knob. The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. 3 Menu Operations Select MOVE, and press the MENU knob. The previously displayed page appears again. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining items. You can add up to ten items on one page. 198 3 To replace items on a page 1 Press the MENU knob, scroll the page until the desired item appears, and then press the MENU knob again. 2 Press the MENU knob again, select the desired item, and then press the MENU knob. 7 Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again. 1 ?P00 CONTENTS 6 4 4 Select the position to which you want to move the item, and press the MENU knob. The item selected in step 2 moves to the position that you selected in step 4. ?E01 EDIT PAGE To insert a blank line 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 197). 2 Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to replace, and press the MENU knob. 3 TOP 01.OUTPUT 1 02.OUTPUT 2 03.SUPERIMPOSE 04.LCD 05.REC FUNCTION 06.ASSIGNABLE SW 07.VF DISP 1 08.VF DISP 2 09.'!' LED 10.MARKER 1 4 The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. Press the MENU knob. Then select the position where you want to add the page, and press the MENU knob. Select BLANK, and press the MENU knob. The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. The previously displayed page appears again, and a blank line is inserted above the specified item. Note 5 Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob. The CONTENTS page appears. 6 You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items have already been registered. Select the desired page, and press the MENU knob. The number and name of the page selected in step 6 is added above the item selected in step 4. To add/delete/replace pages You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page from the USER menu, or replace pages, using the EDIT PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu. To cancel adding a page Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6, select ESC at the top right of the screen, and press the MENU knob. The EDIT PAGE screen appears again. To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST/ ESCAPE switch 1 Display the TOP menu (see page 193). 1 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, and press the MENU knob. Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page” (page 199). 2 Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you want to delete. 3 Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position. If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu has been used before, the last accessed page appears. 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU knob. Then select EDIT PAGE, and press the MENU knob. If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen appears. The message “DELETE PAGE OK?” appears. 4 Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again. To delete a page by using the menu 1 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings To add a page (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page” (page 199). Menu Operations 199 2 Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you want to delete, and press the MENU knob. E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP USER1 : USER2 : USER3 : USER4 : USER5 : USER6 : USER7 : USER8 : USER9 : USER10: The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. 3 Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob. The previously displayed page appears again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears at the upper right. 4 Select YES, and press the MENU knob. Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page” (page 199). 2 Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you want to move, and press the MENU knob. 2 E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP USER1 :? USER2 : USER 2 USER3 : USER 3 USER4 : USER 4 USER5 : USER 5 !#$%&'()*+,-./012345678 9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ[©]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~ INS DEL RET ESC END Select MOVE, and press the MENU knob. The previous screen appears again. 4 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 200 Select the position to which you want to move the page, and press the MENU knob. The page selected in step 2 is moved to the position. To rename pages The names of pages (USER 1 to USER 19) created with EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 can be changed. (The maximum name length is 15 characters.) Note The ASSIGN ITEM SEL page cannot be renamed. 1 Select the page that you want to rename (USER 1 to USER 19), and press the MENU knob. A character table appears. The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). To replace pages 1 USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER Display the EDIT PAGE NAME1 or EDIT PAGE NAME2 of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu. EDIT PAGE NAME1: To rename USER1 to USER10 EDIT PAGE NAME2: To rename USER11 to USER19 Menu Operations 3 Follow steps 3 and 4 described in “Setting the shot ID” (page 205) to enter characters. 4 When you have finished entering the name, turn the MENU knob to move x to END, and press the MENU knob. The entered name is now displayed. E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP USER1 : USER2 : USER3 : USER4 : USER5 : USER6 : USER7 : USER8 : USER9 : USER10: SPECIAL ITEM USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 USER 5 USER 6 USER 7 USER 8 USER 9 USER 10 Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings You can return all settings in the USER menu to standard settings. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). ?F01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE TOP : : EXEC EXEC Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor F.ID : ssssssssssssssss USER PRESET 2 : EXEC Press the MENU knob, then select USER PRESET, and press the MENU knob. The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO” appears. F01 USER FILE PRESET OK? USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE TOP YES NO : EXEC : EXEC F.ID : ssssssssssssssss USER PRESET : EXEC This section explains the menu settings for the display of the viewfinder screen. These settings are also used for the display of the LCD monitor in the same way. Selecting the display items To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen (with the viewfinder DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch set to on) and the LCD monitor, use the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP 3 pages of the OPERATION menu. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 3 Select YES, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU knob. On the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP 3 pages, you can select any of the following items to turn its display on or off. VF DISP 1 page Item VF DISP VF DISPLAY MODE Description Turning on or off the viewfinder display a) Selecting the display mode b) DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator DISP FILTER Types of the ND filter DISP WHITE White balance memory indicator DISP GAIN Gain indicator DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator DISP AUDIO Audio level indicator Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings The message “COMPLETE” appears, and the settings for all items in the USER menu are reset to the standard settings. Display the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. 201 Item DISP DISC DISP IRIS VF DISP 3 page Description Remaining disc capacity indicator Iris opening indicator Item DISP CLIP NAME display. a) DISP SCENE Turns on or off the display of FILE the number of the currently loaded scene file. DISP CONT Turns on or off the Clip REC Continuous Rec display. LOW LIGHT Turns on and off the on-screen warning that the average level of the video has dropped beneath a set level. LOW LIGHT Sets the LOW LIGHT LEVEL threshold value. VF BATT Specifies the remaining battery WARNING capacity level that starts the flashing warning in the viewfinder. ABSOLUTE Turns on and off the mode that VALUE displays numeric menu a) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ ASPECT switch on the viewfinder. b) For detailed information on the display mode, see “Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages” (page 203). VF DISP 2 page Item DISP ZOOM DISP COLOR TEMP DISP BATT REMAIN a) DISP DC IN Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 202 DISP WRR RF LVL DISP REC FORMAT DISP CLIP NO(PB) DISP TIMECODE DISP ALAC Description Zoom position indicator Displays the color temperature. Displays the battery voltage/remaining capacity of an internal battery pack or an external battery connected to the DC IN connector. Displayed when the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector. Displays the reception level of the wireless microphone. Displays the recording format. During playback, displays the clip number and total number of clips. Displays the timecode. settings as absolute values. b) a) Displayed clip names are also linked to the settings of “Display Title” and “Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area” in the Disc Menu. b) This makes it possible to display settings that include reference settings, stored with STORE ALL PRESET or other functions, as absolute values. VF DISP 4 page Item DISP GPS WIRELESS STATUS EXT. MEDIA REMAIN SENDING CLIP INFO Aberration correction function display a) When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BPGL65/GL95 battery pack is installed, the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value (%) according to the setting of this item. INT: When one of the above batteries is installed, the remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%) when there is a change in the value or when the power is low. AUTO: The remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%) when one of the above batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage (VOLT) is displayed continuously. VOLT: The voltage (VOLT) is displayed continuously. Description Selects the type of clip name to Description GPS reception status display CBK-WA100 wireless reception status CBK-WA100 SD card remaining media display Clip transfer to CBK-WA100 progress display 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting (ON, OFF, or value), and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode. The conditions under which messages are displayed and their correspondence with the display mode are as follows: Y: Message is displayed. N: Message is not displayed. Message display condition When the filter selection has been changed When the gain setting has been changed Message FILTER: n (where n = 1, 2, 3, 4) Display mode setting 1 2 3 N N Y a) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is set to ON. Changing the display mode 1 Display the VF DISP 1 page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). Select VF DISP MODE, and press the MENU knob. 3 Select the desired display mode, and press the MENU knob. Setting the marker display Switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off, and select whether the area indicated by the safety zone marker is 80%, 90%, 92.5%, or 95% of the screen area. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the MARKER 1 or MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. You can set the following items on the MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 pages. MARKER 1 page Item MARKER Description To hide all markers, set to “OFF”. CENTER To display the center marker, set to “ON”. CENTER Selects the display mode of the MARK center marker. SAFETY To display the safety zone, set ZONE to “ON”. SAFETY Selects the safety zone range AREA (80%, 90%, 92.5% or 95%). ASPECT To display the aspect marker, set to “ON”. ASPECT Selects the aspect mode (15:9/ SELECT 14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/2.35). ASPECT To make the areas out of the MASK selected aspect marker dimmer, set to “ON”. ASPECT To set the mask level, when the MASK LVL ASPECT MASK is set to “ON”. To display the effective pixel 100% MARKER a) area, set to “ON”. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings GAIN: n (where n N N Y = –6dB, –3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 18dB, 24dB, 30dB, 36dB, 42dB) When the setting of WHITE: n (where n N N Y the WHITE BAL = A CH, B CH, switch has been PRESET) or ATW: changed RUN When the DCC: ON (or OFF) N Y Y OUTPUT/DCC switch has been set to DCC ON or OFF When the shutter :SHUTTER: N Y Y speed and mode 1/100 (or 1/125, setting has been 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, changed a) ECS) When the black or E.g. AWB : OK N Y Y white balance has been adjusted 2 a) 100% MARKER is disabled when the focus assist indicator is displayed. Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor 203 Note The four items ASPECT, ASPECT SELECT, ASPECT MASK, and ASPECT MASK LVL are ignored when the recording format is IMX50/40/30 or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4:3. MARKER 2 page Description USER BOX a) Turns the display of the box cursor on and off. USER BOX Sets the width of the box WIDTH cursor (distance from center to left or right edge). USER BOX Sets the height of the box HEIGHT cursor (distance from center to top or bottom edge). USER BOX Sets the horizontal position of H POS the center of the box cursor. USER BOX Sets the vertical position of the V POS center of the box cursor. CENTER H Sets the horizontal position of POS the center marker. CENTER V Sets the vertical position of the POS center marker. ASPECT Turns the display of the aspect SAFE ZONE safety zone on and off. ASPECT Selects the range of the aspect SAFE AREA safety zone (80%/90%/92.5%/ 95%). 2 Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. You can set the following items on the VF SETTING page. Item ZEBRA Item ZEBRA 2 DET. LVL VF DETAIL LEVEL VF ASPECT (SD) Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings a) USER BOX is disabled by setting FOCUS AREA MARK to “ON” on the FOCUS ASSIST page of the OPERATION menu. 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. Setting the viewfinder You can make settings for viewfinder screen display functions. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 204 ZEBRA SELECT ZEBRA 1 DET. LVL ZEBRA 1 APT. LVL CRISP FREQUENCY FAT MODE FLICKER COLOR DETAIL COLOR SEL PEAK COLOR CHROMA LEVEL Description Turns the zebra display on or off. a) Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or BOTH. Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 (20% to 70% to 107%) display. Adjusts the aperture level of the zebra 1 display. (1% to 10% to 20%) Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 (52% to 100% to 109%) display. Adjusts the sharpness of the viewfinder (–99 to 99). Specifies whether to set the viewfinder screen and LCD monitor aspect ratio automatically or to set it to 16:9 when the IMX50/40/30 or DVCAM recording format is selected. When “16:9” is selected, then the screen is always displayed as a 16:9 screen (before being cut out to 4:3), even when ASPECT RATIO (SD) is set to “4:3”. Adjusts the crispness level. Selects the center frequency of the detail signal. Sets FAT (thickens detail edges) mode. Sets the flicker function. Sets the color detail function. Selects the color of the color detail. Sets the color of the peak color detail. Selects the chroma level of the image. a) If you are using a viewfinder which is not equipped with a ZEBRA switch, use this item to turn the display on and off. If you are using a viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch, you can turn the display on and off either with the ZEBRA switch or with this menu operation. Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars You can select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set in the SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the picture. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the SHOT DISP page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP page. Description Selects whether or not the shot data is superimposed (ON or OFF). SHOT TIME Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed (ON or OFF). SHOT MODEL Selects whether or not the NAME model name is superimposed (ON or OFF). SHOT SERIAL Selects whether or not the NO serial number is superimposed (ON or OFF). SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set on the SHOT ID SHOT 16:9 CHARA page is superimposed. a) Turns the following function on and off: When displaying aspect ratio 4:3 video, record superimposed “16:9” in the locations where 16:9 video is cut. Description Selects whether or not the blinking * is superimposed (ON or OFF). a) To carry out superimposed recording, select the SHOT ID number (1 to 4). Not to carry out superimposed recording, select “OFF”. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select ON/ OFF or the SHOT ID number, and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. To carry out superimposed recording To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to BARS, DCC OFF. The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars. Example display: when SHOT DATA is set to ON 08/03/15 Setting the shot ID You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and symbols. When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS, DCC OFF, this shot ID is output with the color bar signal. You can set four shot IDs (ID-1 to ID-4). Note Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Item SHOT DATE Item SHOT BLINK CHARA When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed even if the color bar signal is output. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor 205 1 Display the SHOT ID page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. 020 SHOT ID ID-1 ID-2 ID-3 ID-4 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 020 SHOT ID ID-1 ID-2 ID-3 ID-4 2 : : : : Select one of ID-1 to ID-4, and press the MENU knob. A x mark appears over the first character position in the string, and characters can now be input. 020 SHOT ID ID-1 ID-2 ID-3 ID-4 TOP :? x : ssssssssssss : ssssssssssss : ssssssssssss !#$%&'()*+,-./012345678 9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~ INS DEL RET ESC END 3 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 206 Enter or change the shot ID. When you are entering the whole shot ID, go to 2. 1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x mark to the character which you want to change, then press the MENU knob. 020 SHOT ID ID-1 ID-2 ID-3 ID-4 !#$%&'()*+,-./012345678 9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~ INS DEL RET ESC END TOP ssssssssssss ssssssssssss ssssssssssss ssssssssssss TOP :? x : ssssssssssss : ssssssssssss : ssssssssssss !#$%&'()*+,-./012345678 9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~ INS DEL RET ESC END 2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark moves to the character position that you want to select, then press the MENU knob. Example: “+” character TOP :?+ : ssssssssssss : ssssssssssss : ssssssssssss 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters. 5 When the input is complete, turn the MENU knob to move the x mark over END, then press the MENU knob. This ends the input, and returns to the original SHOT ID page. To insert a space In step 3 above, move the x mark over INS, and press the MENU knob. To cancel inserting a space, move the x mark over RET, then press the MENU knob. To delete a character In step 3 of “Setting the shot ID” (page 205), move the x mark over DEL, and press the MENU knob. This deletes the character under the x mark in the shot ID row. To cancel deleting the character, move the x mark over RET, and press the MENU knob. To cancel changing shot ID Before executing step 5 of “Setting the shot ID” (page 205), move the b mark over ESC, then press the MENU knob or flick the CANCEL/ PRST/ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE. Displaying the status confirmation screens You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the LCDs by displaying the following four screen. ABNORMAL <!> screen This window allows you to confirm why the ! (warning) indicator lights in the viewfinder. Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor You can use the ‘!’ LED page of the OPERATION menu to set whether or not the ! (warning) indicator lights. SYSTEM screen This screen displays information such as the system frequency, the recording format, whether output from the TEST OUT connector is on or off, and the type of output signal. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 You can set the following items on the SET STATUS page. Item STATUS ABNORMAL FUNCTION screen This screen displays the functions assigned to the ASSIGN switches, ZEBRA ON/OFF, the detection level, and other information. STATUS SYSTEM STATUS FUNCTION AUDIO STATUS screen This screen allows you to confirm the following items related to audio. • Audio bit rate • Setting condition of DF/NDF • Type of front microphone • Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4 • Input level of audio channels 1 to 4 STATUS AUDIO STATUS GPS Description Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL window is displayed (ON or OFF). Displays (ON) or hides (OFF) the SYSTEM menu. Selects whether or not the FUNCTION window is displayed (ON or OFF). Selects whether or not the STATUS AUDIO window is displayed (ON or OFF). Selects whether or not the STATUS GPS window is displayed (ON or OFF). 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. You can use the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu to set whether or not the status confirmation screens are displayed. To display the status confirmation screens You can use the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF (when the cover of the menu operating section is closed, OFF is automatically selected). To disable display of the status confirmation screens Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings GPS INFORMATION screen This screen displays the following items related to GPS. • Latitude • Longitude • Altitude • Position date and time (CALC) • Real time • Time zone Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor 207 Item SHOCKLESS GAIN Adjustments and Settings from Menus 3 1 Display the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. 4 (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 208 Item GAIN LOW Description Sets the gain value corresponding to the L position of the GAIN selector. GAIN MID Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position of the GAIN selector. GAIN Sets the gain value HIGH corresponding to the H position of the GAIN selector. GAIN Sets the gain value TURBO corresponding to TURBO GAIN function. TURBO OFF: After pressing the button SW IND assigned with the TURBO GAIN function, the gain value changes when the GAIN selector is operated. ON: When the button assigned with the TURBO GAIN function is set to TURBO GAIN, the gain value does not change when the GAIN selector is operated unless the button is pressed again. Adjustments and Settings from Menus Display the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). Select the item for the switch position, then press the MENU knob. You can set the following items on the GAIN SW page. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. Selecting the output signals For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the gain value, and press MENU knob. Any of –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or 42 dB can be set for each of the L, M, H, and TURBO positions, in any sequence. Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions You can set the gain values for the L, M, and H positions of the GAIN selector, which switches the gain of the video amplifier. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) Description Turns shockless gain on or off. 2 Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. You can set the following items on the OUTPUT 1 page. Item SDI OUT 1 SELECT SDI OUT 2 SELECT SDI OUT 2 SUPER Setting Selects the signal output from the SDI OUT1 connector. OFF: Do not output video. HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI. SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI Selects the signal output from the SDI OUT2 connector. OFF: Do not output video. HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI. SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI VF: Outputs the same video as in the viewfinder. Selects whether to superimpose (ON) or not superimpose (OFF) text information on the signal output from the SDI OUT2 connector. Note Disabled when SDI OUT 2 SELECT is set to VF. Item TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT SUPER Setting Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector. VBS: Output composite video signal. When you select VBS, connect to the VIDEO IN connector of your monitor. Y: Output HD-Y signal. R/G/B: Output HD RGB signal. Selects whether to superimpose (ON) or not superimpose (OFF) text information on the signal output from the TEST OUT connector. 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN switches. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 ASSIGN SW <2> ASSIGN SW <3> ASSIGN SW <4> ASSIGN SW <5> ASSIGN SW <RET> 2 Select the desired switch or button, and press the MENU knob. A selection screen for the selected switch or button appears. You can use these screens to assign one of the following functions. Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1/ 3/4/5 (push-type) switch or RET button on the lens Function OFF FRONT MIC PICTURE CACHE SUPER (VFDISP& MENU) Display the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). You can assign functions by using the following items. Description Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1 (push-type) switch. Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch. Assigns the function to ASSIGN 3 (push-type) switch. Assigns the function to ASSIGN 4 (push-type) switch. Assigns the function to ASSIGN 5 (push-type) switch. Assigns the function to RET button on the lens. MARKER Description Assigns no function. Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected. Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode. Assigns a mixing switch function that selects mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector, when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON. Assigns the function that displays or hides all Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Settings on decks in order to receive SDI ANC (ancillary data) (PDW-HD1500) To record camera metadata (including GPS data) superimposed on the HD-SDI signal, together with the audio/video signal, set the VANC RX PARAMETER values in the Maintenance menu to the following values. Line: 11 DID: 0x43 SDID: 0x05 Item ASSIGN SW <1> markers. a) Adjustments and Settings from Menus 209 Function RETAKE b) ATW RETURN VIDEO HD-Y c) RETURN VIDEO HDSDI c) LENS RET REC SWITCH TURBO SWITCH ZEBRA FREEZE MIX Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings CC 5600K ZOOM TELE/ WIDE e) ZOOM WIDE/ TELE e) SHOT MARK1 SHOT MARK2 210 Description Assigns the function that deletes the last recorded clip. Assigns the function that turns auto tracing white balance ON and OFF. Assigns the function that displays in the viewfinder the HD-Y (1080i) signal input to the GENLOCK IN Function CLIP FLAG OK CLIP FLAG NG CLIP FLAG KEEP DIGITAL EXTENDER f) connector. d) Assigns the function that displays the HDSDI signal input on the SDI IN connector in the viewfinder d) Assigns the functions executed by the RET button on the lens (recording review and so on). Assigns the function that starts and stops recording. Assigns the turbo gain function. Assigns the zebra pattern display function. Assigns the function that mixes a still picture (monochrome) and camera video (color) (effective for framing shots). Assigns the function that applies an electrical 5600 K filter. For use with a lens that supports serial communications, assign the ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3, and the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4. For use with a lens that supports serial communications, assign the ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3, and the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4. Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark. Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark. Adjustments and Settings from Menus CLIP CONT REC UA01 to UA10 g) VF COLOR DETAIL PLAY & SDI REC S/S Description Assign the functions that set or clear OK, NG, and KEEP flags during recording or playback. Assigns the function that electronically magnifies the central part of the picture. (All video output is magnified, including recorded video.) x2, x3, x4, and x2x3x4 are available for selection. Assigns the function that turns the Clip Continuous Rec function on and off. Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu. Assigns the VF color detail function. Assigns the REC trigger signal output function, during playback, to the recorder connected to the SDI OUT connector. a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu, the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches allow you to display or not to display all markers. b) This function cannot be assigned to the RET button on the lens. c) RETURN1 to 4 are displayed when an optional CA-FB70/CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected. d) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu, you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder. e) Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear. f) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off. g) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu. a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu, the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers. b) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off. c) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu. Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch Function OFF FRONT MIC PICTURE CACHE SUPER (VFDISP&M ENU) MARKER Content Assigns no function. Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected. Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode. Assigns a mixing switch function that selects mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector, when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON. Assigns the function that displays or hides all 3 Select the desired function, and press the MENU knob. The function is assigned, and the ASSIGNABLE SW page appears again. To add functions that can be assigned to the ASSIGN switches When shipped from the factory, UA01 to UA10 user-assignable items in the ASSIGN switch function list are blank. You can register up to ten functions in these items. 1 Display the EDIT ASSIGN SEL page of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, and press the MENU knob. For details about using the menus, see “Menu Operations” (page 193). E21 EDIT ASSIGN SEL TOP Adjustments and Settings from Menus Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings markers. a) REC VIDEO Switches the recording target SOURCE video between the video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device (VBS or SD-SDI/HD-SDI). ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function. FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that mixes a still picture (monochrome) and camera video (color) (effective for framing shots). DIGITAL Assigns the function that EXTENDER b) electronically magnifies the central part of the picture. (All video output is magnified, including recorded video.) x2, x3, and x4 are available for selection. CLIP CONT Assigns the function that REC turns the Clip Continuous Rec function on and off. UA01 to Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu. UA10 c) VF COLOR Assigns the VF color detail DETAIL function. Note For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch, you cannot change those settings using other menus. The function assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting. 211 2 Move the b cursor to the item to set using the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob. The EDIT FUNCTION page appears. EDIT FUNCTION ESC INSERT MOVE DELETE BLANK Setting power saving functions You can limit the function of some output connectors to save power consumption. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 3 Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob. ?P00 CONTENTS 2 You can set the following items on the POWER SAVE page. TOP 01.OUTPUT 1 02.OUTPUT 2 03.SUPERIMPOSE 04.LCD 05.REC FUNCTION 06.ASSIGNABLE SW 07.POWER SAVE 08.VF DISP 1 09.VF DISP 2 10.VF DISP 3 4 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 212 Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. Item ETHERNET/ USB REC AUDIO OUT Add an item as follows. TEST OUT SAVE 1 Press the MENU knob, scroll the page until the desired page appears, and then press the MENU knob. 2 Press the MENU knob again, select the desired item, and then press the MENU knob. The EDIT ASSIGN SEL page appears again, displaying the added item. 5 Description Enables or disables the network connector and USB connector. Puts the AUDIO OUT connectors in EE or SAVE mode. Switches the TEST OUT connector power saving function on and off. ON: No signals are output if a cable is not connected. OFF: Signals are always output, regardless of whether a cable is connected. Enables or disables the wireless LAN function. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add the remaining items. Wi-Fi You can register up to ten items. a) The unit must be powered off and on again to enable changes to this setting. Operation of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches when UA01 to UA10 are assigned When an on/off switchable function (or menu item) is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, each time the switch is pressed toggles the function on or off. When another type of menu item is assigned, pressing the switch displays the item and its setting value on the viewfinder screen. You can then change the setting by pressing and turning the MENU knob. The viewfinder screen display disappears approximately three seconds after the last operation. Adjustments and Settings from Menus 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. Setting up a wireless LAN Wi-Fi SETUP You can install the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor in this unit, and set up a wireless LAN as explained in this section. When you connect this unit to a computer over a network, you can make the settings explained here from a Web menu. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor. NETWORK TYPE CH AUTH ENCRYPTION 2 INFRA 1 OPEN DISABLE Select “Wi-Fi SETUP” and then press the MENU knob. Wi-Fi SETTING ESC SET 3 Specify the connection destination (see the next section for how to specify it). To specify a connection destination by automatic detection 1 On the Wi-Fi SETTING page, select “SCAN NETWORKS” and then press the MENU knob. The screen changes to the NETWORKS page, and automatic detection of the connection destination starts. Several minutes may be required for network detection. P00 NETWORKS SCAN ESC 01.SSID: TYPE: ADHOC LVL : 4 MODE: 802.11b/g/n 02.SSID: TYPE: INFRA LVL : 3 MODE: 802.11b/g/n See “Basic menu operations” (page 193) for more information about menu operations. Adjustments and Settings from Menus Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Display the Wi-Fi page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and then press the MENU knob. : : : : SCAN NETWORKS: EXEC SSID: 00:11:22:33:44:55 NETWORK TYPE : ADHOC CH : 1 AUTH : OPEN ENCRYPTION : DISABLE Notes 1 EXEC The screen changes to the Wi-Fi SETTING page. For details about attachment and operation, refer to the CBK-WA100 operation manual. If using the CBK-WA100, the following menu settings are not required. Before starting, set ETHERNET/USB and Wi-Fi on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL”. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) : Wi-Fi STATUS : [-----] WIRELESS MODE: 802.11b SSID: (unknown) You can also use a LAN connection between a computer and the camcorder using an optional CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor. • For information about connecting to a wireless LAN, refer to the operation manual supplied with the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor. • Even when the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor is installed in this unit, the message “NO Wi-Fi ADAPTER!” may appear if you attempt to set up a wireless LAN immediately after powering the unit on. If this occurs, wait for a while and try again. • If the message “IEEE802.1X IS ENABLED!” appears when you change the settings, execute NET CFG RESET on the NETWORK 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu and then try again. • The proxy data recording function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the wireless LAN connection function. TOP M25 Wi-Fi 213 This page displays the following network items. 2 To display the Wi-Fi remote control on the camcorder Item Description SSID Network name TYPE Network connection mode INFRA: Infrastructure mode ADHOC: Ad hoc mode 1 Set Wi-Fi to “ENABL” on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu. LVL Signal strength 0 (minimum) to 4 (maximum) 2 MODE IEEE 802.11 standard Set Wi-Fi/ETHER_RM to “RM” on the CAM CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. Select the desired access point or computer from the detected items, and then press the MENU knob. To configure the remote device Configure the following on the smartphone, tablet, or other device. You return to the Wi-Fi SETTING page. Check the various setting items. 1 Connect the camcorder and the device using Wi-Fi. 2 Launch a browser on the device, and access “http://<IP address of camcorder (MAINTENANCE >Network Setting >IP Address value)/rm.html.” To return to the Wi-Fi SETTING page If you do not want to specify a connection destination on this page, or if no connection destination was detected, select “ESC” and then press the MENU knob to return to the Wi-Fi SETTING page. To use the Wi-Fi remote control Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 214 priority and the camcorder cannot be controlled using the Wi-Fi remote control. When using a Wi-Fi connection, you can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into the camcorder from a Wi-Fi connected device, such as a smartphone or tablet. You can control the camcorder remotely using the Wi-Fi remote control. You can start/stop recording, and adjust the iris, zoom, and other settings using the remote control. This function is useful when the camcorder is mounted in a remote location, such as on a crane. Notes • Some serial lenses cannot be controlled using the WiFi remote control. When a lens that cannot be operated using the Wi-Fi remote control is attached, the iris and zoom settings are displayed as “0” on the Wi-Fi remote control, even when you try to adjust the values from the Wi-Fi remote control. • When a lens that can be controlled using the Wi-Fi remote control is attached to the camcorder, the zoom cannot be adjusted if the zoom servo function is disabled on the lens. • When a remote control device is connected to the REMOTE connector of the camcorder and the white balance memory on the camcorder is set to other than “A (memory A),” turning the Wi-Fi remote control on/ off may change the color. • When a remote control device is connected to the REMOTE connector of the camcorder, that device has Adjustments and Settings from Menus For example, enter “http://192.168.1.10/ rm.html” if the IP address is 192.168.1.10. When the connection is successful, the Wi-Fi Remote screen appears on the device. Thereafter, operate the camcorder using the screen displayed on the device. You can disable operation of the REC button by dragging the Lock bar to the right. Notes • To display the page for a smartphone, change “rm.html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for a tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL. When “rm.html” is entered, the page automatically switches for display on the corresponding device. However, the appropriate page may not be displayed, depending on the device. • The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match the settings on the camcorder under the following circumstances. If this occurs, reload the browser window. - If the camcorder is restarted while connected - If the camcorder is operated directly while connected - If the device has been reconnected - If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been used • The Wi-Fi Remote control may not function if the wireless signal strength becomes weak. • The smartphone or table device used may not support ad-hoc mode, depending on the device. For details, refer to the operating instructions provided with the smartphone or tablet device. • If using the Wi-Fi remote control via the CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor, turn the camcorder on first and then turn on the CBK-WA100. Compatible devices The supported devices, OS, and browsers that can be used to operate the Wi-Fi remote control are shown in the following table. Device PC OS Windows 7 Browser Internet Explorer 8 or 9 Mac OS 10.7.4 Safari 5.1.6 Smartphone Android 2.3.3 Standard browser iOS 5.1.1 Safari Tablet Android 4.0.3 Standard browser iOS 5.1.1 Safari To specify a connection destination manually Specify the following items on the Wi-Fi SETTING page. Item name Setting SSID (network name) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols NETWORK TYPE (connection mode) INFRA: Infrastructure mode ADHOC: Ad hoc mode AUTH (network authentication) OPEN: Open system authentication SHARED: Shared key authentication WPA: WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) authentication WPA2: WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) authentication ENCRYPTION (data DISABLE: Disable encryption) WEP: WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) method TKIP: TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) method AES: AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) method To enter an SSID Select SSID, press the MENU knob to display the Wi-Fi>SSID page, and then press the MENU knob again. When you press the MENU knob once more, an x appears over the first character in the input string, and the unit enters character input mode. Wi-Fi>SSID RET SSID:? !#$%&"()+.-,0123456789: =@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz{}~ INS DEL RET ESC END See steps 3 and 4 in “Setting the shot ID” (page 205) for information about how to enter characters. To set ENCRYPTION options Depending on the setting of ENCRYPTION, you must set the following options. When ENCRYPTION is WEP: Item name Setting WEP KEY INDEX 1 to 4 INPUT SELECT ASCII5: 5 characters ASCII (network key format format and length) ASCII13: 13 characters ASCII format HEX10: 10 hexadecimal digits HEX26: 26 hexadecimal digits KEY (network key) ASCII characters or hexadecimal number (format specified with INPUT SELECT) When ENCRYPTION is TKIP or AES: Item name Setting INPUT SELECT ASCII8-63: 63 characters (network key format ASCII 8-bit format and length) HEX64: 64 hexadecimal digits Adjustments and Settings from Menus Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings CH (wireless channel) 1 to 11 (can be specified only in ad hoc mode) Note Some limitations apply to combinations of the “NETWORK TYPE”, “AUTH”, and “ENCRYPTION” settings. 215 Item name Setting KEY (network key) ASCII characters or hexadecimal number (format specified with INPUT SELECT) When you select “PIN CODE” A PIN item appears. Execute “UPDATE” in that item to display a PIN code for this unit. 4 WPS setup starts. During execution, the progress and results appear after WPS STATUS. SCANNING: Scanning for an access point OK: Detection successful NG: Detection failed See steps 3 and 4 in “Setting the shot ID” (page 205) for information about how to enter the key. To specify a connection destination by WPS operations In infrastructure mode only, you can use WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to specify a connection destination (access point) semi-automatically. Notes • WPS does not support the following. - Ad hoc mode - IEEE 802.1x • The access point must support WPS. • In addition to the settings made here, you must also make network settings on the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the WPS page of the MAINTENANCE menu and then press the MENU knob. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Select “ENABLE” and then press the MENU knob. The screen changes to the operation screen. M24 WPS 3 TOP Wi-Fi : WPS MODE : ONE PUSH 5 WPS START : EXEC WPS STATUS : ----- Select the desired connection destination from the detected access points, and then press the MENU knob. Setting the color temperature manually You can manually adjust the value of the white balance by setting the color temperature. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the WHITE page of the PAINT menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. You can set the following items on the WHITE page. ENABL Set WPS MODE to one of the following. ONE PUSH: Connect using the one push method PIN CODE: Connect using the PIN code entry method. 216 When execution finishes, the screen changes to the ACCESS PNT page. See “Basic menu operations” (page 193) for more information about menu operations. 2 Select “WPS START” and then press the MENU knob. Adjustments and Settings from Menus Item COLOR TEMP <A> Description Sets the color temperature for the desired value. Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature. C TEMP Adjusts the value more BAL <A> precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory. R GAIN <A> Changes only the value of R GAIN. Item Description B GAIN <A> Changes only the value of B GAIN. Item Description OFFSET When this item is set to ON, WHITE <B> the offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel B. WARMWhen OFFSET WHITE <B> COOL <B> is “ON”, sets the offset for the white balance of channel B, using the color temperature. Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature. WARMAdjusts the value more COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by <B> WARM-COOL <B> is not satisfactory. The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of channel A. Items followed by <B> are used to adjust the white balance of channel B. 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items. Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance, you can make the picture warmer or colder. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. 3 Note If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B, the adjusted value is not reflected in the video output even though you carry out the following operation. 4 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). Select the desired item, and press the MENU knob. You can set the following items in the OFFSET WHT page. Item Description OFFSET When this item is set to ON, WHITE <A> the offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel A. WARMWhen OFFSET WHITE <A> COOL <A> is “ON”, sets the offset for the white balance of channel A, using the color temperature. Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature. WARMAdjusts the value more COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by <A> WARM-COOL <A> is not satisfactory. Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob. If you want to set the other channel, go back to step 2. Selecting the lens file The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens file according to the lens in use. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the LENS FILE page of the USER menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). The LENS FILE page shows the name (F.ID) of the currently selected lens file. The lens name (L.ID) and manufacturer (L.MF) appear when a lens that supports serial communications is mounted. Adjustments and Settings from Menus Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 2 Set the WHITE BAL switch to the channel (A or B) that you want to set. 217 U17 LENS FILE TOP LENS FILE SELECT: 1 F.ID:No Offset <LENS INFORMATION> L.ID: J16ax8B4 IRSD L.MF: Canon 2 Select LENS FILE SELECT, and press the MENU knob. 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob. • Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used when recording the UMID. This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal timecode. • Calculating the date difference among source materials. The source material is recorded based on the MJD (Modified Julian Date), which enables easy calculation of date difference among source materials. To set UMID ownership information (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Setting the UMID data For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). What is a UMID? The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique identifier for audio-visual material defined by the SMPTE 330M-2004 standard. The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes. 2 Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings 218 Using the Extended UMID You have to enter a country code, organization code and user code. Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166 table, and set the organization code and user code independently. For details, see “About UMID ownership information” (page 218). Functions of UMID data The UMID data enables the followings: • Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audiovisual material. The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material. • Distinguishing between original material and copied material. 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material. Adjustments and Settings from Menus Set the following item. Item COUNTRY CODE ORGANIZATION USER CODE TIME ZONE For details, refer to SMPTE 330M. Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in clip units. The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location, time/ date, company and so on. Display the UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob. Contents Country code Organization code User code Time difference from UTC For details on how to enter characters, see “Setting the shot ID” (page 205). 3 Press the MENU knob. About UMID ownership information COUNTRY CODE Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte alphanumeric strings) according to the values defined in ISO 3166-1. There are about 240 country codes. Find your own country code on the following home page. Refer to ISO 3166-1: http://www.iso.org/iso/country-codes/ iso_3166_code_lists.htm When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4-bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character (20h). Example: In the case of Japan For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes, if JPN, it is 3 bytes. Thus, enter the following: JP_ _ or JPN _ where _ represents a space. ORGANIZATION (organization code) Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string for the organization code. Notes • Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the SMPTE registration office. When no organization code has been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string. As a rule, the code “00” must be entered. Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination should enter “~”. • There are no problems in recording or playing back audio-video signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set. Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings USER CODE Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user identification. The user code is registered with each organization locally. It is usually not centrally registered. When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character (20h) in the remaining strings. The methods used depend on the organization. Note User code cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered. TIME ZONE Set the time difference from UTC. Notes • The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using the time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not recorded correctly. • When you change the time zone, adjust the internal clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then the power on again. Adjustments and Settings from Menus 219 Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 2. Saving and Recalling User Files For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the file ID” (page 221). 2 The camcorder is equipped with a USB connector, which enables you to save the settings in the USER menu as a user file onto a USB flash drive. You can load these files from the USB flash drive for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration. In addition to user files, you can save scene files, reference files, lens files and ALL files on a USB flash drive. When a menu is displayed, connecting a USB flash drive displays the appropriate file-related menu page automatically. The USER SAVE page appears. Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used to save user files on the USB flash drive. Each page can hold up to five files. 3 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, and press the MENU knob. 4 Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob. The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears. If a file number is followed by “NEW FILE”, this means that the file is empty. If data is stored in the file, the file number is followed by the file name. Saving user menu data on a USB flash drive Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data 220 You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder as user files on a USB flash drive. You can save up to 100 user files on a USB flash drive. Connect the USB flash drive, then proceed as follows. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). ?F01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE TOP : : EXEC EXEC F.ID : ssssssssssssssss USER PRESET : EXEC Select USER FILE SAVE, and press the MENU knob. 5 To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU knob. To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. When the saving is completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears. If no USB flash drive is connected The message “NO USB MEMORY” will appear. Connect a USB flash drive and carry out the operation once again. If you select a file number where data has already been saved The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO” appears. • To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. • To overwrite, select YES and press the MENU knob. You can select the information displayed on each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page. Saving and Recalling User Files For details, see “To select the file information items to be displayed” (page 222). About the USER menu settings to be saved on a USB flash drive Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved on the USB flash drive as a user file. If data cannot be saved If one of the following error messages appears during or after the save operation, then the data was not saved. USB MEMORY INHIBIT! (flashing) Cause No USB flash drive is connected. Action Connect or reconnect the USB flash drive. The LOCK Set the LOCK switch on the switch to the USB flash drive write enable is set to the position. write protect position. A USB flash Reconnect to drive error confirm the occurred. error, and consult a Sony service representative. To set the file ID You can set an file ID before you save your data as a user file. This will help you identify the user file quickly. The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data. Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select F. ID, and press the MENU knob. A character table appears. F01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE TOP : : EXEC EXEC F.ID :? x i#$%&'()*+,-./012345678 9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~ INS DEL RET ESC END 3 Follow steps 3 and 4 described in “Setting the shot ID” (page 205) to enter characters. 4 When you have finished entering the file ID, turn the MENU knob to move x to END, and press the MENU knob. The entered file ID is now displayed. F01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE TOP : : EXEC EXEC : EXEC F.ID : ID-001 USER PRESET File ID that has been set appears. When you carry out a user file save operation (see page 220), the set file ID is saved on the USB flash drive together with the data. Saving and Recalling User Files Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data USB MEMORY ERROR (flashing) (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Note The following items cannot be saved. • LOAD CUSTOM DATA, LOAD OUT OF USER, BEFORE FILE PAGE, and USER LOAD WHITE on the USER FILE 2 page • SCENE WHITE DATA on the REFERENCE page • SLOW&QUICK, FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page • LENS FILE SELECT on the LENS FILE page • SYSTEM LINE, SYSTEM FREQUENCY, and COUNTRY on the FORMAT page • NUMERIC on the CLIP TITLE page • SKIN AREA IND and SKIN DTL SELECT on the SKIN DETAIL page • MATRIX AREA IND and MTX(MULTI) AXIS on the MTX MULTI page Error message NO USB MEMORY (flashing) Note Set the file ID before saving data on the USB flash drive. Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data. 221 To select the file information items to be displayed You can select the user file information items to be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and USER FILE LOAD page (P00 to P19), that are used to save and load data to and from a USB flash drive. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 2 3 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, then press the MENU knob. 4 Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob. The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears. 5 To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). The access indicator lights. When the load is completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes off. Select DISPLAY MODE, and press the MENU knob. Select the desired type of file information, and press the MENU knob. F.ID DATE MODEL Description File ID (10 characters) and date (year/month/day) File ID (16 characters) Date saved (year/month/day/ hours/minutes/seconds) Information on the model Loading saved data from a USB flash drive Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Note If data cannot be loaded If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation, then the data was not loaded. Error message NO USB MEMORY (flashing) USB MEMORY ERROR (flashing) FILE ERROR (flashing) The data loaded from the USB flash drive overwrites the data saved in the camcorder. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 2 To carry out the load, select YES and press the MENU knob. Display a USER FILE LOAD page or USER FILE SAVE page of the USER FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. Display type ALL 222 3 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. Cause Action No USB flash drive is connected. A USB flash drive error occurred. Connect or reconnect the USB flash drive. Reconnect to confirm the error, and consult a Sony service representative. Data saved on a USB flash drive using a camcorder whose model is not the same as this camcorder cannot be loaded into this camcorder. The USB flash drive contains data that cannot be loaded into this camcorder. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). Returning the user file settings to the standard settings Select USER FILE LOAD, and press the MENU knob. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) The USER LOAD page appears. 1 Saving and Recalling User Files Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select USER PRESET, and press the MENU knob. Saving and Loading Scene Files You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file. By loading the scene file, you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene. You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files on a USB flash drive. You can also load data from the USB flash drive into the camcorder memory. Data that can be saved in a scene file You can save the following data in a scene file: • Values adjusted using the PAINT menu • Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and ECS mode • The white balance data included in a scene file depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu. Saving a scene file To save a scene file on a USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive into the USB connector before starting the following operation. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. ?F04 SCENE FILE TOP s1 :STANDARD s2 :STANDARD s3 :STANDARD s4 :STANDARD s5 :STANDARD s STANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F.ID: STANDARD : : EXEC EXEC To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 2. For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the file ID” (page 221). Saving and Loading Scene Files Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data For details on menu operation, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 223 2 3 Select SCENE STORE, and press the MENU knob. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) The SCENE STORE page appears. 1 Press the MENU knob, then select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob again. The file to be saved is selected. When no USB flash drive is connected Select the desired memory number, and press the MENU knob. When the save is completed, the SCENE FILE page appears again. When you select a file number where data has already been saved The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO” appears. • To cancel the overwriting, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. • To overwrite, select YES and press the MENU knob. When a USB flash drive is connected You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save scene files on the USB flash drive. Each page can hold up to five files. Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data 224 1 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, then press the MENU knob. 2 Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob. The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears. 3 To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU knob. To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. You can select the file information items to be displayed on each page of SCENE STORE and SCENE RECALL. For details, see “To select the file information items to be displayed” (page 222). To save scene files stored in the camcorder memory on a USB flash drive All five scene files stored in the camcorder memory can be saved on a USB flash drive in a single operation. Saving and Loading Scene Files Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select SCENE STORE, and press the MENU knob. One of the SCENE STORE pages appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired SCENE STORE page, and press the MENU knob. 4 Select 5FILE SAVE B MEM1-5, and press the MENU knob. The message “STORE OK? YES b NO”appears. 5 To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU knob. To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. When the save is completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears. Note If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3, those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced by the above procedure. To set the file ID You can set an file ID before you save your data as a scene file. This will help you identify the scene file quickly. The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data. You can carry out a scene file ID setting operation on the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu. For details about this operation, see the description of step 2 and following of “To set the file ID” (page 221). To select the file information items to be displayed To load a scene file saved on a USB flash drive You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to P20) or the SCENE RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or loading data from a USB flash drive. You can select the scene file information items to be displayed on the SCENE STORE page and SCENE RECALL page of the SCENE FILE menu. 1 Select SCENE RECALL, and press the MENU knob. The SCENE RECALL page appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, then press the MENU knob. 3 Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob. The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO” appears. For details about item selection, see the description of step 2 and following of “To select the file information items to be displayed” (page 222). 3 To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. When the loading is completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file. If no file is present with a particular file number, this is shown as “NO FILE”. Loading scene files (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 2 To carry out the recall, select YES and press the MENU knob. Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). To load scene files from a USB flash drive into the camcorder memory To load the scene file stored in the camcorder, select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob. You can load up to five scene files stored on a USB flash drive into the camcorder memory in a single operation. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) s on the left of the file number changes to x. The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file. F04 SCENE FILE Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 : : EXEC EXEC When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu is set to “ON”, the number of the currently loaded scene file is displayed on the viewfinder screen (see page 31). To cancel the selected scene file Turn the MENU knob to move b to x, and press the MENU knob again. x changes to s. The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file. Select SCENE RECALL, and press the MENU knob. The SCENE RECALL page appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL page which contains the desired scene files appears, and press the MENU knob. 4 Select 5FILE LOAD b MEM1-5, and press the MENU knob. The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO” appears. Saving and Loading Scene Files Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data s1 :SCENE 25 x2 :SCENE 26 s3 :SCENE 27 s4 :SCENE 28 s5 :NO FILE s STANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F.ID :SCENE21 1 TOP 225 P01 SCENE RECALL ESC RECALL OK? YES NO DISPLAY MODE : ALL 001.SCENE1 002.SCENE2 003.NO FILE 004.SCENE4 005.SCENE5 ***.5FILE LOAD 5 MEM1-5 To carry out the load (recall), select YES and press the MENU knob. To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO. When loading is complete, the message “COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes off. Notes • The scene files loaded from a USB flash drive overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory. • To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory when the USB flash drive is connected, return to the P00 SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory. • When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO FILE”), an existing file of the same number is unaffected. In the example shown in step 4, MEM3 is not overwritten. Jumping to a FileRelated Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash Drive A USB flash drive enables you to save user files, scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL files. The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so that when a USB flash drive holding these files is connected while in menu operating mode, a menu page relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the screen. Thus you can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very convenient especially when you manage data files using USB flash drives. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings Setting OFF Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data 226 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. USER ALL SCENE LENS REFER USER 1 For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). 2 Select STANDARD, and press the MENU knob. s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x. When x changes to s once again, the settings of the camcorder are reset to the standard settings. If you press the MENU knob again while x is displayed, the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was selected. Select USB IN > JUMP TO, and press the MENU knob. The USB IN > JUMP TO page allows you to select one of the following settings. (How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.) 1 Display the USB MEMORY page of the FILE menu, and press the MENU knob. 3 Description Disables this function. Menu pages do not change when a USB flash drive is connected. Jumps to the USER FILE page. Jumps to the ALL FILE page. Jumps to the SCENE FILE page. Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page. Jumps to the REFERENCE page. Jumps to the USER 1 FILE page. Turn the MENU knob until the name of the desired file page appears, then press the MENU knob. Note In the following cases, jumping to the target page is impossible even when a USB flash drive is inserted. • When the power is turned on after you insert a USB flash drive. Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash Drive • When OFF is selected on the USB IN > JUMP TO page. • When any of the following menu pages is already displayed. - A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of the FILE menu - USB MEMORY, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, LENS FILE, or REFERENCE page Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash Drive 227 Chapter 8 File Operations Overview A remote computer can be connected to this unit via FTP and used to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data files, such as video and audio data files. Connect the network connectors on this unit and the remote computer, using a network cable (see page 233). Directory structure The following figure shows the directory structure of discs visible to a remote computer. Note This structure is not the same as the actual structure recorded on the disc. Chapter 8 File Operations 228 (Continued) a) Root directory b) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE c) Files generated when voice over editing is executed on the PDW-HR1. Overview (Continued) File operation restrictions This section explains which operations are possible on files stored in each directory. When required, the following operation tables distinguish reading and writing from partial reading and writing. Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the end of the file. Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the file. Write: Write data sequentially from the start to the end of the file. Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only. Note Operations other than Read and Partial read are possible only when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording enabled. Root directory Content INDEX.XML Contains data for management of the material on the disc. Contains conversion tables for assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists. Contains metadata to indicate the disc properties. Contains a list of materials on the disc, basic properties, related information, and information about access methods. Contains system setting information and menu setting information for the devices. ALIAS.XML a) DISCMETA.XML MEDIAPRO.XML SYSPRO.XML Operations Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Yes No No No No Yes No No No No Yes Yes b) No No No Yes No No No No Yes No No No No Overview Chapter 8 File Operations File name 229 File name Content Other files Files other than the above a) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE. b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Operations Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write No No Notes • Directories cannot be created in the root directory. • The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub, UserData, General, and PROAV) cannot be deleted or renamed. Clip directory File name C*.MXF a) C*M01.XML a) C*M02.KLV a) Other files Chapter 8 File Operations 230 Content Operations Read/ Write/ Rename Create Partial Partial read write Clip file created by recording (MXF file) Yes Yes c) No b), c) Yes d) *: 0001 to 9999 Metadata file generated automatically Yes No g) No h) Yes f) when C*.MXF file is created. *: 0001 to 9999 User metadata file. This type of file is Yes No g) Yes f) Yes f) generated automatically during recording via an FTP connection when the unit recognizes that an MXF file contains metadata that was generated by a nonXDCAM device. *: 0001 to 9999 Files other than the above No No a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name. b) Overwriting is not possible. c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in a format matching the format (system frequency (59.94i, 50i, or 25P)) and recording format (MPEG HD422 and number of audio channels) of the recorded sections of the disc, and which can be overwritten by XDCAM. (Partial writing is not possible.) d) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE. e) Any clip may be selected and deleted. f) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. g) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*M01.XML file (or a C*M02.KLV file) with the same name in the “C*” part is also changed automatically. h) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file with the same name in the “C*” part is created automatically. i) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file (or a C*M02.KLV file) with the same name in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically. Overview Delete Yes e) No i) Yes i) - Note Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory. Component directory File name P*.MXF a) Other files Content Audio clip files (MXF files) generated when you execute voice over editing on the PDW-HR1 *: 0001 to 0099 Files other than the above Operations Read/ Write/ Partial Partial read write Yes Yes b), c) - a) The “P*” part can be handled like a file with a userdefined name. b) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length and which can be written by XDCAM. c) Overwriting is not possible. d) Multiple files cannot be opened at the same time. No Rename Create Delete Yes e) Yes b), d) Yes f) - No - e) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”. f) Selection and deletion of any specified clip is possible. Note Directories cannot be created in the Component directory. Edit directory File name Content E*E01.SMI a) Clip list file *: 0001 to 0099 Metadata file generated automatically when E*E01.SMI file is created. *: 0001 to 0099 Files other than the above E*M01.XML a) Other files Operations Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Yes Yes d) Yes Yes b) Yes c) Yes Yes b) No e) No f) No g) - No - No - Chapter 8 File Operations a) The “E*” part can be changed to a user-defined name. b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial writing is not possible. c) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE. d) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. e) When the “E*” part of a E*E01.SMI is changed, an E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also changed automatically. f) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also generated automatically. g) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also deleted automatically. Note Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory. Overview 231 Sub directory File name Content C*S01.MXF a) Proxy AV data (MXF file) generated automatically when a C*.MXF file is created. *: 0001 to 9999 Files other than the above Other files a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name. b) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the “C*” part is generated automatically. c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the “C*” part is generated automatically. Operations Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Yes No No c) No d) No b) - No - No - d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically. Note Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory. UserData directory File name Content Any file a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length. (Depending on the character type, file names (including extension) may be limited to 21 characters.) Operations Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) The following directory operations are possible in the UserData directory. • Directory creation (up to 62 levels, including the UserData directory) • Deletion and renaming of directories General directory File name Content Any file Chapter 8 File Operations 232 a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length. (Depending on the character type, file names (including extension) may be limited to 21 characters.) The following directory operations are possible in the General directory. • Directory creation (up to 63 levels, including the General directory) • Deletion and renaming of directories Overview Operations Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes a) Notes • The maximum number of files that can be created on one disc, including directories, is 5,000 for a singlelayer disc and 6,000 for a dual-layer disc. • File names and directory names can use letters, numbers, and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8) character set. However, the following control characters and symbols cannot be used. - Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F - Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ', ?, \, | • To create a new directory in the General directory, first create a directory on the desktop and rename it using only characters that can be used on this unit. Then drag it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory. FTP File Operations PROAV directory This directory displays individual files on the disc. To enable display of the PROAV directory, set PROAV DISPLAY on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ENABL”. File operations between this unit and a remote computer can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol (called FTP below). Preparations 1 Connect the network connectors of this unit and a remote computer with a network cable. Or connect this unit to the network to which the remote computer is connected. 2 On the NETWORK SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set the IP address and other network setting items for this unit. 1) For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 193). If network settings have already been made Check the IP address of this unit. 1) This unit is able to acquire an IP address automatically from a DHCP server. It also supports an Auto-IP function to assign an IP address automatically when access from this unit to the DHCP server times out. You can check DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on the NETWORK 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. Note 3 Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu, then press the MENU knob. FTP File Operations Chapter 8 File Operations If this unit is directly connected to a computer running Windows Vista or Windows 7 with a network cable, change the setting as follows: (1) Open “Network and Sharing Center” >“Manage network connections” >“Local Area Connection” in the control panel. (2) In the “Local Area Connection Properties”, uncheck the “Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6)”, and then click the OK button. 233 U07 POWER SAVE Note TOP Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state described above. ETHERNET/USB : DSABL REC AUDIO OUT : EE TEST OUT SAVE : ON 2 Start the command prompt. Wi-Fi : DSABL 3 Enter “ftp <SP> <IP address>”, and press the Enter key. (<SP> refers to a space.) 4 Move b to ETHERNET/USB then press the MENU knob. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select “ENABL”, then press the MENU knob. For example, if the IP address of this unit is set to 192.168.001.010, enter “ftp 192.168.1.10”. Refer to the Windows help for more information about the FTP command. If the connection succeeds, you are prompted to enter a user name. Making FTP connections FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer can be made with either of the following. • The command prompt • FTP client software This section explains how to use the command prompt. For more information about using FTP client software, refer to the documentation of the FTP client software on your system. To log in 1 Chapter 8 File Operations 234 Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the following state. Recording, playback, serch, and other disc operations: Stopped THUMBNAIL indicator: Off Disc access by clip deletion, disc formatting, or other operation: Stopped Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function: Off Recording of video from external devices: Disabled Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function: Disconnected Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu: Values other than VIEW (OFF or LIVE) MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear FTP File Operations 4 Enter the user name “admin” and press the Enter key. When the user name is verified, your are prompted to enter a password. 5 Enter the password and press the Enter key. The password is set to the model name (“pdw-850”) when the unit is shipped from the factory. The login is complete when the password is verified. See “Command list” (page 235) for the protocol supported by this unit. If the connection times out This unit terminates FTP connections if no command is received within 90 seconds of the last command. If this occurs, log out (see the next section) and repeat steps 2 to 4. Note If you power this unit off during an FTP connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded. To log out To log out after finishing file operations, enter “QUIT” at the command prompt and press the Enter key. Command list This unit supports standard protocol (see the next section), and extended protocol (see page 238). Notes • To execute FTP commands, you must install application software with FTP function on your computer. • The commands supported by application software vary. • An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters. Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF-8. Standard commands In the command syntax column, <SP> means a space, entered by pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a new line, entered by pressing the Enter key. USER Send this command to begin the login process. Syntax: USER <SP> <username> <CRLF> Input example: USER admin PASS After sending the USER command, send this command to complete the login process. Syntax: PASS <SP> <password> <CRLF> Input example: PASS pdw-850 QUIT Terminates the FTP connection. If a file is being transferred, terminates after completion of the transfer. PASV This command requests this unit to “Listen” on a data port (which is not its default data port). It puts this unit into passive mode, waiting for the remote computer to make a data connection. Syntax: PASV <CRLF> TYPE Specifies the type of data to be transferred. Syntax: TYPE <SP> <type-code (options delimited by <SP>)> <CRLF> <type-code> can be any of the following. However, for XDCAM, data is always transferred as “I”, regardless of the type-code specification. • A: ASCII - N: Non-print - T: Telnet format - C: ASA Carriage Control • E: EBCDIC - N: Non-print - T: Telnet format - C: ASA Carriage Control • I: IMAGE (Binary) (default) • L: LOCAL BYTE - SIZE: byte size Input example: TYPE I STRU Specifies the data structure. Syntax: STRU <SP> <structure-code> <CRLF> <structure-code> can be any of the following. However, for XDCAM, the structure is always “F”, regardless of the structure-code specification. • F: File structure (default) • R: Record structure • P: Page structure Input example: STRU F Syntax: QUIT <CRLF> MODE Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit should connect for the next file transfer (for data transfer from this unit). Syntax: PORT <SP> <h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2> <CRLF> h1 (most significant byte) to h4 (least significant byte): IP address p1 (most significant byte), p2 (least significant byte): Port address Input example: PORT 10,0,0,1,242,48 (IP address: 10.0.0.1, Port number: 62000) Specifies the transfer mode. Syntax: MODE <SP> <mode-code> <CRLF> <mode-code> can be any of the following. However, for XDCAM, the mode is always “S”, regardless of the mode-code specification. • S: Stream mode (default) • B: Block mode • C: Compressed mode Input example: MODE S FTP File Operations Chapter 8 File Operations PORT 235 LIST STOR Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer. Syntax: LIST <SP> <options> <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on the remote computer to the current directory on this unit. Depending on the type of file transferred, the following items are created. • C*.MXF file 1), 3) - C*M01.XML file (metadata) - C*M02.KLV file (user metadata) - C*S01.MXF file (proxy AV data) - UMID (the UMID of the copy source file is not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued.) • E*E01.SMI file 2), 3) - E*M01.XML file (metadata) <options> can be any of the following. • -a: Also display file names that begin with “·”. • -F: Append “/” to directory names. The following data is transferred, depending on whether <path-name> specifies a directory or file. • Directory specified: A list of the files in the specified directory • File specified: Information about the specified file • No specification: A list of the files in the current directory. The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any character) may be used in <path-name>. Input example 1: LIST -a Clip Input example 2: LIST Clip/*.MXF NLST Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote computer, with no other information. Syntax: NLST <SP> <options or path-name> <CRLF> The following options may be specified when no path name is specified. • -a: Also display file names that begin with “.” • -I: Display information other than file name (gives the same result as the LIST command). • -F: Append “/” to directory names. The following data is transferred, depending on whether <path-name> specifies a directory or file. • Directory specified: A list of the file names only in the specified directory • No specification: A list of the file names only in the current directory. Chapter 8 File Operations 236 The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?” (any character) may be used in <path-name>. Input example 1: NLST-I Input example 2: NLST Clip/*.MXF 1) *: 0001 to 9999 2) *: 0001 to 0099 3) The unit can handle files with user-defined names in the “C*” and “E*”parts. Notes • For C*.MXF files, some data, such as file header metadata, may be missing. • Depending on the transfer destination directory and the file type, transfer may not be possible. • For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the copy source file is not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued. For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page 229). Syntax: STOR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> Input example: STOR Edit/E0001E01.SMI RNFR RNTO Rename a file. Specify the file to be renamed with the RNFR command, and specify the new name with the RNTO command. (Always follow a RNFR command with a RNTO command.) Syntax: RNFR <SP> <path-name (before change)> <CRLF> RNTO <SP> <path-name (after change)> <CRLF> Input example: RNFR General/info.txt RNTO General/clip_info.txt RETR DELE Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on this unit to the current directory on the remote computer. Syntax: RETR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> Input example: RETR Clip/C0001.MXF Deletes the specified file on this unit. FTP File Operations Note Depending on the directory and file type, deletion may not be possible. For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page 229). Syntax: DELE <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> Input example: DELE Clip/C0099.MXF STAT Sends information about properties of the specified file, or about data transfer status, from this unit to the remote computer. The following property information is sent, depending on the file type. • MXF file - File name - File type - CODEC type - Frame rate - Number of audio channels - Duration - UMID • non-MXF file - File name Syntax: STAT <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> The following data is transferred, depending on whether a file is specified with <path-name>. • File specified: The properties of the specified file • No specification: The size of the data transferred thus far (unit: bytes) • Input example: HELP RETR NOOP Does nothing except return a response. (Used to check whether this unit is running.) Syntax: NOOP <CRLF> PWD Displays the current directory (“/” if the directory is the root directory). Syntax: PWD <CRLF> CWD Changes the current directory (moves from the current directory to another directory). Syntax: CWD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> Moves to a directory as follows, depending on whether a directory is specified with <path-name>. • Directory specified: To the specified directory • No specification: To the root directory Input example: CWD General CDUP Moves one level up in the directory structure (makes the parent of the current directory be the current directory). Syntax: CDUP <CRLF> Input example: STAT Clip/C0001.MXF ABOR MKD Creates a new directory. Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in progress. Syntax: ABOR <CRLF> Directories can be created only in the General directory. SYST For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page 229). Displays the system name of this unit. Syntax: SYST <CRLF> Note Syntax: MKD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> RMD Deletes a directory. Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit, or an explanation of the specified command. Syntax: HELP <SP> <command-name> <CRLF> Directories can be deleted only in the General directory. The following data is transferred, depending on whether a command name is specified with <command-name>. • Command name specified: Explanation of the specified command. • No specification: Command list Note For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page 229). Syntax: RMD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> MDTM Chapter 8 File Operations HELP Acquires the date and time of the most recent modification of the file in the format FTP File Operations 237 “YYYYMMDDhhmmss” (YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second). Note The date and time cannot be acquired in the following cases. • When the path name includes a wildcard (“*”, replaced by any string of characters, or “?”, replaced by any single character). • When the size of the path name is greater than 1023 bytes. Syntax: MDTM <SP> <path-name> <CRLF> Input example: MDTM PROAV/ DISCMETA.XML Extended commands In the command syntax column, <SP> means a space, entered by pressing the space bar, and <CRLF> means a new line, entered by pressing the Enter key. SITE REPF Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer. This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed of video and audio data), for transfer of the required segment only. Notes • A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified. • This command cannot be used when the path name contains a space. Use the SITE REPFL command instead. Syntax: SITE REPF <SP> <path-name> <SP> <start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size> <CRLF> specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed of video and audio data), for transfer of the required segment only. Note A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified. Syntax: SITE REPFL <SP> “<path-name>” <SP> <start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size> <CRLF> <path-name> specifies the path name of the file to transfer. Enclose the path name in double quotation marks. <start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first frame is 0). <transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file). Input example: SITE REPFL “Clip/sakura 0001.MXF 5” 150 (Transfer sakura 0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150.) SITE FSTS Acquires the system status of this unit. One of the following status codes is sent. 0: Initial state, or no disc is loaded. 1: File system mount is OK. 3: File system mount is not OK. Syntax: SITE FSTS <CRLF> SITE MEID Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit. Syntax: SITE MEID <CRLF> SITE FUNC Chapter 8 File Operations <start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first frame is 0). <transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file). Input example: SITE REPF Clip/C0001.MXF 5 150 (Transfer C0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150.) SITE REPFL Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer. This command allows you to 238 FTP File Operations Acquires the function and version of the expanded commands. Information is sent in the following format. <main function> <SP> <branch function> <SP> <branch function version> For XDCAM, sent in a format like “200 MXF DISK 1” (200 is a response code). Syntax: SITE FUNC <CRLF> SITE UMMD When C*.MXF file is sent with the STOR, the copy source UMID is saved if this command is invoked immediately before the STOR command. Syntax: SITE UMMD <CRLF> SITE DF Recording Continuous Timecode via FTP Connection Acquires the amount of free disc space. Syntax: SITE <SP> DF <CRLF> SITE CHMOD Locks and unlocks clips. Also sets permissions for directories and files in the General directory. Syntax: SITE CHMOD <SP> <flag> <SP> <pathname> <CRLF> Specify one of the following values in <flag>, according to the specification in <path-name>. • When a clip is specified in <path-name>: 444: Lock. 666: Unlock. • When a directory in the General directory is specified in <path-name>: 555: Forbid writing to the directory. 777: Allow writing to the directory. • When a file in the General directory is specified in <path-name>: 444: Forbid writing to and execution of the file. 555: Forbid writing to the file, but allow execution. 666: Allow writing to the file, but forbid execution. 777: Allow writing to and execution of the file. When you are connected to the unit via FTP, you can create new clips with timecode that is continuous with the timecode of the last frame of the last clip on the disc. To record continuous timecode, set PRESET/ REGEN/CLOCK switch to “REGEN”, and then proceed as follows. Use the “STOR” command to transfer clip files from the computer that is connected to this unit. If you issue the “SITE UMMD” command immediately before the “STOR” command, the original timecode of the transferred file is recorded, regardless of the setting of PRESET/ REGEN/CLOCK switch. Input example: SITE CHMOD 444 Clip/ C0001.MXF (Lock clip C0001.MXF) SITE TCPR Presets the starting timecode of a clip copied with the STOR command. Specify the timecode in the format “ffssmmhh” (ff: frames, ss: seconds, mm: minutes, hh: hours). Notes Syntax: SITE TCPR <SP> <timecode > <CRLF> Input example: SITE TCPR 00050001 (The starting timecode is preset to 01:00:05:00.) Recording Continuous Timecode via FTP Connection Chapter 8 File Operations • This command remains in effect until a STOR command is executed, or (if no STOR command is executed) until the FTP connection is terminated. • If a SITE UMMD command is executed after this command, the SITE UMMD command takes priority and this command is discarded. • If this command is executed several times in sequence, the last command takes priority. 239 Chapter 9 Maintenance Chapter 9 Maintenance Testing the Camcorder before Shooting 4 After confirming that the disc is not write-protected, load the disc and close the disc compartment lid. Testing the camera Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session, preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor. Set the switches and selectors as follows. 1 Preparations for testing 4 1 3 2 34 5 6 1 Iris switch: Automatic 2 Zoom selector: SERVO/MAN 3 VDR SAVE/STBY switch: SAVE 4 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible. 5 OUTPUT/DCC switch: BARS 6 WHITE BAL switch: A or B 2 1 Attach a fully charged battery pack. 2 Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the BATT indicator shows at least five segments. If the BATT indicator does not show at least five segments, replace the battery pack with a fully charged one. 3 240 Check that there are no obstructions near the disc compartment, and then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid. Testing the Camcorder before Shooting Testing the viewfinder 1 Adjust the position of the viewfinder. 2 Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT, CONTRAST, and PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display. 3 Check each of the following operations. 4 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3 and 4. Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers. 5 Carry out of the following operations, and check that the ! indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on on the ‘!’ LED page of the USER menu. • Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu. • Set the SHUTTER selector to ON. • Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. • Use the lens extender. • Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than the standard value. 6 Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT repeatedly, and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen. 7 Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen. 8 Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT, and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on the viewfinder screen. 9 Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen. Note The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as expected, depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu. Chapter 9 Maintenance • The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen. • Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page. • Press the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed. • Turn the MENU knob and check that b moves within the page. • Press the MENU knob and check that b placed before the item changes to z and z placed before the setting of the item changes to ?. • Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes. For details, see “Selecting the display items” (page 201). Testing the iris and zoom functions 1 Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly. 2 Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually. 3 Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at objects of different brightness. Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly. 4 Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly. 5 Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check the following points when the GAIN selector is moved from L to M to H. • Even when the brightness of the object does not change, the iris is automatically adjusted in accordance with the change in the gain setting. • The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting. Testing the Camcorder before Shooting 241 6 Chapter 9 Maintenance If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens, put the extender lever of the lens into the 2× position and check the following points. 8 • The indication “EX” appears at the top left on the viewfinder screen. • The auto iris functions correctly. 9 Testing the VDR Check that fast reverse playback and normal playback are performed. 1 Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on. 2 Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off. 3 4 5 10 Press the STOP button again, then 11 Press the NEXT button, and check that the image of the beginning of the next clip is displayed. (2) Testing the automatic audio level adjusting functions Set the switches located below the color LCD as follows. 2 BRIGHT button: H, M or L DISP SEL/EXPAND button: STATUS DISPLAY switch: COUNTER Set the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switches to AUTO. 3 Set the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches to F (FRONT). 4 Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the sound level, respectively. Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET, and set the F-RUN/ SET/R-RUN to R-RUN. Press the REC START button and check the following points. (3) Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT. 2 Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check that the channel-1 and -2 audio level meters on the LCD monitor show more and more segments as you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder. Press the REC START button again. Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the VTR button on the lens. Press the RESET/RETURN button and check that the indication in the counter display on the LCD monitor is “00:00:00:00”. 242 Check that the image of the beginning of the current or previous clip is displayed. Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT. Check that recording stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off. 7 press the PREV button. 1 • The indication in the counter display on the LCD monitor is changing. • The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on. • The RF and SERVO indicators on the color LCD are off. 6 Press the STOP button, then press the F FWD button. Check that playback stops and fast forward playback are performed. Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively. (1) Testing the recording and playback functions Press the F REV button, then press the PLAY/PAUSE button. Testing the Camcorder before Shooting Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the speaker volume changes accordingly. Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in “(5) Testing external microphones”. 2 Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT. 2 Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack. 3 3 Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone. Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in “(5) Testing external microphones”. 4 Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly. 5 Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack. Check the earphone as in step 3. 1 If the audio level meters on the color and monochrome LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level, the function of the XLR connection automatic detection is working correctly. If it does not reflect the changing sound level, the function of the XLR connection automatic detection function is off. Set REAR XLR AUTO to “ON” on the VDR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. If it does not reflect even after making this setting, the XLR connection automatic detection function does not work correctly. (5) Testing external microphones 1 Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. 2 Set the +48V/OFF switches as follows. • If the connected microphone is of the internal power supply type, set the switch to OFF. • If the connected microphone is of the external power supply type, set the switch to +48V. 3 Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR. 4 Aim the microphones at a sound source. 5 Check that the audio level meters on the LCD monitor and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level. (6) Checking the XLR connection automatic detection function Before starting to check, remove the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected. Chapter 9 Maintenance 1 (4) Testing the earphone and speaker (7) Checking the user bit and timecode functions 1 Set the user bits as required. For the operation, see “Setting the user bits” (page 69). 2 Set the timecode. For the operation, see “Setting the timecode” (page 69). 3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN. 4 Press the REC START button, and check that recording starts and that the timecode indication in the counter display changes. 5 Press the REC START button again, and check that recording stops and that the timecode indication stops changing. Testing the Camcorder before Shooting 243 Chapter 9 Maintenance 6 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN, and check that the timecode indication starts changing again and continues to change even when you restart recording and stop recording again. 7 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT, and check that the user bit data that was set is displayed. Maintenance Cleaning the viewfinder Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel. Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner. Caution Never use organic solvents such as thinners. Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning 1 4 1 2 1 Viewfinder barrel 2 Eyecup holder 3 Protecting filter 4 Packing ring 5 Eyecup 1 3 2 4 5 3 Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel. For the detaching procedure, see “Detaching the eyepiece” (page 37). 244 Maintenance 2 Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder. 3 Remove the protecting filter, together with the packing ring, from inside the eyecup holder. 4 Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring. Fog-proof filter Chapter 9 Maintenance Depending on the temperature and humidity, the protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath. To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear, replace the protecting filter with a fog-proof filter (option, part No. 1-547-341-11). Fitting the fog-proof filter Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the fog-proof filter. Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter, the packing ring, and the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof. Note When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging coating. Note about the battery terminal The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable part. Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use. Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime. Contact a Sony service or sales representative for more information about inspections. Maintenance 245 Chapter 9 Maintenance Operation Warnings If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated, a warning is issued by various visible and audible indicators. These visible and audible indicators are: • In the status display on the LCD monitor: a warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the table of warning messages” below) and a warning indication (“B”) • The WARNING indicator on the side panel of the camcorder (“C”), and a warning sound from the speaker and earphones (“D”) • In the viewfinder: a warning message (“A”), and an indicator above or below the viewfinder screen (“E”) The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the minimum position to suppress the sound. Layout of the table of warning messages A Warning indication State WARNING indicator Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT B C D E Problem VDR operation • The operation of the WARNING indicator and the indicators in the viewfinder is represented by graphic symbols as follows. : Continuous : 1 flash/s : 4 flashes/s • The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows. : Continuous beep : 1 beep/s : 4 beeps/s 246 Operation Warnings E Action to take MEM Full! ILL REC! Verify ERR! Cache Full! Warning indication State — — WARNING indicator Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Recording error Recording stops. Turn off the power and consult a Sony service representative. Warning indication State — — WARNING indicator Warning sound b) b) REC/TALLY b) BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Shockproof memory overflow Recording continues but may be substandard. Protect the unit from shocks and vibrations. Warning indication State WARNING indicator REC/TALLY — — Warning sound b) b) b) BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Input sync error Recording continues but may be substandard. Turn off the power and contact a Sony service representative. (This indication may be given momentarily when a GENLOCK signal is connected or disconnected, but this does not indicate a problem.) WARNING indicator REC/TALLY Warning indication State — — Warning sound b) b) b) BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take An error was detected in the signals recorded on the disc. Recording continues but may be substandard. Exchange the disc. Warning indication State WARNING indicator REC/TALLY — — b) Warning sound — b) Chapter 9 Maintenance Error**-** a) Warning messages BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Cache memory became full during a Disc Exchange Change mode operation. Video and audio recording may be interrupted. Exchange the disc quickly. Operation Warnings 247 Disc Error! Before Full h) 128GB Disc! k) 100GB Disc! j) DISC FULL! d) Near MAX # i) Chapter 9 Maintenance 248 Warning indication State — — WARNING indicator Warning sound b) b) REC/TALLY b) BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take A disc defect was detected. Recording continues, avoiding the defect, but may be substandard. If defects are detected repeatedly, exchange the disc. Warning indication State WARNING indicator REC/TALLY DISC flash f) Warning sound b) b) BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Disc almost full. Operation continues. Be prepared to exchange the disc. WARNING indicator REC/TALLY Warning indication State — — Warning sound BATT — b) (only when recording the 300th clip) Problem VDR operation Action to take Nine or fewer clips remain. Operation continues. Be prepared to exchange the disc. Warning indication State WARNING indicator REC/TALLY DISC and E flash g) d) Problem VDR operation Disc full. Recording stops. Warning indication State — — Problem Warning sound WARNING indicator d) d) BATT — Action to take Exchange the disc. Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT — VDR operation Action to take Disc cannot be used in unit. Automatically ejects. Exchange the disc. Warning indication State WARNING indicator REC/TALLY — — Warning sound BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Disc cannot be used. Automatically ejects. Exchange the disc. Operation Warnings U1/U2 Disc!/XDS Disc MAX # Clips MAX # Files LOW BATT! h) BATT EMPTY! High TEMP! State — — WARNING indicator Warning sound — — REC/TALLY BATT — — Problem VDR operation Action to take Disc cannot be salvaged. Cannot record. Salvage on device used to record. Warning indication State WARNING indicator — — Warning sound d) d) REC/TALLY BATT — d) Problem VDR operation Action to take The upper limit of 300 recorded clips reached. Cannot record. Exchange the disc. Warning indication State WARNING indicator — — Problem Warning sound d) d) VDR operation The upper limit of files reached. Cannot record. Warning indication State WARNING indicator BATT flash f) Problem Chapter 9 Maintenance Warning indication REC/TALLY d) BATT — Action to take Exchange the disc. Warning sound e) VDR operation REC/TALLY BATT e) Action to take Battery almost exhausted. Operation continues. Replace the battery. Warning indication State WARNING indicator REC/TALLY BATT and E flash g) Warning sound BATT Problem VDR operation Action to take Battery exhausted. Operation stops. Replace the battery. Warning indication State WARNING indicator — — Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Internal temperature high. Operation continues. Power the unit off and move it to a cool place. Operation Warnings 249 ACC Sensor!/ Skew Sensor Chapter 9 Maintenance Warning indication State — — WARNING indicator REC/TALLY BATT — Problem VDR operation Action to take Internal drive sensor error Operation continues. Protect the unit from shocks and vibrations, turn off the power, and contact a Sony service representative. a) Asterisks (*) are replaced by digits in the display. b) During recording c) During playback, fast forward, fast reverse, or stop d) During recording pause e) During recording or pause f) 1 flash/s g) 4 flashes/s h) During recording, displayed in the LCD monitor only (When the DISP SEL/EXPAND button is set to STATUS) i) During recording and recording pause, displayed in the LCD monitor only (When the DISP SEL/ EXPAND button is set to STATUS) j) When TL-RE (3-layer) disc is inserted k) When QL-R (4-layer) disc is inserted For details about the warning displays and alarm messages on the viewfinder, see the next item. Operation/alarm messages Operation and alarm messages are displayed in the operation/alarm message display area (see page 31) of the viewfinder screen. AUTO INTERVAL **M**S The unit is operating in Auto Interval Rec mode (**M**S: Indicates the shooting interval in minutes and seconds). MANU INTERVAL *FRAME The unit is operating in the singleshot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode (*FRAME: Indicates the number of frames recorded in one shot). INTERVAL **S (M/H) *FRAME The unit is operating in the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode (**S (M/H): Indicates the trigger interval, in seconds (minutes or hours), *FRAME: Indicates the number of frames recorded in one shot). LOW LIGHT Depending on the setting, the subject illumination is inadequate. 250 Warning sound Operation Warnings ON-BOARD BATTERY EMPTY The backup battery of the internal DCP EEPROM DATA NG! DR EEPROM DATA NG! DCP/DR EEPROM DATA NG! If this message continues to appear even after the unit is powered off and on again several times, then the factory adjustment data is invalid. Contact a Sony service representative. clock is empty. a) a) Contact a Sony service representative to replace the battery. VDR operation messages are displayed in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen (see page 31). Take the actions listed in the following table. ILL. Disc! A disc that cannot be used by this unit was inserted. Insert another Professional Disc. ILL. Index! Index file or file system error. No FS! Exchange or format the disc. Unknown FS! No Support! A recorded clip cannot be handled by this unit. Exchange or format the disc. FORMAT NG! The disc could not be formatted automatically. Exchange the disc. Disc Damage A disc that cannot be recorded was inserted. To record, exchange the disc. Non AV Full MAX # Files Over DUR! The disc is full. Exchange or format the disc. DI read err The disc was not recognized. Try Read err ejecting the disc and inserting it DRV ADJ err again. Or exchange the disc. A disc that requires salvage was inserted. To record on the disc, eject the disc, insert it again, and execute salvage processing. Salvage NG! Salvage processing failed. For details, see “Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage function)” (page 75). Salvage XXXX The loaded disc cannot be salvaged by this unit. The “XXXX” in the message is a code for XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc. Refer to the list of device codes (see page 76) and salvage the disc using one of the indicated devices. REC INHI.! The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is in the recording disabled position, or salvage processing needs to be done on the loaded disc. Set the tab to the recording enabled position. Or eject the disc, insert it again, and perform salvage processing. 1080/50i 1080/25P 1080/59.94i 1080/29.97P 1080/23.98P 720/50P 720/59.94P 625/50i 525/59.94i This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current resolution or system frequency setting of this unit does not match the resolution or system frequency of the inserted disc. To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the resolution or system frequency setting of this unit, or enable mixed format recording mode. HD422 1080 HD422 720 HD420 1080 HD420 720 IMX50 Clip IMX40 Clip IMX30 Clip DVCAM Clip 8CHx16 Clip 4CHx24 Clip 2CHx16 Clip This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current recording format of this unit does not match the recording format of the inserted disc. To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the recording format of this unit, or enable mixed format recording mode. System FREQ This appears when the current system frequency of this unit does not match the system frequency of clips recorded on the inserted disc. To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the system frequency of this unit. Mixed REC! This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current recording format of this unit does not match the recording format of the inserted disc. To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the recording format of this unit, or enable mixed format recording mode. Index File! There is an unsupported index file on the disc to which you are trying to record. Exchange or format the disc. File System There is an unsupported file system on the disc to which you are trying to record. Exchange or format the disc. ILL. PLAY! An A/V phase error occurred during playback. Stop the disc. Lid Closed! The lid of the disc compartment does not open. Check the lid. Lid Open! The lid of the disc compartment is not closed. Close it securely. No Clip! There are no clips recorded on the disc. Exchange for a recorded disc. No Disc! There is no disc loaded. Insert a disc and try the operation again. Chapter 9 Maintenance Run Salvage STOP ONCE! The operation is not possible REC mode! while the disc is being played or recorded. Stop the disc. Loading! Unloading! An operation was attempted while a disc was loading or unloading. Wait for the disc to finish loading or unloading and try again. Disc Top! Disc End! The operation is not possible because the disc is at the top or end. Clip Top! Clip End! In single clip playback mode, the specified operation is not possible because playback has reached the top or end of the clip. Operation Warnings 251 Chapter 9 Maintenance Formatting! The disc is being automatically formatted. Wait until the format ends. Recording The unit is writing to the file system. Wait until writing finishes. No EM Space Essence marks cannot be inserted. EM Full! For details, see “Recording essence marks” (page 82). NVRAM NG! An error was detected while accessing internal memory. Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative. Update Err! A firmware update failed. Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative. Unknown USB An unsupported USB device was connected to this unit. NO USB MEMORY! A USB flash drive write operation was attempted with no USB flash drive connected. USB MEMORY INHIBIT! USB M. INHI A write inhibited USB flash drive was connected with MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu set to ENABL. USB MEMORY ERROR! The connected USB flash drive was not usable when a USB flash drive write operation was attempted. M. Shortage A USB flash drive write operation was attempted without enough free memory in the USB flash drive. USB MEMORY FULL! A USB flash drive write operation was attempted without free memory in the USB flash drive. MEM REC NG! A USB flash drive write operation failed with MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu set to ENABL. SUB Clip NG The In and Out point positions are invalid. Set correct In and Out points. M. access! An attempt was made to switch GUI screens during a USB flash drive write operation. MAX# SB CLP The total number of sub clips is over the upper limit (300). ILL. TIME Resolution An attempt was made to register a clip in a clip list with a different resolution. A clock error has occurred. Set the date and time of the internal clock again. CL OVER DUR The total duration of sub clips in the current clip list is over the upper limit (24 hours). Cache REC! Disc Exchag! Live Logg! An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the picture cache function is enabled. The operation will be ignored. An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the disc exchange cache function is enabled. The operation will be ignored. An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the Live Logging function is set to Live View mode. The operation will be ignored. SB CLP mode An essence mark or clip flag operation was attempted while the SUB CLIP indicator was lit. Press the SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button to turn the indicator off and try again. 252 FAN Stopped The main unit or drive fan has DR-FAN Stop stopped. Avoid use under high temperatures, turn off the power, and contact a Sony service representative. No SEL List No clip list is selected. Create a new clip list, or load a clip list from the disc. No List! There is no clip list. Create a clip list. No SUB Clip There are no sub clips in the clip list. Register a sub clip, or load another clip list. Operation Warnings An alarm message may appear in the LCD monitor during thumbnail search, scene selection, and clip list operations. In that case, take the action indicated in the following table. An attempt is made to execute a Move Sub Clips operation (see page 129) when there are no sub clip in the current clip list, or when there is only one. Shot Mark does not Exist. Cannot Expand Clip any Further. An attempt is made to execute a Delete Shot Mark (see page 117) operation on a clip with no shot marks recorded in. Chapter does An attempt was made to display a not Exist. nonexistent chapter. The clip cannot be expanded into more blocks. This alarm appears when the DISP SEL/EXPAND button is pressed when the number of blocks is maximum, or when the duration of an expanded thumbnail is one frame. Selected Essence Mark Does not Exist. The selected essence mark does not exist. This alarm appears in the essence mark selection screen when the specified essence mark does not exist on the disc. Sub Clip is Invalid. Set Appropriate IN/OUT Points. The temporal relationship between the specified In and Out points in a TRIM operation (see page 130) is not correct. Reset so that the value of the Out point timecode is larger than the value of the In point timecode. Duration of One Clip List must be Less than 24 Hours. The total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as the result of an Add Sub Clips (see page 128) or Trim Sub Clip (see page 130) operation. No More Sub Clips can be Added to the Clip List. The total number of the sub clips of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 300 as the result of an Add Sub Clips (see page 128) or Trim Sub Clip (see page 130) operation. Sub Clip does An attempt is made to execute a not Exist. Move Sub Clips (see page 129), Trim Sub Clip (see page 130), Delete Sub Clips (see page 130), or Set Start Time Code (see page 131) operation with no sub clips in the current clip list. Clip List does An attempt is made to execute a not Exist. Delete Clip List operation (see page 132) when there are no clip lists on the disc. Chapter 9 Maintenance Move is Invalid. Alarm messages during thumbnail search, scene selection, and clip list operations Some Essence An attempt is made to delete an Mark cannot essence mark that cannot be be Deleted. deleted with a Delete Essence Mark operation. Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be deleted. Some Essence An attempt is made to move an Mark cannot essence mark that cannot be be Moved. moved with a Move Essence Mark operation. Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be moved. Command Disabled. An attempt was made to execute the Format Disc command with Setting Format Disc set to “Disable”. Clip is Locked. An attempt is made to delete a clip, set the clip thumbnail, or delete a shot mark when the clip is locked. All Clips are Locked. An attempt is made to execute a Lock All Clips operation when all clips are already locked. All Clips are Unlocked. An attempt is made to execute an Unlock All Clips operation when all clips are already unlocked. A File with A file name that was specified in a the Name you Set Clip Name operation already Specified exists. Already Exists. Specify a Different Name. Set NAMING An attempt was made to rename a FORM to clip with Set Clip Name when “free” NAMING FORM is not set to “FREE” (see page 94). Operation Warnings 253 Chapter 9 Maintenance “No Flash Drive” In the media selection screen of the Load Planning Metadata/ Select Drive command, “USB Flash Drive” was selected with no USB flash drive connected. Not Loaded. A command related to planning metadata was executed with no planning metadata loaded. Try again after loading planning metadata. Syntax Error! Loading of planning metadata failed because of a syntax error. Correct the error and try loading it again. 254 Irregular Disc is Used. Use Professional Disc. The inserted disc cannot be recorded or played. This unit can record and play Professional Discs. Insert a Professional Disc. The Disc Write Protect TAB is set to Save. An attempt was made to format a write protected disc. Try formatting the disc after moving the write protect tab away from the Save position. Auto Formatting was not Completed. Automatic disc formatting failed. Video Resolution Differ from it on Clip List. An attempt was made to add a clip to a clip list when the video resolution (number of system lines) did not match the video resolution of clips in the clip list. Clips cannot be added to a clip list unless the video resolution matches. No Clip Meets the Condition. No clip meeting the clip filtering conditions was found. Operation Warnings Appendix Use and storage Do not subject the unit to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped. • Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F). • In damp or dusty locations • Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain • Locations subject to violent vibration • Near strong magnetic fields • Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields. • In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods Before storing the camcorder for a long period Remove the battery pack. To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals. It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off. Shipping • Remove the disc before transporting the unit. • If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of the unit. Note on laser beams Laser beams may damage the CCDs. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the camera. Care of the unit Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower. If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the unit. Condensation Do not cover the unit while operating Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can cause excessive internal heat build-up. After use Always turn off the POWER switch. In the event of operating problems If you should experience problems with the unit, contact a Sony representative. Use and storage locations Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places. • In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature range: –5 °C to +40 °C (23 °F to 104 °F)) Appendix Important Notes on Operation If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm location, or if ambient temperature suddenly rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off the unit and wait until the condensation clears before operating the unit. Operating the unit while condensation is present may damage the unit. Do the following to prevent this from happening. • When you move or operate the camcorder in an environment where condensation may form, be sure to load a disc in advance and close the disc compartment lid. For details, see “Loading and unloading a disc” (page 74). Important Notes on Operation 255 Fitting the zoom lens It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to the section “Mounting the Lens” (page 41). may be produced on the screen, or the image may be distorted. Monitor screen Vertical tails shown on the image Viewfinder Appendix • Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing directly at the sun. The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder. • Do not use the viewfinder close to strong magnetic fields. This can cause picture distortion. About the LCD panels The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured with high precision technology, giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”, either always off (black), always on (red, green, or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long period of use, because of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These problems are not a malfunction. Note that any such problems have no effect on recorded data. Phenomena specific to image sensors Note The following phenomena that may occur in images are specific to image sensors. They do not indicate a malfunction. White flecks Although the image sensors are produced with high-precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related to the principle of image sensors and is not a malfunction. The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases: - when operating at a high environmental temperature - when you have raised the gain (sensitivity) - when using the slow shutter Vertical smear When an extremely bright object, such as a strong spotlight or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails 256 Important Notes on Operation Bright object (e.g., strong spotlight, strong reflected light, flashlight, the sun) Aliasing When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may appear jagged or flicker. General Mass Approx. 4.2 kg (9 lb 4.1 oz) (body only) Approx. 6.2 kg (13 lb 11 oz) (with viewfinder, microphone, disc, and BPL80S battery) Operating temperature –5 °C to +40 °C (23 °F to 104 °F) Storage temperature –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) Dimensions Unit: mm (inches), excluding protrusions, body only 1) 124 (5) Humidity 10% to 90% (relative humidity) 222 (8 3/4) 269 (10 5/8) 1) The power consumption of the optional CA-FB70/ CA-TX70 is not included in the total. Appendix • When using battery with peripheral equipment attached to the camcorder, ensure that the total power consumption1) does not exceed 40 W. • When using the AC-DN10 with peripheral devices attached to the camcorder, ensure that the total power consumption1) does not exceed 50 W. • When using the AC-DN2B with peripheral devices attached to the camcorder, ensure that the total power consumption1) does not exceed 60 W. • Connect only devices with current consumption of 1.0 A or lower to the DC OUT connector. Specifications 332 (13 1/8) 1) The values for dimensions are approximate. Power requirements 12 V DC (+5.0 V/−1.0 V DC) Power consumption Approx. 37 W When recording (body only), LCD monitor on, VDR SAVE/STBY switch set to SAVE Approx. 41 W When recording (viewfinder, manual lens, and microphone attached), LCD monitor on, VDR SAVE/STBY switch set to SAVE Notes • Do not connect video lights with power consumption of 50 W or higher. Continuous operating time Approx. 115 min. with BP-L80S battery Approx. 100 min. with BP-FL75 battery Recording format (video) MPEG HD422 (CBR: 50 Mbps) MPEG HD: HQ mode (VBR, 35 Mbps max.) SP mode (CBR, 25 Mbps) LP mode (VBR, 18 Mbps max.) (playback only) MPEG IMX (CBR, 50/40/30 Mbps) DVCAM (CBR, 25 Mbps) Recording format (audio) MPEG HD422: 4 ch/24 bits/48 kHz MPEG HD: 4 ch/16 bits/48 kHz MPEG IMX: 4 ch/24 bits/48 kHz or 4 ch/16 bits/48 kHz DVCAM: 4 ch/16 bits/48 kHz Recording format (proxy video) MPEG-4 Recording format (proxy audio) A-law (4 ch/8 bits/8 kHz) Recording/playback time (MPEG HD422) 50 Mbps: Approx. 95 min. (PFD50DLA), Approx. 43 min. (PFD23A) Specifications 257 Appendix Recording/playback time (MPEG HD) 35 Mbps, 4-ch audio: More than 145 min. (PFD50DLA), More than 65 min. (PFD23A) 35 Mbps, 2-ch audio (playback only): More than 150 min. (PFD50DLA), More than 68 min. (PFD23A) 25 Mbps, 4-ch audio: Approx. 190 min. (PFD50DLA), Approx. 85 min. (PFD23A) 25 Mbps, 2-ch audio (playback only): Approx. 200 min. (PFD50DLA), Approx. 90 min. (PFD23A) 18 Mbps, 4-ch audio (playback only): More than 248 min. (PFD50DLA), More than 112 min. (PFD23A) 18 Mbps, 2-ch audio (playback only): More than 265 min. (PFD50DLA), More than 122 min. (PFD23A) Recording/playback time (MPEG IMX) 50 Mbps: Approx. 100 min. (PFD50DLA), Approx. 45 min. (PFD23A) 40 Mbps: Approx. 120 min. (PFD50DLA), Approx. 55 min. (PFD23A) 30 Mbps: Approx. 150 min. (PFD50DLA), Approx. 68 min. (PFD23A) Recording/playback time (DVCAM) 25 Mbps: Approx. 185 min. (PFD50DLA), Approx. 85 min. (PFD23A) Recording frame rate MPEG HD422 50 Mbps: 1920 × 1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i, 25p, 23.98p 1280 × 720/59.94p, 50p MPEG HD420 (HQ 35 Mbps, SP 25 Mbps): 1440 × 1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i, 25p, 23.98p 1280 × 720/59.94p, 50p MPEG HD420 (LP 18 Mbps): 1440 × 1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i, 25p, 23.98p (playback only) 258 Specifications MPEG IMX 50/40/30 Mbps/DVCAM mode: 720 × 486/59.94i, 29.97p 720 × 576/50i, 25p Lens Lens mount 2 /3-inch type 48 bayonet mount Input/output Inputs Genlock input BNC type (1) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω Timecode input BNC type (1) 0.5 Vp-p to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ SDI input BNC type (1) HD/SD switchable HD-SDI: SMPTE 292M (with embedded audio) SD-SDI: SMPTE 259M (with embedded audio) Audio input CH-1/CH-2: XLR-type 3-pin (female) (2) Line/Mic/Mic +48V/AES/EBU selectable Microphone input XLR-type 5-pin (female, stereo) (1) Outputs Test output BNC (1), switchable HD: Y SD: composite (character on/off) SDI outputs BNC type (2) 1 (HD/SD switchable): HD-SDI: SMPTE 292M (with embedded audio) SD-SDI: SMPTE 259M (with embedded audio) 2 (HD/SD switchable, character on/off) HD-SDI: SMPTE 292M (with embedded audio) SD-SDI: SMPTE 259M (with embedded audio) Timecode output BNC type (1) 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω Earphone output Mini-jack (2) Front: monaural Rear: stereo/monaural Speaker output Monaural Others Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB Dynamic range 93 dB or higher Distortion 0.08% or lower (at 1 kHz, reference level) Crosstalk –70 dB or lower (at 1 kHz, reference level) Wow and flutter Below measurable limit Headroom 12/16/18/20 dB (selectable) Camera section DC input XLR-type 4-pin (male) (1) 11 V to 17 V Imager DC output 4-pin (1) (for wireless adaptor or UHF synthesized diversity tuner) 11 V to 17 V DC (max. 1 A) Effective Picture Elements 1920 (H) × 1080 (V) Lens 12-pin Remote 8-pin Light 2-pin, DC 12 V, max. 50 W Camera adaptor 50-pin (1) Ethernet RJ-45 (1) 100BASE-TX: IEEE 802.3u 10BASE-T: IEEE 802.3 USB For proxy recording on USB flash drive and firmware version update (1) Appendix Audio output CH-1/CH-2: XLR-type 5-pin (male, stereo) (1) Audio performance 3-chip 2/3-inch type HD PowerHAD FX CCDs Optical system F1.4 prism system Built-in optical filters CC filter (optical) A: Cross filter B: 3200K C: 4300K D: 6300K ND filter (optical) 1: Clear 2: 1/4 ND 3: 1/16 ND 4: 1/64 ND Shutter speed (time) 1080/59.94i: 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS1), SLS2) 1080/50i: 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS1), SLS2) Specifications 259 Appendix 1080/29.97p: 1/40, 1/60, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS1), SLS2) 1080/25p: 1/33, 1/50, 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS1), SLS2) 1080/23.98p: 1/32, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/96, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS1), SLS2) 720/59.94p: 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS1), SLS2) 720/50p: 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS1), SLS2) 1) ECS: Extended Clear Scan 2) SLS: Slow Shutter Shutter speed (Slow Shutter (SLS)) 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 frame Slow & Quick Motion function (MPEG HD422 50M/1080 mode only) 23.98p: Selectable from 1 to 48 frame/ sec as recording frame rate 25p: Selectable from 1 to 50 frame/sec as recording frame rate 29.97p: Selectable from 1 to 59.94 frame/sec as recording frame rate Sensitivity (2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance) 1080/59.94i: F11 (typical) 1080/50i: F12 (typical) Minimum illumination Approx. 0.3 lx (F1.4 lens, +42 dB, with slow shutter: Off) White balance Preset (3200K), Memory A, Memory B/ATW Gain selection −6, −3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 dB S/N ratio 62 dB (58 dB without noise suppressor) Horizontal resolution 1000 TV lines or more (1920 × 1080i mode) Registration 0.02% or less for entire screen area (excluding distortion due to lens) 260 Specifications Modulation depth (screen center) 45% or higher at 27.5 MHz (typical) Digital extender x2, x3, x4 Viewfinder and related equipment Viewfinder HDVF-20A/200/C35W/C30WR Viewfinder Rotation Bracket BKW-401 Note Contact a Sony service representative for information about the viewfinders able to use the BKW-401. Other equipment Built-in LCD monitor 3.5-inch type color LCD monitor 960 × 540 1) 1) Viewable area measured diagonally. Built-in speaker (1) Optical disc drive section General Supported discs PFD50DLA Professional Disc (capacity: 50.0 GB) PFD23A Professional Disc (capacity: 23.3 GB) Data transfer rate Max. 72 Mbps Digital video performance Sampling frequency Y: 74.176 MHz (59.94i), 74.25 MHz (50i/25P) Pb/Pr: 37.088 MHz (59.94i), 37.125 MHz (50i/25P) Quantization 8 bits/sample Compression MPEG-2 4:2:2P@HL 50 Mbps Other peripheral devices CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor Supplied accessories Additional equipment PDW-HR1 XDCAM HD422 Field Station CA-FB70 Camera Adaptor CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor Equipment for maintenance and easier handling Appendix Shoulder strap (1) Microphone cable (1) Microphone spacer (1) Lens mount cap (1) Operation Guide (1) Operation Manual (CD-ROM) (1) CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor LC-H300 Hard Carrying Case LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case Power supply and related equipment VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor BP- L80S/FL75 Battery Pack Maintenance Manual BC-L160/L500/L70 Battery Charger Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. AC-DN10/DN2B AC Adaptor Equipment for remote control RM-B170/B750 Remote Control Unit Audio equipment ECM-680S Stereo/Monaural Microphone ECM-678/673 Monaural Microphone CAC-12 Microphone Holder DWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver (Only when using the CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor) SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND. WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner WRT-850/860 UHF Synthesized Transmitter DWT-B01 Digital Wireless Transmitter DMX-P02 Portable Digital Mixer Specifications 261 Notes Appendix 262 • Always make a test recording, and verify that it was recorded successfully. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE. • Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER. • SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR MADE BY THIRD PARTIES. • SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS, REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS. • SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND. Specifications Chart of Optional Components and Accessories Appendix ECM-680S/678/ 673 Microphone LCD monitor BVM-L230, LMD series monitor CAC-12 Microphone Holder XDCAM HD series recorder PDW-HD1500 HDVF-20A/200/ C35W/C30WR Viewfinder HDCAM series recorder HDW-2000 series recorder, HDW-S280 WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit DWR-S02D Digital Wireless Receiver PFD23A/PFD50DLA Professional disc PDW-850 RM-B170/B750 Remote Control Unit VCT-14 Tripod adaptor CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor CA-FB70 Camera Adaptor CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor Tripod LC-DS300 SFT Soft carrying case a) BP-L80S/FL75 Battery Pack BC-L70 Battery Charger BC-L160 Battery Charger LC-H300 Hard carrying case AC-DN10/DN2B AC Adaptor BC-L500 Battery Charger a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted. However, remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm from the front of the main unit. Chart of Optional Components and Accessories 263 List of Supported USB Keyboards Appendix When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA/PAL AREA and the font setting is European Alphabet 1) On this unit, you can enter any of the characters and symbols supported by the keyboards listed below. Select the corresponding language by selecting Settings >Select USB Keyboard Language in the Disc Menu (see page 122). English [United Kingdom] English [United States] French [France] 264 List of Supported USB Keyboards 1) When the font setting is “Simplified Chinese” or “Traditional Chinese”, a keyboard with the same layout as the English [United States] keyboard is selected automatically. German [Germany] Appendix Italian [Italy] Polish (Programmers) [Poland] Russian [Russia] Spanish [Spain] List of Supported USB Keyboards 265 When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA/PAL AREA and the font setting is Korean The keyboard is fixed as the Korean keyboard, and you can enter Hangul characters. Note The keyboard language cannot be changed. Appendix When the area of use is set to NTSC(J)AREA The keyboard is fixed as the Japanese keyboard. Notes • The keyboard language cannot be changed. • It is not possible to enter Japanese hiragana, katakana, and kanji. 266 List of Supported USB Keyboards Recommended USB Flash Drives (As of April 2014) Pocket Bit QX series • USM128GQX • USM64GQX • USM32GQX • USM16GQX • USM8GQX Pocket Bit T series • USM128GT • USM64GT • USM32GT • USM16GT • USM8GT MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License Appendix The following Sony USB flash drives are recommended for use with this unit. Trademarks and Licenses THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. Pocket Bit U series • USM128GU • USM64GU • USM32GU • USM16GU • USM8GU Note USB flash drives other than the recommended flash drives listed above may not be recognized when connected to the USB connector. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP:// WWW.MPEGLA.COM MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/ sales of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4 Visual video information in any manner (such as online video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV broadcasting). Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206, http://www.mpegla.com Recommended USB Flash Drives (As of April 2014) / Trademarks and Licenses 267 MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License Appendix ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206. “PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage media storing MPEG-2 video information such as DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG LA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206 http://www.mpegla.com About IJG (Independent JPEG Group) This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Character display software “iType” This product includes technology from Monotype Imaging Inc., including iType® and certain fonts. 268 Trademarks and Licenses About libupnp Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. About OpenSSL OpenSSL License --------------- Trademarks and Licenses Appendix /* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * [email protected]. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the OpenSSL Project. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== 269 * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson ([email protected]). * */ Appendix 270 Original SSLeay License ----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written * by Eric Young ([email protected]). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). * * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young ([email protected])" * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: * "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Trademarks and Licenses Trademarks and Licenses Appendix * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */ 271 About GPS Appendix What is GPS? GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system for determining your exact location anywhere on the planet, using a constellation of high-precision satellites launched by the U.S.A. The system is composed of a minimum of 24 GPS satellites, four each in six orbits at an altitude of approximately 20,000 km (12,400 miles). Signals are received from GPS satellites and are used to calculate your location based on satellite orbital information (almanac data) and the signal propagation time data. Calculating your location is called positioning. If signals are received from three or more satellites, the latitude and longitude of a location can be determined. • The positions of the GPS satellites is constantly changing, hence the time required for positioning may vary or positioning may not be possible, depending on the location and time of use. • GPS is a positioning system that receives signals from satellites. GPS should be used in locations with a clear view of the sky to prevent obstruction or reflection of the GPS signals by nearby buildings, trees, and other tall structures. • Positioning information may not be recorded in the following locations and conditions where signals from GPS satellites cannot be received. - In tunnels, indoors, or beside buildings - In narrow roadways between buildings and skyscrapers - Underground, in dense areas of vegetation, under overhead structures, or near power lines or other equipment that generate magnetic fields - Near 1.5 GHz band mobile phones or other equipment that emit radio waves of the same frequency Errors in positioning • Immediately after setting [GPS SETTING] to ON, positioning may take longer if you are moving, compared to the time taken if you are stationary. 272 About GPS • Error due to GPS satellites The unit automatically calculates your location when it receives signals from three or more GPS satellites. The positioning accuracy enabled by GPS satellites is about 10 m (33 ft), but larger errors in positioning may occur due to the surroundings when positioning is used. Accordingly, your actual location and the location shown on a map may vary. In addition, the GPS satellites are managed by the U.S. Department of Defense, and the accuracy of the system may be altered intentionally. • Error due to positioning time The unit obtains positioning information at regular intervals during positioning. Restrictions Always use the GPS function in accordance with the rules and regulations of the country and/or region of use. Geodetic reference system The unit uses the “WGS-84” geodetic reference system. B Index BATT indicator 27 Battery attachment shoe 12 Battery pack 33 Black balance, adjusting 55 BRIGHT button 19 BRIGHT control 26 Built-in speaker 17 Symbols ! (warning) indicator 27 +48V/OFF switches 25 C 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 5600K function 210 24 A AC power 34 ACCESS indicator 18 Accessories 263 Accessory fitting shoe 12 Additional equipment 261 ALARM knob 15 ALL menu 150 Area of use, setting 38 Arrow buttons 22 ASSIGN switches 15, 23 assigning functions 209 ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) 16 Audio control section 22 Audio format 20 AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 25 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 witches 23 Audio input system 43 Audio level 31 adjusting playback level 15 adjusting recording level 66 AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs 22 Audio level indicators 20 AUDIO OUT connector 25 AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches 23 AUTO W/B BAL switch 14 CA (camera adaptor) connector 13 Camera operator tally indicator 26 CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch 17 CC 5600K function 210 Chapter thumbnail screen 109 Chapter function 117 Clip 126 assigning user-defined name 94 assigning user-defined title 91 changing index picture 120 continuous playback mode 79 deleting 125 duration 108 finding 116 locking 124 properties 121 selecting by type 119 single clip playback mode 79 thumbnail screen 107 transferring 140 unlocking 125 Clip Continuous Rec function 90 display 29 Clip flag setting 82, 124 Clip information 29 Clip list 127 assigning user-defined name 94 clearing 132 creating and editing 127 deleting 132 loading 132 playback 127 saving 131 sorting 133 thumbnail screen 108 Clip list editing 126 Index Numerics Index 273 Color LCD 17 status display 19 Color temperature 28 setting manually 216 Condensation 255 CONTRAST control 26 Cooling fan control mode 29 Cover 17 Current clip list 127 Customization assigning functions to ASSIGN switches 209 Index D Date, setting 39 DC IN connector 12 DC OUT 12V connector 12 DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control) 16 DIAGNOSIS menu 150, 191 Digital extender function 210 Digital hours meter 191 Diopter adjustment ring 26 Direct FTP function 140 Directory structure 228 Disc capacity 73 formatting 75, 136 loading and unloading 74 operations 133 playback conditions 80 playback start position 79 properties 133 restoring lost data 75 salvage function 75 unloading manually 74 write-protecting 73 Disc Exchange Cache function 89 Disc Menu 112 DISP SEL/EXPAND button 18 DISPLAY switch 19 DISPLAY/ASPECT switch 27 E EARPHONE jack 14, 25 ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode 61 E-E (Electric-to-Electric) 14 EJECT button 18 Electric color temperature filter 31 274 Index Electronic shutter 60 Essence mark finding scenes 117 recording 82 thumbnail screen 110 Ethernet connector 24 Expand thumbnail screen 109 Expand function 116 Extender 28 External battery 29 External device control and single clip playback 30 External input status 31 Eyecup 26 F F FWD button 18 F REV button 18 File ALL 150 ID 221 lens 150 reference 150 scene 150 user 150 FILE menu 150, 187 File operations 228 FTP 233 recording continuous timecode restrictions 229 Filter 31 Filter Clips function 119 FILTER selector 14 Fitting for microphone holder 13 Flange focal length, adjusting 42 Focus Assist function 81 Format 53 Frame frequency groups 54 FREEZE 210 Freeze Mix function 80 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 22 FTP 233 command list 235 239 M GAIN selector 16 Gain value 31 setting 208 GENLOCK IN connector 24 GPS 272 Location information 103 Setting the clock 40 Green tally indicator 27 GUI screen operations 114 switching 105 GUI screen operations section 22 Maintenance 244 MAINTENANCE menu 150, 170 Marker display setting 203 Memory symbol and remaining memory capacity 30 Menu disc menu 112 setting menu list 151 setting menu operations 193 setting menu organization 148 thumbnail menu 110 MENU button 22 MENU knob 14 MENU ON/OFF switch 17 Message change confirmation/adjustment progress 203 operation/alarm 250 warning 247 MIC IN (+48 V) connector 13 MIC LEVEL control 14 Microphone holder 27 Microphone, connecting 43 Mixed format recording mode 54 MONITOR knob 15 MONITOR switches 15 Monochrome LCD status display 19 H HOLD/CHAPTER button 18 I Index picture changing 120 Indicators and status display 26 Internal clock 39 Interval Rec function 84 Iris setting/auto iris override 32 Iris, automatic adjustment 64 L LCD monitor 17 selecting display items 201 status display 19 Lens cable clamp 13 LENS connector 13 Lens file, selecting 217 Lens locking lever 13 Lens mount 13 Lens mount cap 13 Lens mount securing rubber 13 Lens, mounting 41 Lid of the disc compartment 23 LIGHT connector 13 LIGHT switch 11 LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors 25 Line input audio equipment, connecting Live Logging function 99 Index G N ND filter 14 Network connector 24 NEXT button 18 Noise suppression function 169 O 46 OPERATION menu 150, 151 Operation/alarm message display area Optional components 263 Output signal, selecting 208 OUTPUT/DCC switch 16 Ownership information 218 31 Index 275 Index P S PAINT menu 150, 162 PEAKING control 26 Picture Cache function 83 Pixel noise reduction function 183 Planning metadata 96, 134 PLAY/PAUSE button 18 Playback clip list 127 freeze-frame 79 normal 79 search result 118 Plug 26 Power saving function 212 Power source voltage/battery remaining capacity 29 Power supply 33 POWER switch 11 PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 22 PREV button 18 Protection cover of the audio control section 18 Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section 18 Proxy data recording 100 Scene editing 126 finding 116, 117 playback 118 Scene file loading 225 saving 223 Scene selection 126 Scrollbar 107 SDI IN (OPTION) connector 23 SDI OUT 1 connector 25 SDI OUT 2 connector 25 SET/S.SEL button 22 Setting change and adjustment progress message display area 31 SHIFT button 22 Shooting advanced operations 82 basic procedure 77 Shortcut list 147 Shot data recording 205 Shot ID setting 205 Shot mark recording 82 Shoulder pad 13 adjusting position 50 Shoulder strap fitting 12 Shoulder strap, using 49 Shutter mode 60 SHUTTER selector 14 Shutter speed 31, 61 Skip scroll 115 Slow & Quick Motion shooting 88 Slow shutter function 61 SLS (Slow Speed Shutter) mode 61 Specifications 257 Status confirmation screen 206 Status display 20 STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch 16 STOP button 18 Stopper 26 Sub clip 127 adding 128 changing start timecode 131 deleting 130 R REC indicator 27 REC START button 14 Recording using memory cache 83 Recording format 53 Recording review 78 Red tally indicator 27 Remaining battery capacity indicator 21 Remaining clips display 32 Remaining disc capacity 32 Remaining disc capacity indicator 21 REMOTE connector 25 Remote control unit, connecting 50 RESET/RETURN button 19 Resolution 19 Retake function 91 276 Index reordering 129 trimming 130 SUB CLIP indicator 22 SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button 22 System frequency 20 setting 53 System frequency and frame rate 29 User gamma file 189 USER menu 149 editing 197 resetting 200 USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu User menu data loading 222 saving 220 150 T U UHF portable tuner, attaching 45 UMID data, setting 218 USB connector 25 USB flash drive jumping to file-related menu page loading saved data 222 saving user menu data 220 User bits, setting 69 V VDR SAVE/STBY switch 16 VF connector 13 Video format 20, 28 setting 54 Video from external devices recording 98 Video light, connecting 48 Viewfinder adjusting focus 37 adjusting position 35 adjusting screen 38 attaching 34 cleaning 244 detaching eyepiece 37 HDVF-20A (optional) 26 moving shoe up 35 rotation bracket 36 screen 27 selecting display items 201 setting 204 status display 27 Viewfinder cable 27 Viewfinder fitting shoe 12 Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob 13 Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever 12 Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring 12 VTR SAVE indicator 27 Index TALLY indicator 24, 27 Tally indicator 26 TALLY switch 24, 26 TC IN connector 24 TC OUT connector 24 TEST OUT connector 24 Testing 240 Thumbnail display items 108 operations 115 searching 116 selecting 115 selecting clip information 120 selecting multiple thumbnails 116 Thumbnail image, setting 83 THUMBNAIL indicator 22 Thumbnail Menu 110 THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button 22 Time counter display 20 Time data 69 Time, setting 39 Timecode 31 setting 69 synchronizing 70 Time-lapse recording 84 TOP menu 149 Tripod mount 13 Tripod, mounting 47 W 226 WARNING indicator 18 Warning indicator area 20 Warnings 246 Web Thumbnail function 137 WHITE BAL switch 16 White balance adjusting 57 Index 277 settings obtained by ATW 58 specifying offset 217 White balance memory 31 Wireless LAN setting 213 Wireless microphone reception level 29 X XLR connection automatic detection function 44 Index 278 Z ZEBRA switch 26 Zoom position 28 Index The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual. Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation. PDW-850 (SYM/CN) 4-544-825-11 (1) Sony Corporation © 2014 ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Multi-format support
- 2/3-inch full-HD "PowerHAD FX" CCDs
- Recording of more than 90 minutes of high-quality video and audio data
- Format compatibility with earlier models
- Rich selection of interfaces
- Picture Cache function
- Supports digital wireless microphone system
- 3.5-inch high-resolution LCD monitor
Frequently asked questions
The PDW-850 supports various system frequencies (1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97P, 1080/50i, 1080/25P, 1080/23.98P, 720/59.94P, and 720/50p) for worldwide HD recording.
The PDW-850 supports recording and playback of SD signals (both NTSC and PAL), allowing a stepwise transition from SD to HD systems. It also supports a variety of HD formats, including formats with 720 lines of resolution.
The PDW-850 uses 2/3-inch full-HD "PowerHAD FX" CCDs, featuring a signal processing ASIC with 16-bit A/D converters, for capturing high-quality images.